1

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS AND

MATERIALS

I NDEX

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 2

1.0 EARTH WORKS

IS No.

IS 1200 (Pt 1) Method of measurement of earth work

IS 1200 (Pt-27) Method of measurement of earth work (by Mechanical Appliances )
IS 4081 Safety code for Blasting and related drilling operation
IS 6313 (pt-II) Anti Termite measures in buildings (pre -constructional)
IS 6313(pt.-III) Anti Termite Measures in Buildings for existing buildings

MORTARS
IS No.
Specification for coarse and fine aggregate from natural source for
IS 383
concrete
IS 455 Specification for Portland slag cement.
IS 460 (Part I) Specification for test sieves: wire cloth test sieves.
IS 1269 Specification for 53 grade ordinary Portland cement
IS 1344 Specification for calcined clay Pozzolana.
IS 1489 Specification for Portland pozzolana cement
IS 1542 Specification for sand for plaster
IS 2116 Specification for sand for masonry mortar.
IS 2250 Code of practice for preparation and use of masonryMortar.
IS 2386 (Pt-I) Method of test for aggregate for concrete (Particle size and shape)
IS 2386 (Pt-II) -Do- Estimation of deleterious materials and organic impurities.
IS 2386 (Pt-III) -Do- Specific gravity, density, voids, absorption and bulking.
IS 3025 Method of sampling and test for water
IS 3406 Specification for masonry cement.
Specification for flyash for use as pozzolana in cement mortar and
IS 3812 (Part I)
concrete
Specification for flyash for use as admixture in cement martar and
IS 3812 (Part II)
concrete
IS 8041 Rapid hardening Portland cement.
IS 8042 Specification for white cement
IS 8112 Specification for 43 grade ordinary Portland cement

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 3

CONCRETE WORKS
IS No.
Specification for coarse and fine aggregate from natural sources for
IS 383
concrete.
IS 456 Plain and reinforced concrete - Code of practice
IS 516 Method of test for strength of concrete
IS 1199 Method of sampling and analysis of concrete
Method of measurement of building and civil engineering work
IS 1200(Part II)
(concretework)
IS 1322 Specification for bitumen felt for water proofing and damp proofing.
IS 1791 General requirements for batch type conrete mixers
IS 2386 Method of test for aggregates for concrete
(a) Part I Particle size and shape
(b) Part II Estimation of deleterious materials and organic impurities
(c) Part III Specific gravity, density, voids absorption and bulking.
(d) Part IV Mechanical properties.
(e) Part V Soundness
IS 2505 General requirements for concrete vibrators - immersion type.
General requirements for concrete vibrators - screed board concrete
IS 2506
vibrators
Specification for integral water proofing compounds for cement mortar
IS 2645
and concrete
Specification for broken brick (burnt clay) coarse aggregate for use in
IS 3068
concrete.
Specification for flyash for use as pozzolana and admixture in cement
IS 3812
mortar and concrete.
IS 4656 Specification for form vibrators for concrete.
Code of practice for extreme weather concreting (Part-I) recommended
IS 7861(Part-I)
practice for hot weather concreting.

IS 7861(Part II) Code of practice for extreme weather concreting (Part-II) recommended.

IS 9103 Specification for concrete admixtures

RCC WORKS
IS Code Subject
IS 226 Structural Steel
Specification for mild steel and medium tensile steel bars and hard
IS 432 (Part I) drawn steel wire for concrete reinforcement part-I mild steel and medium
tensile steel bars.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 4

Specification for mild steel and medium tensile steel bars and hard
IS 432 (Part II) drawn steel wire for concrete reinforcement Part-II hard drawn steel
wire.
IS 456 Code of Practices for plain and Reinforced concrete.
IS 516 Method of test for strength of concrete.
IS 1199 Method of sampling and analysis of concrete.
Method of measurement of building and civil engineering work
IS 1200 (Part II)
concrete work
Method of measurement of building and civil engineering work
IS 1200 (Part V)
concrete work (Part 5- Form work)

IS 1566 Specification for hard drawn steel wire fabric for concrete requirement.

IS 1343 Code of Practice for Prestressed Concrete

IS 1608 Method for tensile testing of steel products
Specification for high strength deformed steel and wires for concrete
IS 1786
reinforcement.
IS 1791 Specification for batch type concrete mixes
Code of practice for bending and fixing of bars for concrete
IS 2502
reinforcement.
Recommended practice for welding of mild steel plain and deformed bars
IS 2751
for reinforced construction.
IS 4925 Batch plants specification for concrete batching and mixing plant
IS 4926 Ready Mixed Concrete
IS 6523 Specification for precast reinforced concrete door, window frames
IS 10262 Recommended guidelines for concrete mix design
Indian standard for non-destructive testing of concrete. Method of test for
IS 13311(Part I)
ultrasonic pulse velocity
Indian standard for non-destructive testing of concrete. Method of testing
IS 13311(Part II)
by rebound hammer.

BRICK MASONRY
IS No.
IS 712 Specification for building limes.
IS 1077 Common burnt clay building bricks.
IS 1200 (Part 3) Method of measurements of brick works
IS 2212 Code of practice for brick work. (1st Revision)
IS 2222 Specification for burnt clay perforated building bricks.
Specification for non load bearing gypsum partition blocks, (Solid and
IS 2849
hollow types)

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 5

IS 3495 Method of test for burnt clay building bricks.

IS 3812 Specification for fly ash for use as pozzolana and admixture.
IS 4139 Specification of calcium silicate bricks
IS4885 Specification for sewer brick
IS 5454 Methods of sampling of clay building bricks.
IS 12894 Pulverized fuel ash lime bricks specification,
IS13757 Specification of burnt clay fly ash bricks.

STONE MASONRY
IS No.
Methods of determination of properties and strengths of natural building
IS 1121
stones (Part-I compressive strength).

IS 1122 Methods for determination of specific gravity of natural building stone

IS 1123 Methods of identification of natural building stones.

Methods of test of determination of water absorption, apparent, specific
IS 1124
gravity and porposity of natural building stones.
IS 1128 Specification for Lime stone (Slab & Tiles).
Methods of measurements of building and Civil engineering works stone
IS 1200 (Pt. IV)
Masonry.
IS 1197 (Pt. I) Code of practice for construction of rubble stone masonry
IS 1597 (Pt. II) Code of practice for construction of ashlar stone masonry
IS 3620 Specification for latrite stone block for masonry
IS 3622 Sand stone (Slab & Tiles)
GRANITE /MARBLE WORK
IS No.
Method of test for determination of true specific gravity of natural building
IS 1122
stones.
Method of test for determination of water absorption, apparent specific
IS 1124
gravity and porosity of natural building stones.
IS 1130 Marble (blocks, slabs and tiles).
IS 3316 Specifications for structural granite
IS 14223 (Part 1) Polished Building Stones (Part-1) Granite

WOOD WORK ,DOOR & FITTINGS

IS No.

IS 204 (Part Specification for tower bolts (ferrous bolt)

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 6

I)
IS 204 (Part
Specification for tower bolts (non ferrous metals)
II)
IS 205 Specification for non ferrous metal butt hinges
IS 208 Specification for door handles
IS 281 Specification for mild steel door bolts for use with pad locks
IS 303 Specification for plywood for general purposes
IS 362 Specification for parliament hinges
IS 710 Specifications for Marine Plywood
IS 723 Specification for steel counter sunk head wire nails.
IS 729 Specification for drawer lock, cup board lock and box locks
IS 852 Specification for animal glue for general wood work purpose
IS 1003
Specification for timber panelled and glazed shutter Part I (door shutters)
(Part I)
IS 1003 Specification for timber panelled and glazed shutter Part II (window and
(Part II) ventilator shutter)
IS 1200 Part
Method of measurement of building and civil engg work glazing.
XIV
IS 1200 Part
Wood work and joinery
XII
IS 1328 Specification for veneered decorative plywood
IS 1341 Specification for steel butt hinges
IS 1566 Specification for hard drawn steel wire fabric
IS 1659 Specification for block boards
IS 1823 Specification for floor door stopper
IS 1868 Specification for anodic coating on aluminium and its alloy
IS 2095 Specification for gypsum plaster board
IS 2096 Specification for asbestos cement flat sheet.
IS 2202 (Pt Specification for wooden flush door shutter, solid core type (plywood face panels
I) )
IS 2202
(Particle boards and hard board face panels)
(Part II ) -do-
IS 2209 Specification for mortice lock (Vertical Type )
IS 2547 Specification for gypsum plaster

IS 2681 Specification for non-ferrous metal sliding door bolts use with pad locks

IS 3087 Specification for wood particle boards (Medium density) for general purpose.

IS 3097 Specification for veneered particle board

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 7

IS 3564 Specification for door closer (hydraulically regulated)

IS 3818 Specification for continuous (Piano) hinges
IS 3847 Specification for mortice night latch
IS 4948 Specification for welded steel wire fabric for general use
IS 4992 Specification for rebated mortice lock
IS 5509 Specification for Fire Retardant Plywood
IS 5930 Specification for mortice latch
IS 6607 Specification for rebated mortice lock (Vertical type)
IS 6760 Specification for sloted counter sunk head wood screws.
IS 7196 Specification for hold fast
IS 7534 Specification for sliding locking bolts for use with pad lock
IS 12406 Specification for medium density fibre board
IS 12817 Specification for stainless steel Butt Hinges
IS 12823 Specification for wood products Prelaminated particle Boards
IS 14616 Specifications for laminated veneer lumber
IS 14842 Specification for coir veneer board for general purposes

IS 14856 Specification for glass fibre reinforced plastic (FRP) panel type door

IS 14900 Specifications for transparent float glass

STEEL WORK
IS No.
IS 63 Whiting for paints and putty
IS 198 Varnish gold size
IS 228 Structural steel (Standard quality)
IS 277 Specification for galvanized steel sheets (Plain and corrugated)

IS 800 Code of practice for use of structural steel in general in steel construction

IS 806 Code of practice for use of steel Tubes in general building construction

IS 808 Dimensions for Hot rolled steel beams, columns, channel and angle sections

IS 812 Glossary of terms relating to welding and cutting metals

Covered electrodes for manual metal arc welding of carbon and carbon
IS 814
manganese steel
Code of practice for use of metal arc welding for general construction in mild
IS 816
steel
IS 822 Code of procedure for inspection of welds
IS 823 Manual for metal arc welding in mild steel

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 8

IS 1038 Steel doors, windows and ventilators

Code of practice for fixing and glazing of metal (Steel and aluminium) doors,
IS 1081
windows and ventilators
IS 1161 Steel tubes for structural purposes
Recommended practice for radiographic examination of fusion welded butt joints
IS 1182
in steel plates
IS 1200- (Pt.
Method of measurements of steel work and iron works
VIII)
IS 1363 Part
Haxagon head bolts, screws, and nuts of product grade C (Hexagon Head bolt)
I
IS 1363 Part
II
IS 1363
Haxagan Head Bolts, screws and Nuts of product grade
Part-III
IS 1367 Technical supply conditions for threaded steel fasteners
IS 1599 Method for bend test
IS 1608 Metallic materials Tensile Testing at Ambient Temperature.
IS 1821 Dimensions for clearance holes for bolts and screws
IS 1852 Rolling and cutting tolerance for hot rolled steel products
IS 1894 Method for tensile testing of steel tubes
IS 1977 Structural steel (ordinary quality)
IS 2062 Hot Rolled low, medium and high tensile structural steel
IS 2074 Ready mixed paint, air drying redoxide zinc chrome priming
IS 4351 Specification for steel door frames
IS 4711 Methods for sampling of steel pipes, tube and fittings.
IS 4736 Hot dip zinc coating on mild steel tubes
IS 4923 Hollow Steel Sections for Structural Use - Specification
IS 6248 Metal rolling shutters and rolling grills

IS 7452 Specification for hot rolled steel sections for doors, windows and ventilators.

FLOORING

IS No.
IS 455 Specification for portland slag cement
IS 702 Specification for industrial bitumen
Method of test for determination of water absortion, apparent specific gravity and
IS 1124
porosity of natural building stones
IS 1130 Specification for marble (blocks, slabs and tiles)

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 9

IS 1141 Code of practice for Seasoning of timber

IS 1200- Method of measurement of Building and Civil Engineering work (Part 11) paving,
(Part XI ) floor finishes, dado and skirting
IS 1237-
Specification for cement concrete flooring tiles
Edition 2.3
IS 1322 Specification for bitumen felts for water proofing and dampproofing

IS 1443 Code of practice for laying and finishing of cement concrete flooring tiles
IS 1489
Specification for portland pozzolana cement (Part-I) flyash based
(Part-I)
IS 1489-
Specification for Portland pozzolana cement (Part II) calcined clay based
(Part II)

IS 1580 Specification for bituminous compounds for water proofing and caulking purpose

IS 2114 Code of practice for laying in-situ terrazzo floor finish

IS 2571 Code of practice for laying in-situ cement concrete flooring
IS 3622 Specification for sand stone (Slab & Tiles)
IS 3670 IS 3670 Code of practice for construction of timber floors
IS 4457 IS 4457 Acid and/or alkali Resistant tiles.

IS 5318 Code of practice for laying of hard wood parquet and wood block floors

IS 5766 Code of practice for laying of burnt clay brick floor

IS 8041 Specification for rapid hardening portland cement
IS 8042 Specification for white portland cement
IS 8112 Specification for 43 grade ordinary portland cement
IS 12330 Specification for sulphate resisting portland cement.
IS: 13630
(Part-1 to Methods of Testing of ceramic tiles
15)
IS 13712 Specification for ceramic tiles; definition, classification characteristic and marking

IS 15622 Specification for pressed ceramic tile

ROOFING
IS No.
IS 73 Specification for paving Bitumen
IS 277 Galvanised steel sheets (plain and corrugated)
IS 651 Glazed stoneware pipes and fittings
IS 702 Specification for industrial bitumen

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 10

IS 1199 Methods of sampling and analysis of concrete

IS 1200 Method of measurements of building and civil engineering works: Part 9 Roof
(PT.IX) covering ( including cladding)
IS 1200 Method of measurements of building and civil engineering works:Part -10 ceiling
(PTX) and lining
IS 1230 Cast iron rain water pipes and fitting
IS 1367 (PT Technical supply conditions for threaded steel fasteners pt.13 hot dip galvanized
-13) coating on threaded fasteners
IS 2095 (PT-
Gypsum plaster boards (Pt.1) plain Gypsum plaster boards
1)
IS 2115 Code of practice for flat roof finish: mud phuska
IS 2633 Method of testing uniformity of coating on zinc coated articles
Specification for integral water proofing compounds for cement mortar and
IS 2645
concrete
IS 3007
Code of practice for laying of asbestos cement sheets: part- 1 corrugated sheets
(PT.1)
IS 3007 Code of practice for laying of asbestos cement sheets part- 2 semicorrugated
(PT.2) sheets

IS 3384 Specification for bitumen primer for water proofing and damp proofing

Unplasticised polyvinyl chloride (UPVC) pipes for soil and Waste discharge
IS 13592
system for inside and outside building.
IS 14753 Specifications for polymethyl Methacrylate (PMMA) (Arylic) sheets
IS 14862 Fibre cement flat sheets specifications

IS No.
IS 133 Enamel, Interior (a) Under Coating (b) Finishing
IS 217 Specification for Cut Back Bitumen
IS 290 Coal Tar Black Paint
IS 427 Distemper, Dry Colour as Required
IS 428 Distemper, Oil Emulsion, Colour as Required
IS 712 Specification For Building Limes
IS 1200 (Pt- Method of Measurements of Building and Civil Engineering Works : Part : XII
XII) Plastering and Pointing
Method of Measurements of Building and Civil Engineering Works :Part : XIII
IS 1200(Pt-
White Washing, Colour Washing Distempering and Painting of Building
XIII)
Surfaces.
IS 1200 (Pt- Methods of Measurements of Building and Civil Engineering Works : Part : XV
XV) Painting, Polishing, Varnishing etc.
IS 2932 Enamel, Synthetic, Exterior (a) Undercoating, (b) Finishing

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 11

IS 2933 Enamel, Exterior (a) Undercoating (b) Finishing

IS 5410 Cement Paint
IS 5411(Pt-
Plastic Emulsion : Paint Part I For Interior Use
1)
IS 6278 Code of Practice For White Washing and Colour Washing

IS No.
IS 1200 (Pt Method of Measurements of Building and Civil Engineering Works (Part XVIII)
XVIII) Demolition and Dismantling
IS 4130 Demolition of Buildings Code of Safety
ROAD WORK (Including IRC Codes)
IS No.
IS 73 Specification for paving bitumen
IS 164 Ready mixed paint for road marking
IS 217 Specification for cut back bitumen
IS 8112 Specification for 43 grade ordinary Portland Cement
IS 278 Specification for galvanized steel barbed wire for fencing

IS 383 Specification for coarse and fine aggregate from natural sources for concrete

IS 460 Specification for test sieves

IS 516 Method of test for strength of concrete
IS 702 Specification for industrial bitumen
IS 712 Specification for building limes
IS 1195 Specification for bitumen mastic for flooring
IS 1199 Methods of sampling and analysis of concrete

IS 1203 Method of testing tar and bituminous material, determination of penetration

IS 1834 Specification for hot applied sealing compound for joint in concrete

Specification for performed fillers for expansion joint in concrete pavements

IS 1838 (Pt.1)
and structures(non extruding and resilient type/ bitumen impregnated fibre)

IS 2386 (Pt.I) Method of test for aggregate for concrete particle size and shape
IS 2386 (Pt. Method of test for aggregate for concrete estimation of deleterious materials
II)1963 and organic impurities
Method of test for aggregate for concrete specific gravity, density, voids,
IS 2386 (Pt.III)
absorption and bulking
IS 2386 (Pt.IV) Method of test for aggregate for concrete mechanical properties
IS 2720 (Pt.V) Method of test for soil: Determination of liquid and plastic limit.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 12

IS 2720 (Pt. Methods of test for soils: part VII determination of water content dry density
VII) relation using light compaction
IS 2720 (Pt. Method of test for soil: determination of dry density of soils in place, by sand
XXVIII) replacement method
IS 3812 Specification for fly ash for use as pozzolana and admixture
Method of test for determining aggregate impact value of soft coarse
IS 5640
aggregates

IS No.
Recommended practice for borrow pits for road embankments constructed by
IRC 10
manual operation
IRC 29 Specification for bituminous concrete for road pavements

IRC 36 Recommended practice for construction of earth embankments for road works

Tentative guidelines for the use of lime flyash concrete as pavement base of
IRC 60
sub base
Recommended practice for lime flyash stabilized soil base/ sub base in
IRC 88
pavement construction
IRC 107 Tentative specification for bitumen mastic wearing courses

IS No.
Specification for glazed fire clay sanitary appliances: Part 1: General
IS 771 (Pt.1)
requirements.
Specification for glazed fire clay sanitary appliances: Part 2: Specific
IS 771 (Pt.-2)
requirements of kitchen and laboratory sink.
Flushing cisterns for water closets and urinals (Other than plastic cistern)-
IS 774
Specifications.
Water fittings- copper alloy float valves (horizontal plunger type) -
IS 1703
Specification.
Cast iron /Ductile Iron Drainage Pipes and pipe fittings for Over ground non-
IS 1729
pressure pipe line Socket and Spigot Series.
IS 1795 Specification for pillar taps for water supply purposes.
Specification for Automatic Flushing Cisterns for Urinals (Other than plastic
IS 2326
cisterns)
IS 2548 (Part- Plastic seats and covers for water closets Part 1: Thermo set seats and
1) covers - Specifications
IS 2548 (Part- Plastic seats and covers for water closets Part 2: Thermoplastic seats and
2) covers.- Specifications
IS 2556 Vitreous sanitary appliances (vitreous china) -Specifications

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 13

IS 2556 (Part-
General requirements.
1) Part-1:
IS 2556 (Part-
Specific requirements of wash-down water closets.
2) Part-2:
IS 2556 (Part-
Specific squatting pans.
3) Part-3:
IS 2556 (Part-
Specific requirements of wash basins.
4) Part-4:
IS 2556 (Part-
Specific requirements of Urinals & Partition plates
6) Part-6:
IS 2556 (Part-
Specific requirements of accessories for sanitary appliances
7) Part-7:
IS 2556 (Part -
Specific requirements of integrated squatting pans.
14) Part-14:
IS 2556 (Part -
Specific requirements of universal water closets.
15) Part-15:
IS 2963 Specification for Copper alloy waste fittings for wash basins and sinks.

Specification for centrifugally cast (spun) iron spigot and socket soil, waste
IS 3989
and ventilating pipes fittings and accessories.

IS 4984 Specification for high density polyethylene pipes for potable water supplies.

IS 4985 Unplasticised P.V.C. pipes for potable water supply Specifications.

IS 7231 Plastic flushing cisterns for water closets and urinals Specifications.

IS 13983 Stainless steel sinks for domestic purposes Specifications.

WATER SUPPLY
IS No.
Pipe threads where pressure tight joints are required on the threads-
IS 554
Dimensions, tolerances and designation.
Specification for copper alloy gate, and check valves for water works
IS 778
purposes
IS 779 Water meters (domestic type) Specification

IS 780 Specification for sluice valves for water works purposes (50 to 300 mm size)

Steel tubes tubular and other wrought steel fittings, Part 1- Steel tubes-
IS 1239
Specification

Specification for mild steel tubes tubular and other wrought steel fittings, Part
IS 1239
2-Mild street tubular and other wrought steel pipe fittings

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 14

Centrifugally cast (spun) iron pressure pipes for water gas and sewage-
IS 1536
Specification
Plastic Bib taps and stop valves (rising spindle) for cold water services
IS 9763
specifications
IS 15450 PE-AL-PE Pipes for hot and cold water supplies-Specifications
Chlorinated Polyvinyl Chloride (CPVC) pipes for potable hot and cold water
IS 15778
distribution supplies-specifications.
Polypropylene- Random Copolymer Pipes for hot and cold water supplies-
IS 15801
Specifications

DRAINAGE WORKS
IS No.
IS 458 Pre-cast Concrete Pipes (with and without reinforcement).
IS 651 Specification for Salt Glazed Stoneware Pipes and Fittings.
IS 783 Code of Practice for Laying Concrete Pipes
IS 1726 Specification for Cast Iron Manhole Covers and Frames
Cast Iron /Ductile Iron Drainage Pipes and Pipe Fittings Socket and Spigot
IS 1729
Series for Over-ground Non-pressure Pipe Line.
IS 4127 Code of Practice for Laying of Glazed Stone Ware Pipes
IS 12592 Pre-cast Concrete Manhole Covers and Frames Specifications

PILING WORK
IS No.
IS-1200 (Part
Method of measurement of building and Civil Engineering Works Piling.
23)
IS-2911 (Part Code of practice for Design and Construction of pile foundation. Driven cast-
1/Sec. 1) in-situ piles.
IS-2911 (Part Code of practice of Design and Construction of pile foundation. Bored Cast-in-
1/Sec. 2) situ piles.
IS-2911 (Part Code of practice for Design and Construction of pile foundation. Driven pre-
1/Sec. 3) cast concrete piles.
IS-2911 (Part Code of practice for Design and Construction of pile foundation. Bored pre-
1/Sec. 4) cast concrete piles.
IS-2911 (Part Code of practice for Design and Construction of pile foundation. Under
3) reamed piles.
IS-2911 (Part Code of practice for design and Construction of pile foundation. Load test on
4) piles.
IS-5112 Safety Code for piling and other deep foundations.
IS-6428 Specification for pile frame.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 15

IS-9716 Guide for lateral dynamic load test on piles.

ALUMINIUM GLAZING WORK

IS No.
Wrought Aluminium and Aluminium Alloys, Bars, Rods and Sections (For
IS 733
General Engineering Purposes) -Specification
Wrought Aluminium and Aluminium alloy sheet and strip for general
IS 737
engineering purposes -Specification

Wrought Aluminium and Aluminium Alloy, Extruded Round Tube and Hollow
IS 1285
sections (For General Engineering Purposes) - Specification

IS 1868 Anodic coating on Aluminium and its Alloys-Specification

IS 1948 Specification for Aluminium Doors, Windows and Ventilators
IS 3908 Specification for Aluminium equal leg angles
IS 3909 Specification for Aluminium unequal leg angles
IS 5523 Method of testing anodic coating on aluminium and its alloys.

IS 6315 Floor springs (Hydraulically regulated) for heavy doors-Specifications

IS 6477 Dimensions of extruded hollow section and tolerances

IS 12823 Wood products- Pre-laminated particle board Specifications.
IS 14900 Transparent Float glass- Specifications.
WATER PROOFING
IS No.
IS 73 Paving Bitumen Specifications
IS 702 Specifications for Industrial Bitumen

IS 1322 Specifications for Bitumen felts for Water Proofing and Damp Proofing.

IS 2645 Specifications for Integral Cement Water Proofing Compounds

IS 3370 (Part - Code of Practice for Concrete Structures for the Storage of Liquid: Part -1
1) General Requirements.

IS 3384 Specifications for Bitumen Primer for Water Proofing and Damp Proofing

IS 7193 Specification for Glass Fibre Bitumen Felts

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 16

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION-CIVIL WORK

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS- MATERIALS

GENERAL:

a. All materials to be used in the execution of Civil & structural works shall be governed by the
requirements of this specification.

b. Whenever any reference to IS codes is made, the same shall be taken as the latest revision ( with
all amendments issued thereto ) as on the date of submission of the bid.

c. Apart from the IS codes mentioned in particular in Various clauses of this , for a specific work
under consideration all other relevant codes regarding quality testing and/ or inspection
procedures shall be applicable. Reference to some of the codes in the various clauses of this
specification does not limit or restrict the scope of applicability of other referred or relevant
codes.

d. In case of any variation/ contradiction in provisions between IS codes and this specification, the
provisions given in this specification shall be followed with the approval of the Engineer in
Charge/ consultant / architect.

e. All materials shall be of standard quality and shall be procured from renowned sources/
manufactures approved by the Architect / Consultant. It shall be the responsibility of the
Contractor, to get all materials approved prior to procurement and placement of order.

f. Quality and acceptability of materials not covered under this specification shall be governed by
the relevant IS codes. In case IS code is not available for the particular material, other codes e.g.
BS or DIN or ASTM shall be considered. The decision of the Engineer-in-Charge / consultant /
architect in this regard shall be final and binding on the contractor.

g. Whenever asked for, the Contractor shall submit representative samples of materials to be client
for inspection and approval. Approval of any sample does not necessarily exempt the Contractor
from submitting necessary test reports for the approved materials, as per the specification /
relevant IS codes.

h. The Contractor shall submit manufacture s test reports on quality and suitability of any material
procured from them and their recommendation on storage, application, workmanship etc. for the
intended use. Submission of manufacturer s test reports does not restrict the client/ consultant
from asking for fresh test results from an approved laboratory of the actual material supplied from
any approved manufacture/ source at any stage of execution of work.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 17

i. All costs relating to or arising out of carrying out the tests and submission of test reports and or
samples to the client/ consultant for approval during the entire tenure of the work shall be borne
by the Contractor and included in the quoted rates.

j. Materials for approval shall be separately stored and marked, as directed by the client / consultant
and shall not be used in the works till these are approved. The Contractor at his own cost shall
immediately remove all rejected materials from the site.

k. Approval and Tests

All materials to be used in construction shall be subject to approval of the Engineer. The
Contractor shall apply sufficiently in advance with samples of the materials including the
supporting test results from the approved laboratory and other documentary evidence from the
manufacturer wherever applicable and indicating the types of materials and their respective
sources. The delivery of materials at site shall commence only after the approval of the quality,
grading and sources of the materials.

The quality of all materials once approved shall be maintained throughout the period of
construction and periodical tests shall be carried out to ensure that it is maintained. Such routine
tests shall be listed under the different materials and/or as may be ordered by the Engineer from
time to time.

Where a particulars "Brand" or "Make" of material is specified in the Schedule of Items or

Technical Specifications, such "Brand" or Make" of material alone shall be used on the work.
Should it become necessary for any reason such as non-availability, to use any material other than
the specified "Brand" or "Make", the Contractor shall submit sample of the same to the Engineer
for approval together with test certificates and other documents necessary for examining and
giving approval thereof. Should such change or substitution of material subsequently approved
result in use of material of price lower than that of the material specified in the Schedule of Items
or Technical Specifications, the rates for the appropriate items of work affected by the
substitution shall be proportionately reduced. In case the substitution results in use of material of
price higher than that specified in the Schedule of Items or Technical Specifications, no upward
revision of the rates will be allowed.

Rejection of Materials

Any material brought to site which, in the opinion of the Engineer is damaged,contaminated,
deteriorated or does not comply with the requirement of this specification, shall be rejected.

If the routine site tests or random site tests show that any of the materials, brought to site, do not
comply in any way with the requirements of this specification, then that material shall be rejected.

The Contractor shall remove from site any and all such rejected material within the time specified
by the Engineer.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 18

1.1.0 CEMENT

SUPPLY:

Cement used shall be one of the following with prior approval of the Engineer-in-Charge /
consultant / architect.

Grade 43 Ordinary Portland Cement conforming to IS: 8112.

Grade 53 Ordinary Portland Cement conforming to IS: 12269.
Portland Slag Cement conforming to IS : 455.
Portland Pozzolana Cement conforming to IS : 1489.

Cement to be used shall be of the best quality from approved reputed brands or any other
equivalent as approved by the Client / consultant.

Unless otherwise specified ordinary Portland Cement of 43 grade conforming to IS : 8112 shall
be used for all concrete works.

Where specified, special cement like Sulphate resisting Portland cement ( conforming to IS :
8042-E ), Coloured cement shall be used.

Rapid hardening cement shall have strength in one day equal to that of OPC in 3 days. It shall be
used for products like Hume pipe, tiles, sleepers, and poles, prestressed and precast members. It
shall also be used for foundation, bridges, culverts, causeways, etc. where quick construction
activity is required however with prior permission of the consultant / architect. Test certificates
showing that the cement complies with the specifications must be submitted to the consultant.

Sulphate resistant cement should possess low heat of hydration, more compressive strength at 3, 7
and 28 days than OPC. It should be capable of withstanding attack of aggressive substances like
sulphate of sodium, magnesium, calcium, etc. which damage concrete structures. It shall be used
with prior approval for structures in or near sea water, where the soil conditions are aggressive,
where repeated cycles of drying and wetting occur and also for structures exposed to sulphate
attack like industrial drains, sewage pipes, foundations, bridge, dams. Tunnels. Test certificates
showing that the cement complies with the specifications must be submitted to the consultant.

Coloured cement shall be white or grey Portland cement mixed with pigment as specified in the
item of work, it shall comply with physical requirements of IS : 269/8112 and pigments shall be
inorganic oxide pigments either natural or synthetic in origin complying with the requirements of
B.S.: 1014 The pigments used for coloured cements shall be of approved quality and its quantity
and its quantity shall not exceed 10% of cement used in the mix. The mixture of pigment and
cement shall be properly ground to have a uniform colour and shade. The pigments shall have
such properties as to provide durability under exposure to sunlight and weather. The pigment
shall have the properly such that it is neither affected by the cement not detrimental to it.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 19

In case more than one type of cement is used in any work, a record shall be kept showing the
location and type of cement used. Each type of cement shall preferably be obtained from one
constant source throughout the contract. Cement of different types shall not be mixed with one
another. Different brands of cement or the same brand of cement from different sources shall not
be used without prior notification or approval by client.
The cement shall be supplied to the site in original sealed bags, which shall be labeled with the
weight, name of manufacturer, date of manufacture, brand and type. Cement received in torn bags
shall not be used. Bags of cement that vary in weight by more than 3% shall not be accepted.

The Contractor shall maintain a daily record of cement received and consumed in an approved
form and copy shall be submitted to the Engineer-in-Charge once a week.

1.2.0 Storage :

Cement bags shall be stored dry, leak proof, moisture proof and well-ventilated godowns built at
the cost of the Contractor. Cement of different types shall be stored in separate godowns or
separate compartments of a godown.

The floor of the godown shall be raised and shall consist of wooden planks resting on the base
prepared with dry bricks laid on edges. Stacking of cement bags shall have a clearance 150 to 200
mm above the floor and 450 mm from the wall.

Cement shall be stored in stocks, which are not higher than 10 bags avoid lumping due to
pressure and in such a manner as to permit easy access for inspection and identification.

The bags shall be kept close together in rows of two bags to reduce circulation of air as much as
possible. The bags shall be arranged in header and stretcher fashion so as to lessen the danger of
topping.

First in First out rules shall be applied while removing the bags for use.

Cement stored during monsoons or for an unusually long period, shall be completely enclosed in
polythene sheet which shall cover the top of the stack. The Contractor shall ensure that the
polythene sheet is not damaged at any time during use. Storage under tarpaulins shall not be
permitted.

No stored cement bag shall be used after three months from the date of manufacture. Generally,
stacking and storing of cement shall be in accordance with Clause 3.2 of IS : 4082.
1.3.0 Quality of cement

The manufacture shall satisfy himself that the cement conforms to the relevant Indian standards
and if required, shall furnish a certificate to this effect to the purchase or his representative within
ten days of the dispatch of the cement.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 20

The Contractor shall be fully responsible for the quantity of cement brought to work site. In case
the Contractor has any doubt regarding the quality of cement brought to work site, it is upto him
to have it tested at his own expense and make sure that the cement is of acceptable quality.

1.4.0. Testing

1.4.1 The Contractor shall submit test certificates furnished by the manufacture to client / consultant is
not convinced about the quality of cement, he can ask the Contractor to have the cement tested or
he can take samples in the presence of Contractor from cement bags stored at work site and
forward them to government for testing. Expenses towards such tests shall be borne by the
Contractor.

1.5.0. Sampling :

For one lot of 50 tonnes of cement, 2% of bags be picked out at random, from which one sample
of 15 kg shall be taken.

1.5.2 Samples for testing may be taken by the purchaser or his representative within one week of
delivery and all tests shall commence within one week of sampling.

When it is not possible to test the samples within one week, the samples shall be backed and
stored in airtight containers till testing.

Causes for rejection :

1.6.1 Cement not conforming to relevant specification shall be rejected by the client / consultant. The
Contractor, at his own expense shall immediately remove rejected cement from the work site.

1.6.2 Damaged or reclaimed or partly set cement will not be permitted to be used and shall be removed
from the site.

1.6.3 The minimum requirements for any type of cement to be considered as acceptable are in table-A

TABLE A : PHYSICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR CEMENT

Type of cement OPC OPC 43 OPC 53 PPC PSC

33 Grade Grade
Grade
Code NO. IS:269 IS:8112 IS 12269 IS 1489 IS 455
Fineness by Blaine s method 225 225 225 300 225
(sq. m / kg), min
Setting time(mins)
initial(More than) 30 30 30 30 30
Final(Less than) 600 600 600 600 600
Loss on ignition (Max %) 5 5 4 5 4

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 21

Insoluble Residue 4 2 2 {0.960 x 2.5

( Max %) + 4} x = % of
Pozzolana
Soundness ( Max) 10 10 10 10 10
Lechatelier ( mm) 0. 8 0. 8 0. 8 0. 8 0. 8
Autoclave ( %)
Compressive Strength
*( Min) ( N / sq. mm)
7 days 22 33 37 22 22
28 days 33 43 53 31 -

Compressive strength test shall be carried out on 70.70 x70.70 x 70.70 mm mortar cubes made from
cement and sand (conforming to IS 650 ) mixed in the proportion 1:3.0

2.0.0 AGGREGATES

Aggregates for concrete shall be produced from approved source conforming to the specifications
of IS:383 and shall be chemically insert, clean, strong, durable, with limited porosity and free
from deleterious materials which cause corrosion of reinforcement or may impair the strength and
durability of concrete. Aggregates shall not contain water-soluble sulphur trioxide in excess of
0.1%. The chloride ion content of fine and coarse aggregate shall not exceed .06% and 0.02%
respectively by mass of dry aggregate. If either aggregate exceeds these limits the material may
still be considered acceptable by the Engineer provided that the total chloride ion concentration
derived from the aggregate is not grater than 0.35% by mass of the cement in the mix.

All aggregates shall comply with IS:2386 and IS:383 in respect of impurities and additionally
with the following :

a) Absorption
6% maximum by weight for ordinary construction and 2% maximum for water proof
construction.

b) Salt
1% maximum (equivalent anhydrous calcium percentage by weight of cement)

c) Shell
8% maximum by weight.

d) Carbonates
10% maximum by weight.

Unless otherwise specified fine aggregate shall be imply natural river sand for the purpose of
reinforced concrete work.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 22

FINE AGGREGATE :

2.1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

a The maximum size of the sand particles shall be 4.75 mm and down graded.
b The sand shall be free from adherent coatings and not contain harmful materials such as iron
pyrites, coal, mica, slit, clay, alkali, sea shell, organic impurities, loam, etc.
c The maximum quantity of deleterious materials shall not exceed 5 percent and the limits specified
in table 1 of IS: 383 when tested in accordance with IS:2386 (part-2).
d Aggregates, which are chemically reactive with alkalis of cement, shall not be used, as it will
induce cracking of concrete.
e Slit and dust present in natural sand shall be limited to 8% by weight. In case it is more than 8% it
shall be washed at site with clean water. Presence of mica shall not be more than 1% by weight.

2.1.2 Grading

Fine aggregate with a fineness modulus value less than 2 shall not be used for reinforced
concrete work. The natural sand used for RCC work shall have a grading conforming to one of
the three grading zones given in the following table (Table b). Fine aggregate conforming to
grade IV as per IS: 383 shall not be used for RCC works.

For coarse sand the grading of sand as determined by the method prescribed in IS: 2386 Part I
shall be within the limits of grading III given in Table B.

Stone dust shall be obtained by crushing hard stone and the grading shall be as determined by the
method prescribed in IS : 2386 Part I & II. It shall be within the limits of grading zone III. The
fineness modulus of stone dust shall not be less than 1.8. It shall not contain more than 8% of silt
as determined by field test with measured cylinder. The silt content is found out by keeping a
sample of stone dust without drying in 200 mm measuring cylinder. The quantity of the sample
shall be such that it fills the cylinder upto 10mm mark. Then clean water shall be added upto 150
mm mark. The mixture shall be stirred vigorously and the contents allowed to settle for 3 hours.
The height of slit visible as settled layer above the stone dust shall be expressed as percentage
more than 8% of silt shall be washed so as to being down the content within the allowable limit.

When grading falls outside the limits of any particular grading Zone of sieves, other than 600
micron IS sieve, by a total amount not exceeding 5%, it shall be regarded as falling within that
grading zone.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 23

TABLE B: GRADING OF FINE AGGREGATE (AS PER IS: 383)

IS Sieve percentage by
Designation weight passing
IS Sieve
Grading Zone Grading Zone Grading Zone Grading Zone
I II III IV
10 mm 100 100 100 100
4. 75 m m 90-100 90-100 90-100 95-100
2. 36 m m 60-95 75-100 85-100 95-100
1. 18 m m 30-70 55-90 75-100 90-100
600 micron 15-34 35-59 60-79 80-100
300 micron 5-20 8-30 12-40 15-50
150 micron 0-10 0-10 0-10 0-15

Sampling and testing

Fine aggregate shall be subjected to inspection and testing.

The method of sampling for test shall be in accordance with IS: 2430

Samples of fine aggregate for testing shall be collected from transportation units or stack or
stockpiles. Each sample shall be packed separately and dispatched to the testing laboratory.
Packing and marking of samples shall be done in accordance with clause 6.0 of IS: 2430.

The Contractor shall furnish test results of samples as may be required by the client/ consultant.
Testing shall be carried out in accordance with IS: 2386 (Parts- 1 to 8).

Storage

a. Aggregate shall be stored on a hard surface or a well designed platform of concrete, timber, metal
or any other approved material so as to prevent the mixture of clay, dust, vegetable and other
foreign matter.
b. Storing and stacking of fine aggregate shall be done in accordance with clause 3.5 of IS:4082
c. While stacking, the aggregate shall not form pyramids resulting in segregation of different size
particles. The stacks shall be regular.
d. Unless otherwise specified or necessitated by site conditions, stacking of fine aggregate shall be
sufficiently away from that of coarse aggregate.

Coarse aggregate shall mean aggregate of which not less than 95% by weight is retained on 4.75
mm mesh IS sieve of IS:2430 and shall conform to IS:383.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 24

2.2.0 COARSE AGGREGATE :

2.2.1 General Requirements:

Coarse aggregates shall be machine-crushed stone of black trap or equivalent black hard stone
and shall be hard, strong, dense, durable, clean or procured from quarries approved by the
client/consultant. Generally coarse aggregate shall be cubical in shape and not flake or elongated.

Aggregates shall be free from injurious amounts of disintegrated pieces, reactive silica, alkali,
harmful salt, organic matters and other deleterious materials.

Coarse aggregate to be used for reinforced cement concrete work shall not contain any material
liable to attack the steel reinforcement.

The maximum quantity of deleterious materials shall not exceed 5 percent of the weight of coarse
aggregate and the limits specified in Table 1 of IS:383 when tested in accordance with
IS:2386(Part-2).

The amount of fine particles occuring in the free state or as loose adherent shall not exceed 1%
when determined by laboratory sedimentation tests as per IS:2386.

In selecting the aggregates the Contractor shall satisfy and ensure that the source is suitable for
regular supply and a watch shall be maintained that the particle shape and grading remain
reasonably uniform throughout the progress of work.

The Contractor shall arrange to supply coarse aggregates in single size, for each nominal size,
conforming to the grading given in Table 2 of IS:383. The single sizes shall be combined in
suitable proportion to get desired overall grading of aggregates. The client/consultant at his
discretion, may allow the use of Graded Aggregate of nominal size, to conform to the grading
specified in Table 2 of IS:383.
2.2.2 Maximum Size :

The maximum size of aggregates shall not be great than one quarter of the maximum thickness of
the member so as to surround all reinforcement. For heavily reinforced concrete members, the
nominal size of aggregate shall be 5 mm less than the minimum clear distance between the
reinforcement main bar or 5 mm less than the minimum cover to the reinforcement whichever is
smaller.

In reinforced concrete work, unless otherwise specified, nominal maximum size of coarse
aggregate shall be 20 mm and down.

2.2.3 Storage :

a. Generally, storage of coarse aggregate shall conform to clause 3.5 of IS:4082. Aggregate shall be
stored at site on a hard dry patch of ground, preferable levelled and rolled.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 25

b. Aggregate of various Sizes shall be stored in separate stockpiles with height not exceeding 1 m to
prevent coning or segregation. A bottom layer of coarse aggregate 100 mm deep shall be
undisturbed while removing the material for use.
c. If the aggregate are stored at site for a long time, it shall be sieved before use, to remove dust, if
directed by the consultant.

3.0.0 STEEL REINFORCEMENT :

3.1.0 Supply :

Steel reinforcement for concrete shall be round/ribbed bars, unless otherwise specified and shall
comply with the following grades.

High strength deformed steel bars conforming to IS: 1786. If specified, tested quality high
yield strength deformed corrosion resistant steel ( CRS) bars from TATA ( TISCON- 50 CRS) or
SAIL ( HCR-REBARS Gr.M ) conforming to IS: 1786 for mechanical properties with improved
corrosion resistance and bond strength shall be used.

All steel shall be procured from original producers. No re-rolled steel shall be incorporated in the
work. Only new steel shall be delivered to the site and shall be free of mill scale, loose rust,
grease oil, paint or any other deleterious materials which reduce or destroyed bond.

3.2.0 Measurement of Reinforcement :

Measurement relating to nominal mass, dimensions and tolerances of various types steel shall
conform to relevant IS codes.

Reinforcement shall be measured in lengths of bar as actually placed in position on standard

weight basis, no allowances being made in the weight for rolling margin, Wastage, chairs and
binding wire shall not be measured. Authorised overlaps and splices shall only be measured. Rate
quoted shall include the cost of welding if specified.

3.3.0 Testing :

Test certificates from manufacturer, mill certificates and certificates of origin shall be submitted
for each consignment. Additional tests required shall be done as recommended by the client/
consultant at the Contractor s own cost. An accredited laboratory shall carry out testing. Any
reinforcement so sampled and tested which fails to comply with the specifications shall be
rejected and the whole batch shall be removed from the site immediately. The Contractor shall
have no claim for bars mutilated in obtaining test samples.

3.4.0 Sampling :

Sampling shall be done in accordance with relevant IS codes. For every 40 tonnes of steel at least
one test shall be done.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 26

CRS reinforcing bars shall conform to the physical properties of IS:1786. In addition when tested
for corrosion resistance as per the standard ASTM method such as salt spray test ( B.117.90).
Potentio Dynamic Polaristion measurement test (G.5.78). Atmospheric Corrosion test (G.50.76)
and sulphur-di-oxide chamber test (G.87.84) shall exhibit corrosion resistance index of minimum
1.5.CRS (deformed) bars should either be butt or lap welded as per recommended practice of
IS:9417. For best results basic coated electrodes containing copper and/ or nickel shall be used.

The chemistry of CRS should be as given below :

Carbon -0.15% max

Sulphur(s) -0.05% max
Phosphorus(p) -0.12% max
S +P -0.17% max
Silicon -0.45% max
Corrosion
Resistant elements -0.5% max

3.5.0 Binding Wire :

The reinforcement shall be securely bound wherever bars intersect or wherever required with 16
or 18 gauge ( 1.63 mm or 1.22 mm ) annealed steel wire conforming to IS:280.

3.6.0 Mechanical splices :

Mechanical connections for spilicing reinforcement bars in congested locations shall be used only
with the approval of consultant/Engineer-in-Charge. Patented couplers as manufactured by Usha
Martin Industries Ltd. ( CCL bar grips) and BBR India Ltd.(BBR SWIF) shall be used wherever
mentioned in the drawings. The couplers shall be attached to the reinforcement bars by forging,
hydraulic pressing or screw couplers in special circumstances may be permitted. All operations
relating to reinforcement coupling shall be done using supplier s patented machine / equipment
and in the presence of the supplier s representative. The Contractor shall submit relevant trade
literature, mil certificates, certificate of origin and letters of approval for each proposed
application. A sample of each type of mechanical coupler shall be submitted for testing and
approval prior to the use of any coupler in the works.

3.7.0 Welding electrodes :

Electrodes used for welding of steel bars shall be ordinary mild steel grade 2 electrodes
conforming to IS:814 and shall be the quality and approved by the Engineer-in-Charge. The work
shall be carried out as strictly as per IS:2751 and IS:9417.

3.8.0 Causes of Rejection :

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 27

Steel reinforcement, not conforming to relevant specifications, shall be rejected by the

client/consultant. Every bar shall be inspected before assembling on the work and defective,
brittle or brunt bar shall be rejected. Cracked ends of bars shall be discarded. The Contractor at
his own expenses shall immediately remove rejected steel from the work site.

3.9.0 Storage :

Steel reinforcement shall be handled and stored in a manner that bending or distortion of
the bars is avoided and corrosion of steel is prevented. They shall be stored in such a
manner that they are not in direct contact with the ground ( at least 150 mm clear above
ground ). In case of long storage, a coat of cement wash shall be given to the reinforcing
steel to prevent any scaling or rusting. Any reinforcement, which is certified as corroded
by the Engineer-in-Charge, shall either be immediately withdrawn from site or stand
blasted and coated with cement slurry. No extra payment shall be made for sand blasting
and cement coating. Bars of different classifications and size shall be stored separately.
Generally, storage of reinforcements shall be in accordance with clause 3.7 of IS:4032.

4.0.0 WATER :

Water used for various works shall conform to IS:456.

4.1.0 General Requirements :

Water used for both mixing and curing of concrete/ brickwork /plaster as well as for washing
aggregate shall be potable and free from injurious amounts of deleterious materials like alkalis,
acids, oils salts, sugar, organic materials, vegetable growth or other substances which are likely to
affect the strength or durability of concrete and other construction materials. Before starting any
concreting / brickwork / plaster work and wherever the source of water changes, the water shall
be tested for its acceptability for use in concrete etc. by the methods given in IS : 3025. No water
shall be used until tested and found satisfactory and cost of all such tests shall be borne by the
Contractor.

Hard and bitter water shall generally be found unsuitable for curing mortar and concrete.

Water for use in mixing with cement shall neither be hotter than 250C nor colder than 50C at the
time mixing.

Whenever temperature controlled concrete is specified, the Contractor may establish an ice
making plant of required capacity at site.

Water used for curing shall not produce any objectionable stain or unsightly deposit on the
surface. It shall be free of elements that significantly affect the hydration reaction. Presence of
tannic acid or iron compounds in water is objectionable.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 28

Acceptance Criteria :

Water to be used, shall satisfy the following :

4.2.1 To neutralise 200 ml sample of water, using phenobhihalein as an indicator, it should be require
more than 2 ml of 0.1 normal NaOH.

4.2.2 To neutralise 200 ml sample of water, using methyl orange as an indicator, it should not require
more than 10 ml of 0.1 normal HCL4.2.3. It should not contain solids by weight in excess of the
following :
Organic 200 mg/liter
Inorganic 3000 mg/liter
Sulphates 500 mg/liter
Chlorides 1000 mg/liter for RC work and
2000 mg/liter for other works
Suspended Matter 2000 mg/litre

The pH value of water shall be between 6 and 8. If required by the Engineer-in-Charge it shall be
tested by comparison with distilled water. Comparison shall be made by means of standard
cement tests for soundness, time of setting and mortar strength by 30 minutes or more or decrease
of more than 10% in strength of mortar prepared with water sample when compared with the
results obtained with mortar prepared with distilled water shall be sufficient cause for rejection of
water under test.

4.3.0. Sample for Testing :

The samples of water taken for testing shall represent the water proposed to be used, with due
account being paid to seasonal variation. The samples shall not receive any treatment before
testing other than that envisaged in the regular supply of water proposed for use. The sample shall
be stored in a clean container. Test shall be carried out only once for one particular source.

Testing shall be done as per IS:3025 (Relevant parts).

4.4.0. Storage :

Storage of water shall generally conform to IS:4082, whenever water is to be covered to the
satisfaction of the Engineer-in-Charge to prevent contamination.

ADMIXTURES

Admixtures shall be used in concrete, mortar plaster etc. as specified in the schedule of items and
/ or drawing only after the product is approved by the client / consultant. The Contractor is bound
to furnish all such information like dosage, method of application, chloride content, etc. required
to decide on the suitability of the admixture. All required tests should be carried out at the
instructions of the client at no extra cost.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 29

Use of admixture being a specialised job, shall be carried out strictly as per manufacture s
recommendations.

General Requirements :

Admixture used shall conform to the following relevant IS codes and shall be purchased from
reputed manufactures as approved by client / consultant. In reinforced concrete, the chloride ion
of any admixture used shall not exceed 2% by weight of the admixture as determined in
accordance with IS:6925 and the total chloride ion in all admixture used in concrete mi shall not
exceed 0.83% by weight of cement. The addition of calcium chloride to concrete containing
embedded metal will not be permitted under any circumstances.

Accelerating Admixtures conforming to IS:9103 & 2645. It shall be in liquid state with a specific
gravity of 1.3 and complying with ASTM C-494 type E. it shall accelerate the setting and
hardening of the concrete mix thereby achieving high early ago strength. It shall be from CICO or
equivalent with all types of cement.

Retarding Admixture conforming to IS :9103. it shall be liquid state with a specific gravity of
1.22 and complying with ASTM C-494 type B&D,CRD-C87 type B&D, BS:5075 part 1. it shall
be added to the concrete mix during the mixing process along with water and aggregates. No
extension of normal mixing time is necessary. It shall delay the initial and final setting time. It
shall help to spread the heat of hydration over a longer period of time. It shall give a highly
workable concrete with a low W /C ratio. It shall be from CICO, Feb Roffe or equivalent and be
used at amount of acceleration of hardening required. It should be compatible with all types of
cement.

Air-entraining Admixture conforming to IS:9103.

Water-reducing admixtures conforming to IS:9103. Only naphthalene based water-reducing

admixture / plasticizers shall be permitted.

Integral waterproofing admixture conforming to IS:2645. It shall be from Feb Roffe s Roff
Hyseal, Roff Hyproof, Algiproof or equivalent. It shall be used as an excellent cement admixture
in all types of concrete / plaster mortars, pointing mortars, masonry works, guniting works and
pressure grouting works. It shall improve resistance of the surface to weathering and chemical
attacks. It shall be no- toxic so as to use for waterproofing in water tanks, reservoirs, tanks, etc.

Product information :

5.2.1. The Contractor shall further provide the following concerning each admixture to the client /
consultant.

a. Optimum dosage and detrimental effects of under-dosage and over-dosage.

b. Chemical names of the main ingredients in the admixture.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 30

c. The chloride ion content expressed as percentage by weight of admixture.

d. Whether or not the admixture leads to entrapment of when used in the manufacture s
recommended dosage and if so, to what extent.

Where two or more admixture is proposed to be used in any one mix, the manufacture s written
confirmation of their compatibility.

There would be no increase in risk of the reinfo4rcement or other embodiments as a result of using the
admixture.

Sampling :

5.3.1. Sampling for testing shall be done in accordance with clause 4.1 of IS:9103 for liquid admixture
and clause 4.2 of IS:9103 for non-liquid admixtures.

5.3.2. Samples shall be packed in moisture-proof airtight containers.

5.3.3. Sampling of integral waterproofing compound shall be done as given in IS:2645.

5.4.0. Testing :

For checking the physical properties of any admixture, tests shall be carried out as detailed in
clause 3 of IS:9103. Results shall conform to the requirements given in Table 1 of IS:9103.

For air entraining admixture, tests shall be carried out as agreed to between the client and
consultant. And the manufacture. Except where resistance to freezing and thawing and to
disruptive action of de-icing salts is necessary, the air content of freshly mixed concrete in
accordance with the pressure method given in IS:1199 shall not be more than 2% higher than that
of the corresponding control mix and in any case not more than 3% of the test mix.

For integral waterproofing compound, tests shall be carried out as per methods given in IS:2645.

Uniformity tests on the admixture are essential to compare qualitatively the composition of
different samples taken from batch to batch or from the same batch at different times.

All tests relating to concrete and admixture shall be conducted periodically at an independent
laboratory and compared with the data given by the manufacture

5.5.0. Storage :

5.5.1 Admixture shall be stored in moisture-proof, airtight containers.

5.5.2 Storage shall in general conform to IS:4082.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 31

6.0.0 FORMWORK

6. 1 General requirements:

6.1.1 Shuttering for concrete work below ground level shall be of wrought formwork and that for
concrete work in superstructure shall be of fine formwork.

6.1.2 Formwork shall be of Marine Plywood, timber, steel and fiberglass of suitable thickness capable
of resisting damage to the contact faces under normal conditions of erecting firms, fixing steel
and placing concrete. For designated areas prominently in public view the choice of material shall
be decided by the Engineer-in-Charge.

Where timber is used, it shall be of best quality, first class hardwood, well-seasoned, of medium
grain and free from sap, shekes, worm holes, wraps or other surface defects of all kinds. It shall
be wooden parking of 30mm minimum thickness with or without steel lining. The timber used
shall not be so dry as to absorb water from concrete and swell or bulge nor so green or wet as to
shrink after erection. The timber shall be properly swan and planned on the sides and surface
coming in contact with concrete. Wooden formwork with metal sheet lining or steel angles shall
be permitted. The surface of timer shuttering that would come in contact with concrete shall be
wetted and coated with shop solution before concreting is done. Alternatively coat of raw linseed
oil or oil of approved manufacture may be applied in place of soap solution.

Where plywood is used, it shall be of best quality, resin bonded and waterproof. Formwork shall
be minimum 12 mm thick shuttering quality plywood conforming to IS:4990 and of make
approved by the Engineer-in-Charge. Suitable stiffeners and walers shall be provided depending
on the shuttering design. It shall be stable and not liable to scrap when exposed to sun and rain or
wetted during concreting.

Where steel framework is used, it shall be made out of appropriate gauge steel sheets with proper
framework to ensure perfect surfaces. It shall be made of 3 mm thick black sheets stiffened with
angle iron frame. The surface that would come in contact with concrete shall be thoroughly
cleaned and either soap solution or row li8iseed oil shall be applied.

Fiberglass formwork shall be of approved quality and standard.

6.1.3 The forms shall be true to dimensions and sizes. The props used on the work shall be of such
type, which can afford finer adjustments for levels, etc. and insure fully stability.

6.1.3.1. Wherever applicable, selection of suitable timber for formwork shall be made based on the
following relevant standards :

a) Specification for ballies for general purposes as IS:3337. Specification for plywood for
concrete shuttering work as per IS:4990.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 32

7.0.0 STRUCTURAL STEEL :

All material shall be new and shall conform to their respective specifications. The use of
equivalent or higher grade or alternative materials will be considered only in very special cases
subject to the approval of client/ consultant.

7.1.0 General Requirements :

All structural steel sections shall conform to IS:2062 unless otherwise specified and shall be
clearly rolled to proper dimensions and weight subject to permissible tolerances as per IS: 1852.

The finished materials shall be reasonably free from cracks, surface flaws, laminations rough are
imperfect edges and all other harmful defects and shall have a smooth finish. The material shall
be a free from loose mill scale, rust pits or other defects affecting the strength and durability.

Structural steel work shall be painted by applying to coats of Zink Phosphate primer conforming
to relevant IS and 2 coats of synthetic enamel paint ( Conforming to IS:2933 ) or aluminium paint
(conforming to IS:2339). However, steel shall be galvanised, if so required by the Client /
Consultant.

Normal hexagonal nuts and bolts shall conform to IS:3138-1966. high strength structural bolts
shall confirm to IS:3757. Countersunk bolts shall confirm to either IS:8352 or IS:8353 depending
on the type of bolt. Black bolts, nuts and screws shall be in accordance with IS:1363 for Black
hexagonal with nuts of 6 to 39 mm and black hexagon screw of 6 to 24 mm and IS:1364 and
IS:1367 for other sizes.

Hot rolled rivet bars shall conform to IS:1148 and high tensile steel rivet bars for structural
purposes shall conform to IS:1149.

Welding electrodes shall conform to IS:814 and approval of welding procedure shall be as per
IS:823.

Node connectors for space frame shall be Octagonal or Spherical in shape. It shall a minimum
tensile strength as specified in the bills of Quantities. Minimum elongation shall be 7% and
hardness 170-240 BHN. The nodes machined out of solid bars shall conform to IS:2062 and the
casing shall be as per IS:1030.

The following variety of steel shall be used for structural purposes.

ST- 42S: It shall be used for all types of structures ( reverted and bolted) including htose
subjected to dynamic loading and where fatigue, wide fluctuations of stresses, reversal of stresses
and great restraint are involved. It shall be suitable for welded structures provided that the
thickness of the material does not exceed 20 mm.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 33

ST-42W: Fusion welding quality steel, conforming to IS:2062 shall be used for structures subject
to dynamic loading where welding is employed for fabrication and where fatigue, wide
fluctuation of stresses, reversal of stresses and great restraints are involved.

Structural steel tubes (ERW) used for building construction shall be hot finished tubes
conforming to IS:1161/ IS:1239/ IS:806. tubes shall be designated by their nominal bore and
shall be classified as light, medium and heavy as per IS:1161 tubes of thickness lower than light
tubes shall not be permitted.

Unless mentioned otherwise, fusion welding quality steel ST-42W shall be used for all the
structural steel works and tubes shall be YST 21 conforming to IS:806.

The chemical and mechanical properties for structural steel shall be as stated below :

CHEMICAL COMPOSITION OF STEEL

Steel Designation Maximum percentage

Carbon Sulphar Phosphorous

ST-42W 0. 23 0.06 0.06

ST-42S 0.25/0.28 0.06 0.06

ST-42O 0.07

MECHANICAL PROPERTIES OF STEEL

Steel Class of Steel Nominal Tensile Yield %

product thickness / dia strength stress elongation
Type mm kg/ mm min.
kg/mm

ST-42-W Plate selections Below 6 mm only

(Fusion (For example, bend test shall be
welding angles, tees, required.
quality & beams, channels
etc.) and flats 6 mm and upto 42 to 54 26 23
20 m m

Over 20 upto 40

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 34

mm
42 to 54 24 23
Over 40 mm
42 to 54 23 23

ST-42-S Bars (round, Below 10 only

(Standard square and bend test shall be
quality) Hexagonal) required

Over 10 mm upto 42 to 54 26 23
20 m m
42 to 54 24 23
Over 20 mm

ST-42-Owner Plate sections ( for Below 6 only

(Ordinary example angles, bend test shall be
quality) tees, beams, required.
channels, etc.) and
flats 6 mm and above 42 to 54 26 23

Bars (round, Below 10 mm

square and only bend test
Hexagonal) shall be required. 42 to 54 26 23
10 mm and above

Steel Tubes

Steel tubes for use in light structural work and inserts shall be of light or medium class (as may be
specified on drawings or the schedule of items) and of grade YST 25 conforming to IS:1161 -
"Specification for Steel Tubes for Structural Purposes".

Foundation Bolts

Bolts to be embedded in concrete shall, unless otherwise detailed in drawings, conform to IS:5624 -
"Specification for Foundation Bolts". Material for bolts, shall, unless otherwise mentioned on drawings or
the schedule of items, be of mild steel conforming to IS: 2062.
Nuts and locknuts shall conform to IS: 1363 - "Specification for Black Hexagon Bolts, Nuts and Lock
Nuts (diameter 6-39 mm) and Black Hexagon Screws (diameter 6 24 mm)" and to IS: 3138 -
"Specification for Hexagon Bolts and Nuts (M-42 to M-150)".
Plain washers shall conform to IS: 2016 - "Specification for Plain Washers and spring wasters shall
conform to IS: 3063 "Spring washers for Bolts, Nuts and Screws".

Steel Tubes for Non-structural Use

Steel tubes for non-structural use shall conform to IS: 1239 (Part-I) "Specification for Mild Steel Tubes,
Tubular and Other Wrought Steel fittings, Part-I : Mild Steel Tubes". Fittings for steel tubes used for non

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 35

structural purposes shall conform to IS: 1239 (Part-II) "Specification for Mild Steel Tubular and Other
Wrought Steel Pipe Fittings".

Threaded Fasteners

Bolts and nuts for fastening shall conform to IS: 1367 - "Technical Supply Conditions for Threaded
Fasteners".

7.2.0 Test certificate :

7.2.1 When the steel is supplied by the Contractor, test certificate of the manufacturer shall be obtained
according to IS: 2062 and other relevant Indian Standards. Notwithstanding the manufacturer s
certificates, the Consultant/ architect may ask for testing of material in approved test laboratory.
The test results shall satisfy the requirements of the relevant Indian Standards. Whenever quality
certificates are missing or incomplete or where material quality differs from standard
specifications, the Contractor shall conduct all appropriate tests as directed by the consultant /
architect at his own cost. Materials for which test certificates are not available or for which test
results do not comply with relevant IS standard shall not be used.

7.3.0 Storage :

Storage of structural steel shall be as per IS: 4082. Steel materials supplied by Contractor shall be
marked for identification and each lot shall be accompanied by manufacturer s quality certificate,
conforming to chemical and mechanical characteristics as per relevant IS codes. All steel
furnished by suppliers shall be checked, sorted out, straightened and arranged by grade and
quantities in stores.

Welding wire and electrodes shall be stored separately by qualities and lots inside a dry and
enclosed room in compliance with IS:816 and as directed by Engineer-in-Charge. Each lot of
electrode, bolts nuts, etc. shall be accompanied by manufacturer s test certificate.

8.0.0 AC SHEET & ACCESSORIES

8.1.0 General requirements :

8.1.1 The asbestos cement sheets used for roofing and cladding shall be plain corrugated or semi-
corrugated sheets from Everest or approved make conforming to IS:459.

8.1.2 It shall be manufactured by reinforcing Asbestos to cement in such a manner that every fibre is
coated with fine particles of cement to ensure maximum strength, it shall be alkali resistant and
anti-corrosive. It should not break during transportation, handling, laying and shall be non-
inflammable non-organic. It shall be resistant having high tensile strength and high slenderness
ratio.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 36

8.1.3 The minimum nominal thickness of sheets shall be 6 mm, having covering efficiency of about
90% and weight 1518 kg/sqm. The permissible bending stress shall be 130 kg/sqm.

8.1.4 The accessories shall be same thickness that of AC sheets. They shall be suitable for the type of
sheet and location. They shall be from approved manufacture and free from any defect.

8.1.5 All fixing accessories shall conform to IS:1626. The diameter of the bolts shall not be less than
8mm. The J-bolts shall be at least 90mm longer at lap points of sheets and 75mm longer at other
points than the depth required to hook the bolt to the purlin. The galvanised iron washers shall be
25mm in diameter and 1.6mm thick. The bitumen washer shall be 35mm in diameter and 1.5mm
thick.

8.1.6 Bridges shall be of type specified in the schedule such as one piece plain angular , plain wing
adjustable , Serrated adjustable , Close fitting adjustable or Northlight two pieces adjustable
and appropriate for the corrugated sheets used. plain wing angular type of ridges can be used
only if the scope of the roof is between 26 and 30 degrees. Ridges, hip section and other
accessories shall be of the same manufacture as that of sheets used for the roof unless otherwise
permitted by the Client/ Consultant.

8.1.7 The sheets shall have rectangular shape, corrugations true and regular, edges straight and clean,
smooth surface on exposed side and free from cracks and visible defects, holes, deformation,
chipped edges or otherwise damage.

8.1.8 All the AC sheets shall be painted with 3 coats of lime wash on the underside unless otherwise
specified.

8.1.9 Water absorption shall not exceed 28 percent of dry weight.

8.2.0 Testing :

Testing of asbestos cement products shall be done in accordance with the methods prescribed in
IS:5913.

8.3.0 Storage :

Storage of AC sheets and accessories shall in general conform to IS:4082. The materials shall be
handled and stored in the manner as not to damage the same. AC sheets shall be stacked on a firm
and levelled ground, laid on wooden battens according to the approved stacking methods and/ or
instructions of the manufacturer. They shall be protected from damage and when they are to be
stacked for a longer period, they shall be stored under cover.

9.0.0 GALVANISED IRON SHEET :

Galvanised iron sheets shall be from TATA or equivalent as approved by Engineer-in-Charge.

9.1.0 General requirements :

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 37

9.1.1 G.I. Sheets used for roofing and cladding shall generally conform to the requirements prescribed
in IS:277 and shall be of the best quality duly approved by the Client / Consultant.

9.1.2 The base metal for galvanised sheets and coils shall be hot or cold rolled mild steel conforming to
IS:513. The sheets shall be free from cracks, spilt edges, twist, surface flaws, etc.. They shall be
clean, bright and smooth. The galvanizing shall be uninjured and in perfect condition. The sheets
shall show no sign of rust or white powdery deposits on the surface. The corrugation shall be
uniform in depth and pitch and parallel to the sides.

9.1.3 Minimum thickness of GI sheets to be used roofing shall be 0.63 mm thick (24 gauge) unless
noted otherwise in the drawings or in the schedule of items.

9.1.4 Unless otherwise mentioned in the schedule, the necessary accessories like flashing, ridging,
capping, gable end corner piece, barge boards etc. shall be made out of 20 gauge ( 1 mm
minimum ) galvanized sheets.

9.1.5 All fixing accessories shall conform to the requirements specified in IS:730.

9.2.0 Testing :

9.2.1 Testing shall be done in accordance with the provisions prescribed in IS:277.

9.3.0 Storage

9.3.1 Storage of GI sheets and accessories shall in general conform to IS:4082.

10.0.0 COLOUR COATED METTALIC SHEET AND ACCESSORIES

10.1.0 General requirements :

10.1.1 Colour coated sheets shall be made out of cold or hot rolled MS sheets conforming to IS:513
galvanised as per IS :277 and shall be of the best quality.

10.1.2 Colour coating requirements shall be in accordance with relevant Indian or foreign standards
ensuring a perfect and integral chemical bond between the base metal and the polymer coat.

10.1.3 The sheets shall be free from cracks, twist, surface flaws, spilt edges and any other defects which
could impair the strength and quality of the material.

10.1.4 The profile of the sheets shall be uniform, smooth, regular and true to shape.

10.1.5 The colour shades shall be consistent and free from visible defects.

10.1.6 Unless mentioned otherwise all necessary accessories shall be duly approved by the Client /
Consultant.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 38

10.2.0 Sampling :

10.2.1 Representative samples of the product shall be kept in the office of the client for periodic checks
by Client / Consultant on compliance of quality of material actually used for the work.

10.3.0 Storage :

11.3.1 Storage of colour coated sheets and accessories shall in general conform to IS:4082 and as per
manufacturer s specifications.

11.0.0 STONES

11.1.0 STONES FOR MASONRY :

11.1.1 General requirements :

Generally, the stone to be used shall conform to the requirements of IS:1597 ( part-1 ) and shall
be specified variety such as Granite, Trap stone, Quartz, sandstone or any other type locally
available good hard stones.

Stones used shall be strong, sound durable, dense, compact, close grained, homogeneous, fire
resistant and free from cracks, flaws or defects, segregation, seams, weathered portions and other
structural defects or imperfections tending to affect their soundness and strength and shall be
procured from quarries approved by the consultant.

Stones used shall be small enough to be lifted and placed by hand. The length of stone shall not
exceed three times the height and the breadth on the base shall not be grater than 3 / 4 of the
thickness of wall not less than 150 mm. the height of stone may be upto 300 mm.

Stones shall be free from rounded, worn or weathered surfaces or skin or coating which prevents
the adherence of mortars.

Stones to be used as headers, quoins, copings, etc. shall comply with the requirements of facing
and haearting as may be relevant.

Stones shall be non-porous and when tested in accordance with IS:1124 shall show less than 5%
water absorption of its dry weight when soaked in water for 24 hours.

Dressed and worked stones shall strictly follow the recommended dimensions given in Table 1 of
: IS:1127 depending on the purpose of work.

For specific use (i.e. exposure to chemical fume, fire hazard etc. ) type of stone shall strictly
conform to the recommendations of Table 2 of IS:1597 (part 1) or as directed by the Client
/Consultant.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 39

Quoin Stone or Corner Stone :

For random rubble masonry ( un-coursed and brought to course), quoin stone shall not be less
than 0.03 m3 in volume.

For squared rubble (coursed) masonry, the height of the quoin shall be same as the course height
and shall not be less than 450 mm in any direction.

Hearting and Backing Stone :

For random rubble masonry (un-coursed and brought to course) the hearting or interior filling of a
warface shall consist of rubble stones not less than 150mm in any direction, carefully laid,
hammered down to proper position.

For squared rubble (coursed ) masonry the hearting or the interior filling of the wall shall consist
of flat beded stone, carefully laid on their proper bedsin mortar.

Through stone or Bond Stone :

One through stone shall be provided for every half a square metre of facing, evenly distributed in
a staggered pattern.

They shall have about 0.03 sqm in face area and shall have a tailing for the full width of the
masonry when the width of masonry is 600 mm or less.

If the masonry wall is over 600 mm thick, a line of headers overlapping each other by at least 150
mm shall be laid right through the wall from the face to the back.

The length of the interior headers shall not be less than 450 mm and their average cross sectional
area shall not be less than 0.025 sqm.

Bond stone shall be distinctly marked on its face during construction for subsequent verification.

Sampling :

Sampling of stones including quoins and headers to be used in the work shall be got approved by
the Client/ Consultant before the work is started and such samples be maintained in the site
engineer s office for any subsequent inspection.

Testing :

For compressive strength, test pieces shall be made from selected samples in cubical or
cylindrical shape. The diameter or lateral dimension of a test sample shall not be less than 50 mm
and the ratio of height to diameter or height to lateral dimension shall be 1:2. Compressive

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 40

strength and transverse strength test (if required) on stone samples shall be carried out in the
manner specified in IS:1121.

Water absorption test shall be carried out, if directed by the consultant, as per IS:1124.

Tests for durability and weathering shall be done, if directed by the consultant, as per IS:1126 and
IS:1125 respectively.

The working of stones to the required sizes and their dressing shall be carried out as per IS:1127
AND IS:1129.

KOTA /SHAHABAD/ CUDDAPAH/ GRANITE STONE :

Kota/ Shabad/ Cuddapah / Granite stone blocks / slabs/ tiles to be used for flooring, stairs, dados,
skirting, lining, veneering etc. shall conform to the requirements specified in the schedule of
items.

12.1.1 General requirements :

The natural stone slabs shall be procured from selected quality / stock as specified in schedule of
items.

These shall be hard, sound, dense and of homogeneous texture and free form cracks, decay,
weathering, soft veins and flaws.

They shall be hard and machine-cut of requisite thickness along planes parallel to the natural bead
of stone and shall be of uniform size and colour as required.

The exposed surface of stone slabs shall be machine polished to a smooth, even and true plane
and the edges shall be chiseled to half its depth, true and square to ensure uniform width of joint.

Marking :

Each type of stock blocks, slabs and tiles supplied at site shall bear the manufacturer s
identification marks or initials.

Sampling and Testing :

a. Samples shall be selected and tested separately for each lot for determining its conformity or
otherwise to the requirements of the specification.

b. The number of blocks / slabs/ tiles to be selected for sampling shall depend upon the size of the
lot and shall be in accordance with Table-2, IS:1130.

c. Contractor shall produce a certificate from the supplier stating that the blocks, slabs and titles
supplied, company with the relevant Indian Standards and shall submit it to Client / Consultant.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 41

d. Tests shall be carried out as per methods described in IS:1124 and IS:1122, as applicable.

12.1.4 Causes for rejection :

Stone slabs not conforming to the size, colour, texture and other criteria mentioned above shall be
rejected by the Client / Consultant.

13.0.0 BRICKS

13.1.0 BRICKS FOR MASONRY :

13.1.1 General requirements :

a. Bricks for masonry in foundation, walls and other locations shall be hand or machine moulded
and made from suitable soil and kiln burnt. They shall have regular and uniform size and colour,
sharp, strength and right angled edges and deep cherry red and copper colour, uniformity well
burnt throughout but not over-burnt. They shall have smooth rectangular faces with parallel sides
and sharp corners. Generally, they shall conform to IS:1077

b. They shall be free from cracks, flaws and nodules of free lime.

c. They shall be moulded with a frog of 100 X 40mm and 10mm to 20mm deep on one of its flat
sides.

d. They shall give a clear metallic ringing sound when struck by a mallet and shall not break when
dropped on the ground on their flat face in a saturated condition from a height of 600 mm.

e. They shall show a fine-grained, uniform, homogeneous and dense texture on fracture and shall be
free from lumps of lime, lamination, cracks, and air holes, soluble salts causing efflorescence or
any other defect which may impair their strength, durability, appearance and usefulness for the
purpose intended. They shall not have any part under-burnt.

f. The size of the conventional bricks shall be 225 X 110 X 75 mm. Only bricks of one standard size
shall be used in one work unless specially permitted by the Client / Consultant. The following
tolerances are permitted in the standard conventional size adopted on the particular work.
Length plus or minus 3.0 mm
Breath plus or minus 1.5 mm
Depth plus or minus 1.5 mm

The size of the modular bricks shall be 190X90X90mm or 190X40mm.

g. The crushing strength of the brick to be used in all types of works shall not be less than 50
kg/sq.cm. unless otherwise specified when tested according to IS:3495(Part-1).

h. After immersion in cold water for 24 hours, absorption by weight shall not exceed 15 percent of
the dry weight of the brick when tested according to IS:3495(part-2).

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 42

i. Efflorescence in bricks shall be within limits prescribed in ( Not more than 10% of the exposed
area of the brick shall be covered with a thin deposit of salts) IS:3495 (part-3).

13.1.2 First Class Bricks for Exposed Brick work :

First class bricks are those, which strictly conform to the standard size of modular bricks and such
that ten layers of brick laid in mortar shall form masonry of 1 m height. These bricks shall be
manufactured from good quality plastic earth, which is free from saline deposits. They shall have
straight edges and even surfaces. When immersed in water for an hour they shall not absorb water
more than 1/6th of their weight. On drying they shall not show any sign of efflorescence.

Laterite Stone Blocks

These shall conform to IS : 3620 - "Laterite Stone Blocks for Masonry". The laterite stone blocks
shall have a minimum crushing strength of 20 kg/cm2. The blocks shall be minimum 15 cm thick
and not exceeding 30 cm thick. They shall be dressed to the desired sizes and shapes with an axe.
Laterite stones shall be well seasoned by exposure to air before dressing and using on work.

Hollow and Solid Concrete Blocks

Cement concrete blocks used in the construction of concrete masonry load bearing as well as non-load
bearing walls shall conform to the requirements of IS : 2185. Physical properties such as density,
compressive strength, water absorption etc., shall be determined in accordance with the procedure laid
down in IS : 2185 and shall conform to the requirement laid therein. When inspected visually all blocks
shall be sound, free from cracks, broken edges, honey combing and other defects which would interfere
with the proper placing of blocks or impair strength or permanence of construction.

Dimensions and tolerances

The blocks shall be made in sizes and shapes to suit the particular job and shall include stretcher, corner,
double corner or pier, jamb, header, bullnose and floor units.

The nominal dimensions of concrete block shall be as follows:-

Length : 400, 500 or 600 mm
Height : 200 or 100 mm
Width : 50, 75, 100, 150, 200, 250 or 300 mm
In addition, blocks shall be manufactured in half lengths.
The maximum dimensional tolerances shall plus or minus 5 mm in length and plus or minus 3 mm in
height and width.

Hollow blocks (open and closed cavity)

Grade-A blocks used as load bearing units shall have a minimum block density of 1500 kg/m3 and shall
have minimum average compressive strength of 3.5, 4.5, 5.5 or 7.0 N/mm2 at 28 days as specified.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 43

Grade-B blocks used as load bearing units shall have block density less than 1500 kg/m3, but not less
than 1000 kg/m3 and shall have compressive strength of 2.0, 3.0, or 5.0 n/M3 or as specified.
Grade-C blocks used as non load bearing units shall have block density less than 1500 kg/m3,but not less
than 1000 kg/m3 and compressive strength of 1.5 N/mm2 at 28 days.

Solid blocks

Solid blocks Grade-D used as load bearing units shall have a block density of not less than 1800 kg/m3
and compressive strength of 4.0 or 5.0 N/mm2 as specified.

13.1.3 Calcium Silicate Bricks :

These bricks shall be machine moulded and made form good quality and clean siliceous sand,
lime and flash (maximum content upto 30% in raw material composition). They shall have
smooth rectangular faces with sharp corners and shall be uniform in size, colour and shape. The
size of bricks shall be 228 X 110 X 73mm or as approved by the Architect / Consultant. The
compressive strength of bricks shall be minimum 150 kg / m2 and the bricks shall have very high
strength to weight ratio. The bricks shall have very good resistant capacity to atmospheric
conditions, optimum building properties in relation to heat insulation, sound insulation,
absorption of water and fire protection. Calcium silicate products shall conform to the appropriate
IS Standards and there shall be no change in civil application techniques while using it in the
place of traditional clay bricks.

13.1.4 Glass Brick Works :

It shall be from imperial or equivalent as approved by Architect / Consultant. It shall be free any
defects like cracks, air bubbles, uneven surface, breaks etc.. During handling and laying its edges
shall not be easily damaged. All edges and corners of all faces shall be sharp and well shaped. It
shall be of size and colour as specified in the B.O.O. of approved by Architect / Consultant. The
glass bricks shall be uniform size with a tolerance of + 2 mm. sports of colour other than that of
bricks shall not be allowed. The weight of each brick shall be about 2.75 kg. The transmission of
direct light through brick shall not be less than 40%. The glass bricks shall have good thermal
insulation. It shall be sound proof and vibration absorber having adequate compressive strength.
If bricks with groove or projections are used, the groove or projections shall be uniform and
regular in size and shape.

13.1.5 Storage of Bricks :

a. Brick shall not be dumped at site. They shall be stacked in regular tiers of height not exceeding
1.5m.

b. Bricks of different types and classifications shall be stacked separately. Generally, stacking of
bricks shall conform to IS:4082.

13.1.6 Handling :

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 44

Bricks shall be unloaded by hand and carefully stacked. These shall not be thrown to the ground
to avoid any damage.

13.1.7 Sampling and Inspection :

Representative samples shall be submitted by the Contractor and approved samples shall be
retained by the Client / consultant for comparison and future reference.

All bricks shall be inspected at site and shall be subjected to the approval of the Consultant who
may reject such consignments as are considered by him to be interior to the quality specified.

The Contractor shall provide all labour and plant required for the inspection and conduct of such
tests as shall be required by the Consultant without additional charges.

Efflorescence test shall be carried out for a sample of 20 bricks from a stock of 20,000 bricks.
Water absorption test shall be done for 32 bricks out of a stock of 35,000 bricks. Compressive
strength test shall be done on 50 bricks from a stock of 1,00,000 bricks.

13.1.7 Storage :

Same as that of Coarse aggregate .

14.0.0 SAND

14.1.0 SAND FOR MASONRY MORTAR :

14.1.1 General requirements :

A). All the requirements, except particle size grading stated in the section Fine aggregates shall
apply to this sand also. The sand shall consist of natural sand, crushed stone sand or crushed gravel sand
or a combination of any of these.

B). The particle size grading of sand in mortar for unreinforced masonry work shall be within limits
specified below, as per IS:2116.

I.S Sieve Percentage by weight Passing

Designation IS:460 (part- 1) I.S. Sieve

4.75mm 100

2.36mm 90-100

1.18mm 70-100

600 micron 40-100

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 45

300 micron 5-70

150 micron 0-15

C). Clay, fine slit & fine dust in natural sand, crushed gravel or stone sand shall not be exceed 5% by
mass when determined in accordance with IS:2386 (Part-2).

14.1.2 Sampling and Testing :

A) The method of sampling shall be in accordance with IS:2430

Any test which the Client/ Consultant finds it necessary to be done on sand shall be carried out in
accordance with relevant parts of IS:2386. If further conformation as to the satisfactory nature of
the material is required, compressive strength test on cement mortar cube (1:6) shall be carried
out in accordance with IS:2250 using the supplied material in place of standard sand and the
strength value so obtained shall be compared with that of another mortar cube made with a sand
of acceptable and comparable quality.

B) Unless otherwise specified, sand for plaster shall imply natural river sand.

C) The sand shall be hard, strong, dense, durable, clean and free from veins, adherent coatings and
shall not contain deleterious materials such as iron pyrites, coal, lignite, mica, silt, clay, alkali, sea
shell, organic impurities, loam or any other harmful materials in such quantities so as to adversely
affect the strength or durability of plaster.

D). Presence of clay, fine silt and fine dust in sand shall not be more than 4$ by weight as stated in
clause 3.0 or IS:1542. Organic impurities shall also be within limits as per Table 1.0 or IS: 383.

14.2.2 Grading

A) The grading of sand for internal wall and ceiling plaster shall be within limits specified in the
following Table of IS:1542.

REQUIREMENTS OF GRADING FOR SANDS FOR INTERNAL WALL AND

CEILING PLASTER

Percentage By Weight Passing IS Sieve

IS Sieve Class- A Class- B

Designation ( As
per IS:460)

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 46

240 { 98-100 for under coats 98-100 for under coats

120 { 100 for finishing coats 100 for finishing coats

60 { 80-95 for under coats 80-100 for under coats

30 { 95-100 for finishing coats 95-100 for finishing coats

15 30-85 30-95

5-50 5-65

0-10 0-15

B) The grading of sand for external for external plaster coat and rendering shall be within the limits
specified in Table B.

REQUIREMENTS FOR GRADING FOR SAND FOR EXTERNAL

PLASTERING AND RENDERINGS.

Percentage by Weight Passing IS Sieve

IS Sieve Class - A Class- B

Designation ( As
per IS:460)

480 100 100

240 90-100 90-100

120 70-100 70-100

60 40-85 40-95

30 5-50 10-65

15 0-10 0-15

Class A sand shall be used generally for plaster work but where they are not available. Class B
sand may be used after getting the approval from Client/ Consultant.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 47

Deviation of about 5% from the specified limits in the grading for fractions passing IS Sieve 120
and 60 only may be allowed subject to agreement between the Client/ Consultant and the
supplier. Any other deviation shall be left to the discretion of the Client/ Consultant.

14.2.3 Sampling and Testing :

Same as that for masonry mortar.

14.2.4 Storage :

Same as that of Fine aggregate .

15.0.0 MATERIALS FOR FILING

15.1.0 SAND

15.1.1 Sand used for filling shall be clean river sand hard, gritty, dry and coarse, free from earth, silt
organic matter, clay and other deleterious materials.

15.2.0 MOORUM

15.2.1 QUALITY OF MOORUM :

The moorum shall be naturally occuring material formed by disintegration of rock. It shall be free
vegetarian, rubbish or material of organic origin and scales deleterious to concrete and reinforced
concrete.

Pieces of hard rock which do not get crushed under the roller shall not exceed 50 mm size.

15.2.2 FILLING :

Filling shall be done in 20 cm thick layers and every layer shall be power rolled with 8/10 ton
roller so as to achieve maximum compaction and till such time that no further movement is
observed under the wheels of the roller.

After filling is completed the modified procter density shall be 92% with OMC.

Before start of work the Contractor shall supply the samples of murrum from each quarry to cover
the variations expected in the supply. The samples shall be tested for the following in a
recognised laboratory in accordance with IS:2720 for the following.

Silt and clay content.

Moisture -content and dry density relationship at modified Procter density.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 48

Moisture Control : Water shall be always sprayed and not poured. Ponding shall never be
allowed. In wet weather the work may have to be suspended. Care shall be taken to see that
moisture is uniformly spread throughout the layer and where necessary mixing with harrows and
rakes shall be done.

Measurements : Measurements shall be of the cubic contents of the completed filing and shall be
determined by taking level of testing ground and after final layer for each type of filing. All
dimensions are for compacted thickness.

CINDER :

Cinder is well burnt furnace residue which has been fused or centered into lumps of varying sizes.
Cinder aggregates shall be well burnt furnace residue obtained from furnace using coal fuel only.
It shall be sound clean and free from clay, dirt ash or other deleterious materials.

16.0.0 STEEL AND ALUMINIUM JOONERY

16.1.0 STEEL JOINERY :

16.1.1 General requirements:

Steel windows, ventilators and fixed lights shall conform generally to the provisions prescribed in
IS:1361 and also dimensionally to the details shown on the drawing. Rolled steel sections for the
fabrications of steel joinery and material to be used in the manufactured of the sections shall
conform to the requirements specified in IS:7452.18.1.2 Pressed steel door frames :

a. Steel doorframes shall be manufactured from commercial mild steel sheet of 1.25 mm thickness,
conforming to IS:226 and 4351.

b. Steel doorframes shall be made true to profile and dimensions as specified in IS:4351 or as per
drawings.

c. Each doorframe shall be consist of hinge jamb, lock jamb, head and, if required, angle threshold.
The whole shall be welded or rigidly fixed together by mechanical means. Where no angle
threshold is required, temporary base tie shall be screwed to the feel of frames in order to form a
rigid unit.

d. Base ties shall be of pressed mild steel 1.25 mm thick adjustable to suit floor thickness of
25,30,35 or 40 mm and removable, or alternatively, thresholds of mild steel angle of section 50X
25 mm, minimum, shall be provided for external door frames.

e. Fixing lugs shall have a head made of 25 wide X 1.6mm thick steel strip of specified length and a
spilit end tall 40 mm wide X 1 mm thick and 200 long. There shall be a minimum of three lugs to
each jamb.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 49

f. Hinges shall be made 2.5 mm thick mild steel with a zinc coated removable pin of 6 mm diameter
( conforming to IS:1341 ).

g. Mortar guards shall be provided as specified and these shall be welded to the frame at the head of
the frame for double shutter doors to make provision for bolts.

h. There shall be an adjustable lock strike plate of steel, complete with mortar guard, to make
provision for locks or latches complying with the relevant Indian Standards. Lock-strike plates
shall be of galvanized mild steel and fixed at 75cm to 90cm from finished floor level.

i. For side-hung door there shall not be less than three buffers of rubber or other suitable material
inserted in holes in the rebate and one shall be located on the centre line of the lock-strike plate
lock-strike plate. For double-shutter doors there shall be two buffers or rubber or similar suitable
material inserted in holes in the rebate in the lock jamb only at the head and spaced 15 cm at
either side of the centre line of the door.

16.1.2 Steel windows & ventilators :

a. Steel windows, and ventilators shall be manufactured from ordinary quality structural steel
conforming to IS:1977. in case of composite units consisting of a combination of two or more
units of windows and ventilators different units shall be coupled by using coupling sections made
from MS sheet 3.15mm thick as per IS:1038. the weight of various rolled steel sections used for
the manufacture of windows and ventilators shall be as per those specified in IS:1038 unless
otherwise specified.

b Frames shall show no wrap or interior workmanship. All openable windows shall be designed to
open outside with glazing on the outside of the frames unless mentioned otherwise. The hinges
for side-hung shutters shall be of projecting non-friction type and for top hung plain type unless
specified. Hinge pins and washers shall be of galvanised steel or aluminium alloy of suitable
thickness. Weather bars shall be titted to fabricated coupling section wherever required.

c. Steel ventilators with fixed louvers shall comprise of 16 gauge pressed steel guides spaced at
50mmc/c for receiving glass louvers 4mm thick. MS pressed steel louvers shall be fabricated out
of 16 gauge sheet bent to Z shape and shall be tack welded to frames.

16.1.2 Sliding Doors :

a. Unless otherwise mentioned, all the sliding doors shall be top hung, with coburn track and with
galvanised corrugated sheeting of thickness 24 gauge (0.63mm) on the outer face. At the bottom a
guide angle shall be provided with the frame of the door and a channel shall be anchored in the
floor concrete. The framing angles for the doorframe shall be as per the detailed drawings. The
doors shall be provided with an eyepiece of 16mm diameter.

b. The siding door shall be in one leaf. The doors shall be hung from the top by supporting wheels
fitted in steel hangers Of substantial design, extending at least 400 mm down the door unless

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 50

designed with a double strap in which case they need not extend more than 300 mm. Hangers
shall be riveted to the door and if the door exceeds 1.5m in width not less than three hangers each
with a wheel shall be fitted. Supporting wheels and pins shall be of steel and wheels of low
friction type shall be used. The rail upon which the supporting wheels run shall be a flat bar of
steel at least 75 X 50 X 8 mm in section or an angle at least 65 X 65 X 8mm in section on which a
steel runner bar 16X16mm in section is fixed by rivets at 225mm centres to carry grooved
supporting wheels.

16.1.4 Rolling Shutters :

a. Rolling shutters shall in general conform to IS:6248 and shall be fabricated out of mild steel laths
having interlocking curls at both edges with 12mm minimum depth of corrugation for resisting
manual pressure and normal wind pressure. The laths shall be fabricated out of cold rolled steel
strips. Each lath section shall be continuous single piece without any welded joint. The water
shielding surface shall be kept on the side exposed to atmosphere. When interlocked the rolling
centres of the laths shall be a 75 mm centres minimum. Each alternate lath section shall be fitted
with malleable cast or mild steel clips securely riveted at either end and thus preventing their
lateral movement and wearing of their edges against the guide channels. The clips shall be so
designed so as to fit the contour of the lath sections.

b. The shutter shall be provided with bottom lock plate fabricated out of 3.15 mm thick mild steel
sheet reinforced by an angle iron stiffener of not less than 35X35X5 mm size at the bottom and
MS flat at the top. It shall be interlocked with the bottom lath so as to have a firm contact against
the sill while the shutter is in closed position. The lock plate shall be fitted with necessary sliding
bolts and pulling handles usable from both interior and exterior sides of the plate.

c. The guide channels shall be either of rolled section or one piece pressed construction and shall be
of thickness not less than 3.15 mm. The depth and width of guides shall be such that there is
sufficient clearance between the curtain and the inner surface of guides to ensure not only free
movement of curtain but holding it firmly at the ends upto a maximum wind pressure of 200 kg/
sqm and preventing it from ratting as well. The minimum depth of channel shall be 65 mm for
widths upto 3.50 m and 75 mm for widths more than 3.50 metres. Width of guide channel shall be
25 mm for lath sections with depth of corrugation 12mm. the guide channel shall have minimum
3 numbers of MS holdfasts and the maximum spacing shall however, not exceed 750mm.
Provision of MS stopper at the maximum height shall be made not he guide channels.

d. Bracket plates shall be of hexagonal, square or circular contour and shall have a U-shaped cast
iron or mild steel clamp welded to it at the centre. The bracket plate shall be made out of 3.15 mm
thick mild steel plate and size shall conform to the requirements in IS.The plate shall be held in
position rigidly by means of suitable foundation bolts and in the case of push and pull type
shutter, extra tying to the guide channel by means of a square bar not less than 20 mm size shall
be provided.

e. The suspension shaft of the roller shall be made of heavy duty steel pipe conforming to IS:1161
and shall be of adequate diameter to have minimum deflection with suitable flange coupling. The

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 51

pipes of the shaft that are clamped to the brackets shall be fitted with rotatable cast iron pulleys to
which the curtain is attached. The pulleys and the pipe shaft shall be connected by means of pre-
tensioned helical springs, flat or coil type conforming to grade 2 of IS:4454 hardened and
tempered.

f. Ball bearings provided for rolling shutters shall be two-row self-aligning type with special cast
iron castings at the extreme pulleys at either end. The pulleys shall be interconnected with a cage
formed out of mild steel flats of at least 32 X 6mm and spaced at 15cm.

g. The hood cover shall be made of 0.9 mm thick MS sheets with necessary stiffeners and
framework. The cover shall be of hexagonal, square or circular contour depending on the bracket
plate contour. This shall be supported at regular intervals to prevent sagging.

h. Unless otherwise specified for overall area of rolling shutters upto 10 square meters, pull and
push type hand operated shutters with ball bearings shall be provided. For areas more than 10
sq.m. and upto 35 sq.m mechanical operated gear type with ball bearings shall be provided. A
pulling hook shall be provided for each of the rolling shutters. The pulling hook shall consist of
12 mm diameter rod with a hook at one end and a ring at the other end of adequate length.

g. Power operating shutter shall be suitable for 3 phase, 50 cycle, 400 volt AC power supply and
shall be either floor or wall mounted unit. The motor shall be of sufficient capacity to move the
shutter in either direction at a speed of 0.3m/ sec. In addition to the gear motor, each standard
power unit shall include a magnetic brake, reversing starter with built-in overload protection, a
geared limit switch and one push button station located inside the building. It is desirable that the
bottom bar of motor operated doors shall be provided with a sensitive edge, electrically connected
stop the travel of the door on meeting an obstruction. Operating chains shall be tested quality,
heavily galvanised and with all ends rounded to assure smooth operation and hand protection.
Reduction gears shall be of high strength grey cast iron, machine moulded from machine cut
pattern. These shall be operable from a push button station conveniently located beside the door.
One emergency hand chain / crank operation shall also be provided for use in case of failure of
the electrical system.

16.1.5 Supply :

All doors frames, windows and ventilators shall be dispatched with the opening parts suitably
secured to preserve alignment when fixing and glazing.

Fixing lugs, couplings, fittings and hardware shall be dispatched separately.

Composite windows shall be dispatched uncoupled.

Aluminium Joinery

General requirements:

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 52

a. Anodised aluminium joinery shall conform to the requirements specified in IS: 1948 and 1949
and shall be of Hindalco, Indal , Jindal or equivalent reputed make with size and design as per
relevant drawings. The average thickness of anodic coat shall not be less than 20 microns
(IS:7088) and shall be matt finished.

b. Aluminium doors, windows, ventilators shall be made of aluminium alloy conforming to IS: 733
and sections shall generally conform to IS:1948. Coupling members forming composite sections
shall be of extruded aluminium alloy section. All frames shall have corners machine-jointed to a
true right angle. For side hung shutters, hinges shall normally be of projecting type made of
aluminium alloy and riveted / machine-jointed to frame and shall have stainless steel/ aluminium
alloy pins. Irrespective of the hinges being anodised or not, the aluminium alloy pins shall be
anodised to a minimum film thickness of 25 microns and shall be sealed with oil or wax.
Handles, peg stays shall be of approved heavy-duty quality aluminium or its alloy conforming to
IS specifications.

c. The doorframe and shutters shall be single action or double action as indicated in the drawing
with hydraulic door closer in the floor. The doors shall be provided with anodized aluminium
door handles for full width of door inside and outside. The door frame shall be provided with
approved anchors spaced not more than 900mm centres.

d. Before erecting, frames coming into contact with concrete, masonry, plaster or dissimilar metals,
shall be coated with a thick layer of clear transparent lacquer based on methacrylates or cellulose
butyrate, which is compatible with zinc chromate to protect the surface from wet cement during
installation. This lacquer coating shall be removed after installation is completed. Before handling
over, the aluminium work shall be washed with mild solution of non-alkali soap and water.

Gaskets to be used shall be made of neoprene / EDPM of approved make and shall be approved
by the Client/ Consultant before fixing in position. The sealant shall be of approved make and
shall be duly approved before application. Aluminium doors, windows and ventilators after fixing
in position shall be watertight and airtight.

LI aluminium material used shall be specially anodised for protection against corrosion in marine
environment in approved shade. The anodic coating shall conform to IS:1868 and shall be of
AC25 grade with minimum thickness of 20 microns when measured as per IS:660/2 and density
shall be at least 32MG/sqm. The anodic coating shall be double sealed or alternatively sealed with
steam and shall be of minimum thickness of 50 microns. The anodic coating shall be tested in a
laboratory by Eddy current method as per IS:6012 for thickness. Sulphuric acid shall be used as
the electrolyte for the anodic process.

Whenever specified, polyester grade machine applied power coating of minimum thickness 20
microns shall be provided and such coating shall be of approved shade.

Supply :

Same as for steel joinery.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 53

Unloading and Stacking :

The fabricated frames shall be transported, unloaded, stacked and handled in a careful manner.
They shall be stacked on edge on level bearers and supported evenly. All precautions shall be
taken to ensure that the frames are not damaged or distorted in any manner. As decided by the
Client/ Consultant, the damaged or distorted frames shall be replaced and made good at the
expense of the Contractor. Generally, storage of doors and frames shall conform to IS:4082.

Sampling :

Sampling and criteria for conformity for steel/ aluminium doors, windows, ventilators and fixed
lights shall be as prescribed in the respective Indian Standards.

Hardware for joinery works

General requirements:

a. Fittings shall be of MS, brass, aluminium or as specified. These shall be smooth and free from
sharp edges, corners, flaws and other defects. Screw holes shall be countersunk to suit the head of
specified wood screws. All hinge pins shall be of steel and their riveted heads shall be well
formed.

b. MS fitting shall be finished bright or black enamelled or copper oxidised or painted as specified.
Brass fitting shall be finished bright (brass), oxidised or chromium plated (electroplated) an
aluminium fittings shall be finished bright or anodised or as specified. Fittings shall be approved
by the Client/ Consultant before fixing. Screws used for fittings shall be of the same metal as that
of the fittings. However, anodised cadmium/ chromium fittings. In case of renewal works, the
new fittings shall as far as possible, match with the existing ones. Screws shall be driven home
with screw driver and not hammered in.

These shall be mild steel but Hinges (medium), brass butt Hinges (light/ ordinary), brass but
Hinge (heavy), brass oxidised but V (light/ ordinary), brass oxidised but V (heavy), extruded
aluminium alloy but V or as specified. Brass and MS but Hinges shall generally conform to
IS:205 and IS:1341 respectively.

Butt hinges

These shall be mild steel butt hinges (medium), brass butt hinge (light/ ordinary). Brass but hinge
(heavy), brass oxidized butt hinges (light/ ordinary),brass oxidized butt hinges (heavy) extruded
aluminium alloy butt hinges as specified. Brass and MS butt hinges shall conform generally to
Indian Standard Specification for butt hinges IS: 205 and IS: 1341 respectively.

Parliament Hinges :

These shall be mild steel or cast brass or as specified and shall generally conform to IS:362.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 54

Spring Hinges :

These shall be made of MS or brass casing with steel spring and shall conform generally to
IS:453. Hinges shall work smoothly and hold the door shutters truly vertical in closed position.
The size of spring Hinge shall be taken as length of its plate.

Plano Hinges :

These shall conform to IS:3818 and shall be made of mild steel, brass, or aluminium alloy sheets.
Mild steel Hinges shall be finished with anticorrosive treatment or plating of brass or nickel as
specified. Piano hinges shall be fixed for the full height of cupboard shutters.

Tee Hinges :

These shall be made of MS sheets and finished bright. They shall conform to IS:206.

19.3.0 Sliding Door Bolts :

These shall be of aluminium and conform to IS:2681. they shall be capable of smooth sliding
action. Alternative materials may be adopted on the approval of the Client/ Consultant for
specific locations.

Door latch :

These shall be mild steel, brass or as specified and shall be capable of smooth sliding action.

19.5.0 Tower Bolts :

Tower bolts may be of one of the following types :

Brass barrel tower bolt with cast brass parallel and rolled or drawn brass bolt.

Brass barrel tower bolt with brass sheet parallel and rolled or drawn brass bolt.

Anodised aluminium barrel tower bolt with barrel and bolt of extruded sections of aluminium
alloy (10 / 12mm dia shoot).

MS tower bolt with barrel.

These shall generally conform to IS:204 parts 1 & 2 steel spring and ball shall be provided
between the bolt and the barrel.

Door handles :

These shall be cast brass or MS or aluminium of specified size and of the shape and pattern as
approved by Client / Consultant. These shall generally conform to IS:208. the size of the handle

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 55

shall be determined by the inside grip of the handle. Door handles shall be of 100 mm size and
window handles of 75 mm size unless otherwise specified. These shall be fixed with 25mm long
screws.

Mortice Lock :

Mortice lock with latch and pair of lever handles shall have steel casing and brass bolts and shall
be right or left handed as shown in the drawings or as directed by the Client / Consultant. It shall
be to the approved quality and shall confirm to IS:2209. The shape and pattern shall be approved
by the Client/ Consultant. The size of the lock shall be determined by its length. The lock for
single leaf door shall have plain face and that for double leaf door shall have a rebated face. Lever
handles with springs shall be mounted on plates and shall weigh not less than 0.5 kg per pair.
These shall be of brass, finished bright chromium plated or oxidised.

Floor door stopper :

This shall be made of cast brass or anodised aluminium and shall have a rubber cushion. The type
and pattern sill be as approved by the Client / Consultant.

Hooks and Eyes :

These shall be of hard drawn brass or steel and shall generally conform to IS:207.

Casement Window Fasteners :

These shall be made of cast brass, anodised aluminium or chromium plated steel. Casement
fasteners for single leaf window shutter shall be left or right handed as specified. These shall not
weigh less than 0.20 kg per fastener.

Casement Stays :

These shall be made of cast brass, anodished aluminium or chromium plated steel . the stay shall
be made from channel section and shall not weigh less than that indicated below :

200m m 0.24 kg each

250m m 0.28 kg each

300m m 0.33 kg each

The shape and pattern of stays shall be approved by the Client / Consultant.

These shall be made of cast brass, anodised aluminium or C.P. Steel. The shape and pattern shall
be approved by the Client / Consultant. It shall not weigh less than 0.20 kg each.

Fan/ Light Pivots :

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 56

These shall be made of cast brass or C.P. Steel and shall generally conform to IS:1837. the base
and socket plate shall be made from minimum 3.15 mm thick brass or CP steel plate and
projected pivot shall not be less than 12 mm in length, cast in single pieces with the base plate.

17.13.0 Fan/ Light Catch :

These shall be made of cast brass or CP steel and shall generally conform to IS:364. steel spring
of the catch shall be 0.90mm dia 6 coils 12mm internal diameter and 20 mm long. The pattern
and the shape of the catch shall be as approved by the client / Consultant.

17.14.0 Chain with hook for fan light :

This shall be made of hard drawn brass or cast brass or CP steel welded or twisted as specified
and shall generally conform to IS:3828. One end of the chain shall be provided with an eye and
the other end with staple. The minimum thickness of plates shall be 2.24 mm and the chain shall
be 300 mm long made from minimum 4 mm hard drawn wire.

17.15.0 Hasp and staple :

Hasp and staple (safety type ) shall be made of cast brass or CP steel or alumimium and generally
conform to IS:363. The higher pin which in all cases shall be of mild steel, shall be firm and its
riveted head well formed. The movement of the hasp shall be free, easy and square and shall not
have any play or shake. The hasp shall fit the staple correctly. The size shall be determined by the
length of the bigger leaf of the hasp.

17.16.0 Cupboard lock :

These shall be made of cast brass conforming to IS:729 and shall be of approved make. The lock
shall be easy in working having duplicate keys.

17.17.0 Hydraulic door closer :

These shall conform to IS:3564 and be of brand approved by the Client / Consultant for both left
and right hand openings.

Hardware and fixtures shall be as specified in the drawing or schedule of quantities. All hardware
and fixtures shall be able to withstand repeated use. Door closer shall be suitable for doors
weighting 61-80 kg. Unless otherwise stated. Each closer shall be guaranteed against
manufacturing defect for one year and any defect found within this period shall be rectified or the
closer replaced free of charge. Concealed door closers shall be either floor mounted or
transmounted, suitable for installation with metal doors. It shall conform to the performance
requirements and endurance test stated in IS:3534.

18.0.0 Glazing :

18.1.0 General requirements :

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 57

18.1.1. The glass used for glazing works shall be of the best quality transparent and free from blisters,
specks, bubbles, stones, scratches, veins, air holes and other defects so as to give a clear visibility
thorough the glass.

18.2.2. All glass shall be procured from a reputed manufacture and duly approved by Client /Consultant.
The glass supplied at site shall conform to the requirements indicated in the schedule of items and
the following Indian Standards listed below:

a. Sheet glass of selected quality as per IS:2835.

b. Wired and Wired-figured glass as per IS:5437.

18.2.0 Sheet glass:

General :

Sheet glass is a flat transparent glass made by blowing or drawing and it shall be, to the extent
possible, colorless as judged by the un-aided eye except when viewed edgewise showing a light
blue to green tint.

Unless otherwise specified sheet glass shall weight 7.5 kg / sqm for panes upto 600x600 mm. for
panes larger than 600x600mm and upto 800x800 mm glass weighting not less than 8.7 kg / sqm
shall be sued. For bigger panes upto 900x900 mm glass weighting not less than 11.25 kg / sqm
shall be used.

Sheet glass shall be patent flattened glass of best quality and for glazing and framing purposes
shall conform to IS:1761.

18.2.3 Testing :

Tests for Waviness, Warpage, lines, etc. shall be done as per Appendix A of IS:2835 and test
for thickness shall be done as per Appendix B of IS:2835.

Any glass, found to suffer from defects beyond allowable limits (as per Table -2, IS:2835) shall
be rejected.

18.2.3. Sampling:

Representative samples of the material shall be drawn and adjudged for conformity with this
specification as prescribed in Appendix C, IS:2835.

18.2.4. Packing and marking :

Sheet glass shall be packed as agreed to between the purchase and the supplier. The packages
shall be marked with ISI certification mark. Packages shall also be marked with name and quality

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 58

of the material, nominal thickness and cut size, name of the manufacture, as per clause 6.0 of
IS:2835.

18.3.0 Wired glass and wire-figured glass :

18.3.1 Wire glass apart from serving as a rigid glazing material helps in providing reasonable protection
against spreading of fire across.

18.3.2 The wire mesh used in the wired glass or wired figured glass should be made of steel wire 0.46 to
0.56 mm in diameter. The pattern of mesh shall be squire or diamond with wired welded or
hexagonal with wires twisted. The wire mesh shall be embedded completely in the glass sheet at
least 1 mm from the surface and shall not be exposed at any place. Wire mesh shall not contain
more than 3 broken wires per square meter of glass.

18.3.3 Sampling and testing :

Tests for flame-proofness, thickness, etc. and sampling shall be in accordance with the methods
prescribed in IS:5437.

18.4.0 Plate glass :

Plate glass shall be polished patent flat glass of best quality. It shall have both the surface ground
flat and parallel and polished to obtain clear undisturbed vision and reflection. The plate glass
shall be of thickness mentioned in the item or as shown in detailed drawings or as specified. In
absence of any specified thickness, the thickness of plate glass to be supplied shall be 6 mm and a
tolerance of 0.2 mm shall be admissible.

18.4.0 Obscured glass :

This type of glass transmits light so that vision is partially or almost completely obscured. Glass
shall be plain rolled, figure, ribbed or fluted or frosted glass as may be specified.

18.5.0 Putty :

The material shall be homogenous paste and shall be free from dust, grit and other visible
impurities and shall conform to the specifications prescribed in IS:419.

Putty may be prepared by mixing one part of while lead with three parts of finely powdered chalk
or then adding boiled linseed oil to the mixture to form a stiff paste and adding varnish to the
paste at the rate of 1 liter to varnish to 18 kg of paste.

19.0.0 Tiles :

19.1.0 Terrazzo Tiles :

Terrazzo tiles shall generally conform to the standards prescribed in IS:1237 in all respects.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 59

19.1.1 General requirements:

a. All tiles to be used shall be heavy duty flooring tiles only, conforming to clause 3 of IS:1237.

b. Tiles shall be manufactured from cement, natural aggregate and colouring pigment (where
require) as specified in clause 4 of IS:1237, under hydraulic pressure not less than 140 kg/ sqcm
and shall be given the first grinding with machine before delivery to site.

c. Manufacturing process of tiles shall conform to the requirement given in clause 5 of IS:1237.

d. Unless otherwise stated, the size of terrazzo flooring tiles shall be as follows:

Length (mm) Breadth (mm) Thickness (mm)

200 200 20

250 250 22

300 300 25

However, special shapes and size of tiles can be asked for by the client. In such as case, the
manufacture / supplier shall ensure to supply the tiles only in the specified shape and size.

e. Tolerances on length or breadth of tiles shall be +/- 1mm. In addition, the difference in length of
side between the longest side and shorter side in the sample shall not exceed 1 mm. Tolerance on
thickness shall be +/- 5 mm. In addition, the difference in thickness between the thickness and the
thinnest tile in the sample shall not exceed 3mm.

f. The minimum thickness of wearing layer for the various classes of terrazzo flooring tiles shall be
specified in Table 1 to IS:1237. unless otherwise specified the tiles shall be supplied with initial
grinding and grouting of the wearing layer.

g. The wearing layer of the tiles shall be free from projections, depressions, cracks, holes, cavities
and other blemishes.

19.1.2 Physical requirements :

The tests on tiles to check physical requirements shall not be carried out earlier than 28 days from
the date of manufacture.

a. Client can ask for any physical test to verify the acceptability of the tiles. All physical tests shall
be carried out as per Appendix A to F of IS:1237 as applicable, depending on the tests to be done.

b. On testing, the physical requirements shall conform to the acceptability limits specified in clause
11 of IS:1237. Tiles, failing to meet acceptability criteria, shall be rejected.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 60

19.1.3 Sampling :

Sampling and inspection shall be carried out as per clause 14 of IS:1237.

19.1.4 Marking :

All tiles shall be legibly marked on the back with the name of the manufacturer or his trade mark.
Heavy duty tiles shall be marked H

19.2.0 Ceramic Tiles :

Ceramic tiles to be used for flooring and doing shall conform to IS:13712. These shall be
procured from approved manufactures and a few approved samples shall be submitted to Client/
Consultant /architect for future reference.

19.2.1 General requirements:

The tiles shall be of vitreous ware and shall be free from deleterious, substances. The finished
tile, when fractured shall appear fine grained in texture, dense and homogeneous. The tiles shall
be sound, true to shape, flat, free from flaws and other manufacturing defects affecting their
utility.

Glazed Ceramic tiles: Glazed ceramic tiles shall be highly pressed, single fired, red body, top
glazed white or coloured, plain or with designs. The body glazed ceramic tiles should consist of
high grade clay and minerals and well pressed in hydraulic presses and glaze should be a
combination of different minerals. The top surface shall be glazed with stable glass/ semi-glass /
matt finish of uniform colour and texture. The edges and under side of the tiles shall be free from
glaze and shall have ribs or indentations so that these may adhere properly to the surface below.

Floor tiles : These tiles should have high strength, good resistance to wear and tear, low water
absorption and sufficient anti-skid properties and all shall conform to IS: 13755. Based on the
properties of the glaze and hardness, floor tiles are categorized abrasion resistant-wise as group II
TO V. According to the intensity of foot traffic the tile group shall be selected and used.

Wall tiles : These tiles shall be single fast fired having medium water absorption and high
strength characteristics. These tiles shall have high glaze and better adhesion to wall and shall
conform to IS : 13753. Wall tiles shall be glossy/ semi-glossy, matt glaze finish, white or
coloured, plain or printed special printed and premium printed.

Vitrified ceramic unpolished/ polished tiles : These tiles are of different shades having monolithic
body that is pressed in very high tonnage press and fired to high temperature. The tiles shall be
homogeneous and compact through out the entire body with very high strength, low porosity and
extreme surface hardness, high resistance to abrasion by chemicals and shall conform to IS:4457.
The tiles shall be with smooth surface or textured anti-skid finish surface. Polished vitrified

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 61

ceramic floor tiles shall be homogeneous heavy and though with highly reflective polished
surface but non-slippery.

19.2.2 Sampling & Testing :

Sampling shall be done as per IS:13711 and testing shall be done as per IS:13630. samples of
each type/ design/ finish/ size/ colour of tiles shall be submitted well in advance to the Architect
Consultant for approval at the Contractor s cost. The consultant / architect shall retain approved
sample. Tiles shall be procured from a single approved source who can provide products of
consistent quality and physical properties.

19.2.3 Storage :

The tiles shall be delivered in original containers with seals unbroken. Adequate precaution shall
be taken to prevent accidental damage to tiles while unloading and these shall be stored under
cover in manner approved by the Engineer-in-Charge.

19.2.4 Acceptance criteria :

Acceptance criteria shall be as per IS:13711.

19.3.0 Anti-skid tiles :

19.3.1 General requirements:

The tiles be free from any flaw, fissure, crack or any other manufacturing defect that may
adversely affect their utility. They shall be flat, square, true to shape and sound.

Finish shall be mat finish.

Compressive strength shall not be less than 70N/mm.

Maximum permissible water absorption shall be 2 percent.

Maximum permissible average wear shall be 2 mm. However, for an individual specimen this
value shall be 2.5 mm.

Tiles meant for dadoing purposes shall not be used for flooring.

19.3.2 Sampling and testing :

Sample as that of Ceramic tiles .

19.3.3 Acceptance criteria :

Same as that of Ceramic tiles .

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 62

19.4.0 Acid Resistant tiles :

19.4.1 General requirements:

The tiles shall be of vitreous ware and shall be free form deleterious, substances. The finished
tile, when fractured shall appear fine grained in texture, dense and homogeneous. The tiles shall
be sound, true to shape, flat free from flaws and other manufacturing defects affecting their
utility.

Size of ceramic unglazed vitreous acid resistant tiles shall be as follows :

i. 100 X 100 (or) 98.5 X 98.5mm

ii. 150 X 150 (or) 148.5 X 148.5mm

iii. 200 X 200 (or) 198.5 X 198.5mm

Half tiles for use as full times. If manufactured, shall have dimensions that shall be such as to
make the half tiles, when jointed together, match with the dimension of a full tile.

Thickness shall be 25,20,12&10mm.

Depth of the grooves on the underside of tiles shall not exceed 3mm.

Tolerance in length, width and thickness of tiles shall be +/- 2.5 percent.

Half tiles for use as full tiles, if manufactured, shall have dimensions that shall be such as to make
the half tiles, when joined together match with the dimension of a full tile.

Tolerance in length width and thickness of the tiles shall be +/- 2.5 percent. Other requirements
shall be in accordance with Table -1 of IS:4457.

20.0.0 Paints

20.1.0 Enamel paint :

20.1.1 General requirements:

Paint and enamel shall be of approved quality Colour for enamels shall conform to IS:5. These
shall always meet the requirements (colour and space) of the Client/ Consultant / architect.

These shall be purchased from reputed manufacturers only as directed by the Client/ Consultant.

Under no circumstances the paint shall be diluted with linseed oil or any other material before
application. The method of application shall be as prescribed by the manufactures.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 63

Paint shall not show excessive setting in freshly can and shall easily be mixed with paddle to a
smooth homogeneous state.

While brushing, the paint shall be easily brush able possess good leveling properties with no
running or sagging tendencies.

The paint shall dry to a smooth uniform finish free from roughness, unevenness and other
imperfections.

20.1.2 Primer :

Primer shall be Zinc Phosphate.

20.1.3 Packing and Marking :

Packing and marking of packages of paints, enamels & primers shall be in accordance with
IS:5661.

20.1.4 Sampling :

Representative samples of the material shall be drawn as prescribed under 3 of IS : 101 whenever
directed by the Client/ Consultant.

20.1.5 Storage :

Paints of all types shall be stored in a cool dry place, preferable in a godown specifically made fro
the purpose. In general, storage of paints shall be in accordance with IS:4082.

20.2.0 Plastic emulsion paint :

Plastic emulsion paint for interior and exterior use shall conform to IS:5411 (parts- 1& 2)
respectively.

20.2.1 General requirements:

a. the emulsion paint and primers in general shall be of approved quality, colour, shade and brand as
directed by the Client/ Consultant.

b. The material shall consist of pigments with suitable extenders in suitable proportions, in a
medium consisting of any stable synthetic polymer emulsion in water, with suitable other
ingredients as may be necessary to produce a material so as satisfy the requirements of this
standard.

c. The paint, for interior use, shall meet the requirements of IS:5411 (part-1), on testing. The paint
for exterior use shall comply with the requirements of IS:5411 (par-2).

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 64

d. Any special requirement, if agreed to between the supplier and the Client/ Consultant, shall have
to be complied with.

20.2.2 Packing and Marking :

Unless otherwise specified, the material shall be packed in metal containers lacquered inside with
a suitable chemical resistant material.

Each container shall be marked in a manner as specified in clause 4 of IS:5411 (part 1).

20.2.3 Sampling :

Representative samples of the material shall be drawn as prescribed under 3 of IS:101 whenever
directed by the Client/ Consultant.

20.2.4 Testing :

a. Tests shall be conducted according to the methods prescribed in IS:101. Appendices A to E of

IS:5411 (part-1) and Appendices A to E of IS:5411 (part-2), as applicable.

b. Unless otherwise specified, pure chemicals and distilled water (conforming to IS: 1070) shall be
employed in tests.

20.2.5 Storage :

Paints shall be delivered in sealed containers. They shall be stored in accordance with the
provisions of IS:4082.

20.3.0 Cement paint :

20.3.1 General requirements:

Cement paint shall conform to the requirements laid down in IS:5410

The material shall be in powder form, free from lumps.

When mixed with required volume of water, it shall be suitable for use on porous surface of
masonry, concrete, stucco, common brick and rough plaster work, except gypsum plaster.

20.3.2 Scaffolding :

Wherever scaffolding is necessary, it shall be erected in such a way that as far as possible no part
of scaffolding shall rest against the surface to be white or colour washed.

A property secured and well tied suspended platform may also be used for whitewashing and
colour washing.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 65

Where ladders are used, pieces of old gunny bags shall be tied at top and bottom to prevent
scratches to the walls and floors.

For whitewashing of ceilings, proper stage scaffolding may be erected, where necessary.

20.4.0 White wash, colour wash :

White washing and colour washing on concrete, masonry and plaster surfaces in building shall
conform to IS:6278.

20.4.1 Materials :

Following materials are used to prepare whitewash and colour wash.

Lime used for whitewashing shall be freshly burnt fat line ( also classified as class C lime)
conforming to IS:712. It shall be white in colour.

Water shall be clear, free from all organic and suspended impurities. Water shall meet the
requirements mentioned in the clause 4.3 of IS:456. portable water is generally considered
suitable for this purpose.

Colour wash shall be done with mineral colours not affected by lime added to white wash. No
colour wash shall be done until a sample of the colour wash to the required shade or tint has been
approved by the architect/ consultant. The colour shall be of even shade over the whole surface. It
is blotchy or otherwise badly applied, it shall be redone by the Contractor at his own cost.

Gum or glue.

Sodium chloride to be used shall conform to IS:253 or grade II of IS:797.

Ultramarine blue or Indigo shall conform to IS:55.

Pigments :

i. low and red ochre- The ochres shall conform to IS:44. The solid lumps shall be crushed to
powder.

ii. Blue vitriol Fresh crystals of hydrous copper sulphate (blue vitriol ) shall conform to IS:261 and
shall be grounded to fine powder.

20.4.2 Scaffolding : Same as for Cement part

20.5.0 Distemper :

20.5.1 Dry distemper :

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 66

The powdered / dry distemper shall be approved colour and of approved brand and shall conform
to the requirements prescribed in IS:427 & 428. The shade shall be got approved from the
architect / consultant before application. The dry distemper of approved brand and colour shall be
stirred slowly in clean water using 6 deciliters (0.6 litres) of water per kg of distemper or as
specified by the manufacture. Warm water shall be used. It shall be allowed to stand for at least
30 minutes ( or if practicable over night ) before use. The mixture shall be well stirred before and
during use to maintain an even consistency. Distemper shall not be mixed in larger quantity than
is actually required for one day s work.

20.5.2 Oil bound distemper :

The specifications and condition for this shall be the same as that applicable for dry distemper,
except that all bound distemper of approved make, shade and colour shall be used after applying
priming coat of purifying liquid or other primer as may be recommended by the manufacturer /
supplier. It shall conform to IS:428.

20.5.3 Scaffolding :

Same as for Cement Paint .

206.0 Heritage wall finish :

It shall be from Bakelite Hylam Ltd. Or equivalent as approved by the architect/ consultant. It
shall conform to international Standards.

It shall be two-component finish. It shall be easily applicable using trowels and no special tools
and training shall be required for application. The single coat application thickness shall be 1.52
mm of colour and texture as approved by the architect. It shall be weather and fade resistant water
and damp resistant, durable, and highly washable. It shall be acid and alkali resistant, high
abration resistant, non-toxic and shall be capable to lake any shade. It can be applied on wide
variety of surface like cement mortar, plywood, plaster board, AC sheet, gypsum plaster or any
other absorbent material to get homogenous layer.

It shall be incombustible and flexible. It shall be good fire resistant, anti-fungal, good impact
resistant having adhesion strength more than 8 kg/ sqcm. There shall not be any development of
hairline cracks and no peeling off shall occur after the maximum drying lime of 4 hours and
during period of 2 days.

20.7.0 Acrylic emulsion paint :

It shall be water based acrylic Co-polymer emulsion with rutile titanium-dia-oxide and other
selected pigment and fungicide. It shall exhibit excellent adhension to plaster and cement surface
and shall resist deterioration by alkalis salts. The paint film shall allow the moisture in the wall to
escape without any deterioration in colour or without showing flaking, blistering or peeling.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 67

21.1.0 False ceiling :

21.1.0 General requirements:

21.1.1 The ceiling boards shall conform to the requirements specified in the schedule of items or in the
drawings. They shall be strong and with uniform texture without cracks, holes or any other
defects.

21.1.2 Galvanised steel grid system :

Main runner-Hot dipped galvanised steel, T shaped of 24 X 38mm size and thickness 0.33 mm
cross runner- Hot dipped galvanised steel, T shaped of 24 X 30mm size, thickness 0.25 mm. 1200
mm long and 24X25 mm size. Thickness 0.25mm, 600mm long. Perimeter section shall be same
material as runners. Sections shall be 22X22mm size with thickness of 0.45 mm. Exposed areas
of all members shall be powder coated to a thickness of 25 micron.

Gypsum Board Tiles with Seamless Joins :

The above shall be of the best quality from India Gypsum or equivalent as approve by the
architect. It shall be formed by enclosing and bonding together a core of set gypsum plaster by
two sheets of heavy paper. It shall offer high standards of safety, thermal efficiency and
aesthetics. It shall be light weight, offer good fire resistance. It shall be a non-resonant material,
rendering sound insulation. It shall be strong, durable and dimensionally stable. It shall offer a
smooth surface which can be painted, titled or wall-papered. It shall block this passage of heat
and shall retard the spread of fire. It shall reduce upto 60 db of sound.

Gypsum boards shall conform to IS:2095-1982 & IS:2542-1981.

It shall be resistant to delamination due to moisture and cyclic changes in weather and humidity.

The density shall be 288 kg/ cum and the weight shall vary from 8-12.8 kg/sqm depending on the
thickness. It shall be available in thickness of 9.5, 12.5 and 15mm.

Standard size are 610x610mm, 1220x610mm.

Steel false ceiling :

Panels shall be cold rolled steel, galvanised as per IS:277 coil coated as per JIS 3312. panels shall
be 150 wide and 17 mm deep. They shall be roll-formed out of 0.5mm TCT coil coaled
glavanised steel. They shall be degreased, pretreated and coil coated on one side in
manufacturer s standard shades. The rear of the panels shall be given a coat primer and a wash
coat, while the finished side will be given a coal of primer and a finish colour coat in polyester
paint for a minimum dry film thickness of 20 microns. Panels shall be factory cut to lengths upto
5m to suit site dimensions.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 68

Panel stringers shall be 34.5 mm wide and 48 mm deep with cutouts to hold panels in a module of
150mm. they shall be roll-framed out of 0.6mm thick galvanised steel strip cut to a standard
length of 5m. stringers shall be stove enameled black.

Stringers shall be suspended form the roof/ truss by galvanised steel wire rod hangers and
suspension clips. Hangers shall be fixed to roof by J hooks and nylon inserts or using 18 g
annealed GI wire.

Edge profiles shall be L shaped, roll formed out of 0.65mm aluminium strip/ 0.6 mm galvanised
steel strip with powder coating in standard colours.

Testing :

Tests shall be carried out in accordance with the provisions of relevant standards and as directed
by the Client/ Consultant.

Miscellaneous materials :

Performed filler board for joints :

Performed filler board shall be SHALITED or equivalent conforming to IS:1838 and should
consist of a fibre board impregnated with bituminous materials to render it durable and
waterproof. It should be compressible and possess a high degree of resilience. It shall withstand a
dampen minor vibrations.

The filler should permit free movement of the concrete members in expansion and contraction
and should provide waterproof seal and resist entry of any foreign material. The filler should be
resilient and non-extrudible.

Polysulphide sealant :

Polysulphide sealants shall be of approved make and shall comply with all the requirements
prescribed in IS:12118.

It shall be a two-component polysulphide rubber joint sealant based on low molecular weight
polymer. It should not contain cholrides or other corrosive substances.

The modulus of elasticity of the sealant shall not be less than 0.16 Mpa+/-10% at 100%
ekibgatuib, tge sgire hardness shall be 22+/-3@25oC to 80 C. The permanent dynamic movement
capability shall be +/-25%. The tensile strength shall not be less than 0.4 Mpa.
It shall posses properties like 550% elongation at break, non-toxicity when fully cured, no stating,
shrinkage less than 1%. The trafficable strength shall be achieved within 24 hrs and full at 7 days
(at 25o C & 250% RH).

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 69

WATER PROOFING MATERIALS

Integral Cement Waterproofing Compounds

Integral cement waterproofing compounds, i.e. admixture for waterproofing purposes shall fully
comply with the requirements of IS: 2645. Properties like permeability, setting time, compressive
strength shall be in accordance with the requirements of this code when tested as per procedure
laid therein. Calcium chloride content of the product used shall be made known to Engineer
before use.

Bitumen

The bitumen bonding material for waterproofing shall conform to the requirements laid down in
IS: 702, or IS: 73 or IS: 217 or IS: 454 depending upon whether industrial bitumen, paving
bitumen or cutback bitumen is used. For selecting the particular type and grade of bitumen to be
used the relevant item in Schedule of Items shall be referred to

Bitumen Primer

Bitumen primer used for application to concrete and masonry surfaces and bitumen for the
purpose of waterproofing shall conform to requirements given in IS: 3384 and pass tests in
accordance with the procedure laid down in appropriate IS mentioned in Table-I of IS: 3384.
Bitumen primer should be free from water and shall preferably ;be made from the same grade of
bitumen as used in bonding.

Bitumen Felt

Bitumen felts used for water proofing purposes shall be as specified in IS: 1322 Physical
properties shall conform to the requirements and tests shall be carried out as per procedure laid
down in IS: 1322. Base, (whether fibre or Hessian), type and grade of felt shall be as mentioned
in the relevant items under Schedule of Items. Unless otherwise stated, hessian base felt Type-3,
Grade-2 shall be used.

Bitumen Mastic

Bitumen mastic used for water proofing of roofs shall have the physical properties as mentioned
in IS: 3037 when tested with the procedure laid down in appropriate IS mentioned in IS: 3037.

Bitumen Compounds

Bituminous compounds when used for waterproofing of porous masonry, concrete floors, walls
and roofs shall conform to the requirements of IS: 1580. Physical properties shall be governed by
the requirements of this code when tested in accordance with the procedure laid therein.

Surface Application Materials

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 70

Waterproofing material for application on mortar or concrete surface shall conform to IS: 9862.
The primer shall be suitable for spray or brush application. It shall have properties enabling it to
penetrate through pores or cracks and fill them up, making the surface impervious.

High Polymer, based Admixtures & Epoxy Based Emulsion & Paints

The materials used shall be high polymer based chloride and sulphide free cement and
waterproofing additions and epoxy based waterproofing paints as per manufacturer's specification
and approved by Engineer.

DRAINAGE & SANITATION (INTERNAL)

General

All materials, pipes, specials, fittings, fixtures etc., to be used in the works shall be of best quality
and class specified in relevant IS Code. Where specified these shall be of specific manufacture
and quality and shall be procured from manufacturer or their accredited stockists and be marked
with manufacturers' names and trade mark.
Contractor shall submit to the Engineer samples of all materials, pipes, specials, fittings fixtures
for approval before use in the works. Such approved samples shall be retained by the Engineer
until completion of works. Pipes and specials may be any or combination of following types:-

i) PVC Pipes/UPVC pipes

ii) Stone Ware Pipes
iii) HCI Pipes for soil waste & Ventilation
iv) CI Pipes for rain water
v) AC Pipes for rain water
vi) R.C.C Pipes

PVC /UPVCWaste Pipe

This shall conform to relevant IS unless otherwise specified.

Stoneware Pipes & Fittings

All stoneware pipes, bends, gully traps and sewer traps shall be of the best salt glazed variety
inside and outside, hard burnt dark grey colour, perfectly sound, free from fire cracks and
imperfection of glaze, truly circular in cross section, perfectly straight, of standard nominal length
and depth of socket and barrel. These shall be of approved manufacture and shall comply with the
requirement of IS: 651

Gully Trap
Each gully trap shall have one C.I. grating 150 mm x 150 mm and one water tight precast R.C.
cover 300 x 300 x 40 mm thick with 1:1 1/2:3 mix concrete (one cement: one and half sand : 3
stone chips 20 mm down) including neat cement finish.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 71

CI Manhole Cover

Manhole cover shall be CI type 450mm dia (internal) light duty 25 kg weight (cover and frame),
heavy duty 128kg weight (cover & frame), 560 mm dia (internal) and shall be either single seal or
double seal as specified in the Schedule of Items.

Polycrete Sanitary Fittings

Where specifically mentioned polycrete sanitary fittings manufactured by Gujarat Polycrete Pvt.
Ltd., shall be used The pipe, fittings and appurtenances shall be of the description mentioned in
for glazed vitreous fitting.

Fibre Glass Sink

Fibre glass sink where specified shall be of heavy duty (4 ply) of approved manufacturer, shape
and size. The pipes and other appurtenances shall be of the description mentioned for the glazed
vitreous sinks.

WATER SUPPLY & PLUMBING (INTERNAL)

General
The specification of material for pipes, fittings, fixtures etc., to be used in water supply works.All
materials, pipes, fittings, fixtures to be used in the works shall be of the best quality of the class
specified in relevant IS Code. Where specified these shall be of specific manufacture and quality
and shall be procured from the manufacturer or their accredited stockist and be marked with
manufacturers name and trade marks. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer samples of all
pipes, fittings, and fixtures for approval before being used in the works. Such approved samples
shall be retained by the Engineer until completion of works. Pipes and pie fittings may be of any
or combination of following types:

i) Wrought iron galvanised pipe

ii) PVC pipes
iii) Cast iron pipes
iv) Steel pies coated with bitumen composition inside and galvanised
outside.
v) Reinforced concrete pipes
vi) Asbestos cement pipes
vii) Prestressed concrete pipes
viii) Lead (not to be used for potable water)

Galvanised Iron Pipes and Fittings

Generally pipes for installations in buildings shall be medium quality malleable steel galvanised
pipe 'B' class for cold water supply and 'C' class for hot water supply, having threaded ends with
socket at one end.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 72

PVC Pipes

Polythene unplasticised pipes be procured from reputed and approved manufacturer and shall
have marking in colour in accordance with relevant Indian Standards.

Fittings for PVC Pipes

These fittings shall be special flange compression fittings such as Alka Fan Fittings manufactured
by supreme or other equivalent. Tee's, elbows, cross and reducers shall be provided with male &
female joints.

Fittings for unplasticized PVC pipes

The fittings shall be injection mould and/or fabricated type.

R.C.C Asbestos, Prestressed Pipes and Fittings

These shall be of approved manufacture and quality and shall conform to relevant IS.

Cast Iron Pipes and Fittings

The cast iron pipes and fittings shall be of approved manufacture and quality and shall
conform to IS: 1537 for pipes and IS: 1538 for fittings.

Steel Pipes

This shall conform to IS: 1239 & 3589. Steel pipes shall be coated with bituminous
composition inside and galvanised outside.

Valves

Unless otherwise mentioned in the Schedule of Quantities these shall be of gun metal
fullway valves of medium type and shall be of approved manufacture. These shall
conform to relevant Indian Standard pecifications.

EXTERNAL WATER SUPPLY, SEWERAGE & DRAINAGE

C.I. Pipes
Unless otherwise specified CI Pipe and specials, caulking lead, SW Pipe, RCC pipe
shall conform to the following:-
i) CI pipe shall conform to IS: 1536 to 1537
ii) CI pipe fittings shall conform to IS: 1538.
iii) CI specials shall be of similar specification as specified for fittings in IS: 1538.
iv) Bolts and nuts shall be hexagonal bolts and nuts conforming to IS: 1363.

Washers
Spring washers conforming to latest edition of IS: 3063 shall be used near the pumps to
take care of vibration. In other places plain washers conforming to IS: 2016 shall be used.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 73

Gaskets

Gaskets shall be reinforced rubber sheet conforming to IS: 638.

Caulking Lead
All the spigot and socket joints shall be caulked by lead conforming to IS: 782.
Salt glazed stoneware pipes shall conform to IS: 651 and shall be laid as per IS: 3114.
CI pipes used for sewerage, under roads and other places shall conform to IS: 1536,
and shall be laid as per IS: 31.
Steel pipes used for encasing shall conform to IS: 1239 and IS: 3589.
Cast iron manhole covers shall conform to IS: 1726.
Steel reinforcements shall conform to IS: 432.
RCC pipes used shall conform to IS: 458 and shall be laid as per IS: 783.

ROAD WORKS

General

Roads shall be understood to include road bed, the wearing surface, berms, foot-paths,
kerbs, culverts and bridges.

Soling Stones

Material for soling shall be natural stone boulders or crushed blast furnace slab. Stone
boulders shall consist of materials of uniform quality in sizes between 150 mm to 230
mm with total length not exceeding 300 mm. No stone shall weigh less than 3.5
kg.Stones shall be tough, angular, durable and generally free from flat, elongated, soft
and disintegrated particles. They shall also be free from dirt or other objectionable matter
and be obtained from quarries approved by the Engineer.Crushed slag obtained from air-
cooled blast furnace slag shall be angular, of reasonably uniform quality and density and
generally be free from any thin, elongated, and soft pieces, dirt or other objectionable
matter. The density of slag should not be less than 6.12 gm/cc and glassy material shall
not exceed 20%. Water absorption when determined in accordance with IS: 2386 (Part-
III). "Methods of Tests for Aggregates for Concrete: Specific Gravity, Density Voids,
Absorption and Bulking", shall not exceed 10%.

Coarse Aggregate for Water Bound Macadam

Coarse aggregate for water bound macadam shall be natural gravel, crushed
stone obtained from approved quarries or crushed blast furnace slag. Crushed
stone shall be hard, durable, tough and of uniform quality, generally free from
flat, elongated, soft and disintegrated particles. It shall have sharp edges and
also not have excess of dirt and other objectionable matter. When tested as per
IS: 2386 (Part-IV) for Los Angeles Abrasion Value or Aggregate Impact Value,
the limiting values shall be 50% and 40% respectively for base course and 40%
and 30% respectively for surfacing
for bituminous surfacing shall be bitumen conforming to IS: 73, of grade 80/100
for tack coat and grade 30/40 for premixing.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 74

Materials for Cement Concrete Roads

Materials for cement concrete in concrete roads shall conform to the relevant
specifications under "Concrete" of this series, with the additional requirement that the
Los Angeles Abrasion Value of Coarse Aggregates Shall not exceed 35%. The size and
grading of aggregates shall conform to the requirements of IRC : 15.

Kerbs

Kerbs may be of stone, concrete or brick as may be shown in drawing or otherwise

directed by Engineer.

Stone kerbs

Stones shall conform to the dimensions and shapes given in drawing. Exposed faces shall
be dressed two lines.

Concrete kerbs

Shape and dimension shall conform to the drawing. They shall be precast and the road
side top corner shall be given a chamfer.

MATERIALS NOT SPECIFIED

Any materials not fully specified in these specification and which may be offered for use
in the works shall be subject to approval of Engineer, without which it shall not be used
anywhere in the works.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 75

GENERAL

Standard

A high standard of workmanship in all trades will be required. The Contractor shall ensure that
only skilled and experienced workmen are employed.

Supervision

The Contractor's supervising staff shall be fully qualified and experienced in the types of work
being carried out under the supervision and shall be capable of ensuring that they are done well
and efficiently.

Codes

Unless mentioned otherwise, current versions of all codes, specifications and standards issued by
the Indian Standards Institution and Indian Roads Congress, wherever mentioned, shall be fully
applicable to these specifications. Where standards are not yet published by the ISI or IRC,
adaptable British Standards or Specifications of the International Organization for standardization
shall apply.In case of any conflict in meaning between these specifications and those of ISI or
IRC, the provisions of these specifications shall prevail..

Base lines and bench marks

The Contractor shall establish and maintain, to the satisfaction of Engineer, the base lines and
bench marks, based on which the works are set out. Where such base lines and bench marks are
provided by the Engineer, the Contractor shall maintain these throughout the period of
construction without causing any disturbance to them.

Setting out

The Contractor shall set out all the works to be executed by him, in line with the standard base
lines, levels, position and bench marks and truly as per drawings within the accepted tolerance
limits at no extra cost to Owner. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for the setting out of
all the works, to be executed by him and the approval of such setting out by the Engineer shall in
no way absolve the Contractor his responsibility for carrying the work to the true lines, levels and
positions as per drawings.

Safety of existing work

Before taking up any construction adjoining other property or existing work, the Contractor shall
take all steps necessary for the safety and protection of such property or work.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 76

Protection of existing services/facilities

The Contractor shall take all precautions necessary to prevent damage to or interference with
underground or overground services such as cables, drains, piping or piles, whether shown on
drawings or not. Equipment etc., mounted in position shall be protected against falling debris etc.,
by means of tarpaulin or such other material.

Handing over of work site

On completion of work, the Contractor shall remove all rubbish, debris, surplus materials,
temporary work etc., from the site. The site shall be handed over in a tidy and workmanlike
manner.

EARTHWORK :

Site clearance and demolition

The site shall be cleared of all trees, stumps, roots, brush wood, bushes and other objectionable
materials. Useful and saleable material shall be the property of the Owner and shall be stacked
properly as directed by the Engineer. The areas to be covered with embankments shall be stripped
of top soil to required depths to expose acceptable founding strata. Top soil unsuitable for use in
embankment construction and other fills shall be disposed off as directed. All combustible
materials shall be stacked and burnt in locations sufficiently remote to eliminate all danger of fire
hazards. All old concrete,brick works and drains which interfere with construction works shall be
dismantled with the approval of the Engineer taking all necessary precautions prescribed in safety
specification. Top soil which is suitable for use in construction work shall be stockpiled for later
use. Other objectionable materials such as trash, debris, stones, brick, broken concrete, scrap
metal etc., shall be disposed off as directed by the Engineer. Payment for cutting and removal of
trees, stumps, dismantling existing structures and stripping shall be regulated by the description in
the Schedule of Items

SETTING OUT AND MAKING PROFILE :

Masonry pillars will be erected at suitable points. These bench mark shall be connected to
standard bench mark. In addition to these pillar center line pillars shall also be erected by the
Contractor and footing positions shall be marked with the help of these pillars. The necessary
profile shall be set out. The level shall be taken at an interval as directed by IEC.
The levels shall be recorded in field books and plotted on plan before starting the excavation.

EXCAVATION FOR FOUNDATION :

The cutting shall be done to minimum depths as per drawings and as advised by EIC. Any excess
excavation carried out by the Contractor without proper permission from EIC shall not be paid
and the excess depth shall made good by the Contractor by PCC 1:4:8 at Contractor s own cost.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 77

BACKFILLING :

In case water is encountered during the excavation for foundation, or flooring of pits due to any
other reasons the contractor shall arrange for dewatering the same at his own cost.

Dewatering

The Contractor shall carryout all the works, in dry and workable condition and maintain the same
in dry condition till the final handing over of works at no extra cost to the Owner. For this the
Contractor shall make all the necessary provisions of dewatering, wherever necessary, to the
entire satisfaction of the Engineer.

EXCAVATION IN HARD ROCK:

CUTTING

Where hard rock is met, generally excavation by chiseling and wedging shall be carried out.
Excavation by blasting shall be done only after obtaining written approval from Engineer-in-
Charge /Architects. In case of excavation by blasting all the provisions of explosive rules 1940
(Corrected upto date) shall be complied with storing, transportation and handling of explosive
materials. The blasting operation shall be carried out under the supervision of a responsible
authorised agent of the Contractor. Blasting work shall not be carried out within 200 meters of an
existing structure unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer-in-Charge /Architects.

MEASUREMENT

Where ordinary rock and hard rock is mixed, the measurement of the excavation shall be carried
out by stacking both the types of excavated rock separately. The net quantity of rock shall be
arrived at by applying reduction of 50% for looseness in stock. If the sum of net quantity of two
kinds of rock exceeds the total quantity of excavated material, then the quantity of each type rock
shall be in the ratio of net quantities in stack measurement of the two types of rocks.

SPECIFICATIONS FOR MOORRUM FILLING

QUALITY OF MOORRUM:

The moorrum shall be naturally occuring material formed by disintegration of rock. It shall be
free from vegetarian, rubbish or material of organic origin and scales deleterious to concrete and
reinforced concrete.

Pieces of hard rock which do not get crushed under the roller shall not exceed 50mm size.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 78

FILLING:

Filling shall be done in 20cm thick layers and every layer shall be power rolled with 8 /10 ton so
as to achieve maximum compaction and till such time that no further movement is observed
under the wheels of the roller.

After filling is completed the modified product density shall be 92% with OMC.

Before start of work Contractor shall supply the samples of murrum from each quarry to cover the
variations expected in the supply. The samples shall be tested for the following in a recognised
laboratory in with IS:2720 for the following.

Silt and clay content.

Moisture - content and dry density relationship at modified Proctor density.

Moisture control: Water shall be always sprayed and not poured. Ponding shall never be allowed.
In wet weather the work may have to be suspended. Care shall be taken to see that moisture is
uniformly spread throughout the layer and where necessary mixing with harrows and rakes shall
be done .

Measurements:

Measurements shall be of the cubic contents of the completed filling and shall be determined by
taking level of testing ground after final layer for each type of filling. All dimensions are for
compacted thickness.

BRICK MASONRY

SOAKING OF BRICKS:

Bricks required for masonry shall be thoroughly soaked in clean water for at least one hour.

LAYING:

Bricks shall be laid in English bond unless otherwies specified. Half or cut bricks shall not be
used except where necessary to complete the bond. Closure in such cases shall be cut to the
required size and used near the end of the wall.

The walls shall be taken up truly plump. All courses shall be laid truly horizontal and all vertical
joints shall be truly vertical. Vertical joints in alternate course shall come directly one over the
other. The thickness of the brick courses shall be kept uniform.

All hold fasts of doors, windows, etc. which are required to be built in walls shall be embedded in
cement mortar or in cement concrete as specified in their correct position as the work proceeds.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 79

JOINTS:

Bricks shall so laid that all joints are full of mortar. The thickness of joints shall not exceed one c.
for brickwork of any class designation. All face joints shall be raked to a minimum depth of
10mm by a raking tool during the progress of work where the mortar is still green so as to provide
proper key for the plaster or pointing to be done. Where plastering or pointing is not required to
be done the joints shall be struck flush and finished at the time of laying.

The face of brickwork shall be cleaned on the same day on which brickwork is laid.

Damaged or broken brick or brick bats shall not normally be used in brick work. Cut bricks may
be used to complete bond or as closures or around irregular openings.

Bricks shall not be thrown from heights to the ground, but shall be handled carefully and put
gently in position to avoid damaging their edges.

Selected bricks of regular shape and dimension shall be used for face work.

Making of grooves, sleeves and chases shall be done during the construction to the lines, levels
and position as shown in the drawing or as instructed by the Engineer Such sleeves shall slope
outward in external walls so that their surface cannot form channels for the easy passage of water
inside.

Fixtures, plugs, frames etc., if any, shall be built in at the right places to the lines & levels as
shown in the drawings while laying the course and not later by disturbing the brick work already
laid.

Brick walls of one brick thick or less shall have one selected face in true plane and walls more
than one brick thick shall have both the faces of wall in true plane.

All connected brick work shall be carried out simultaneously with uniform heights throughout the
work, and in exceptional cases, with the approval of the Engineer, the brick work built in any part
of the work may be lower than another adjoining wall/connected wall by a maximum of 60 cm
and the difference in height of adjoining wall/connecting wall shall be raked back according to
bond by stepping at an angle not steeper than 45 degree, without sacrificing the necessary bond,
horizontalness of layers, verticality of joints and the wall. Toothing shall not be allowed in brick
work, for raking back. The top layer just below the R.C.C slab or beam shall be laid with frogs
down over a layer of mortar on full width.

Openings in brick work

Openings shall be made in brick work, which may be of any shape, size, at all levels, heights or
depths, including round openings, as shown in the drawing or as directed by the Engineer,
maintaining the necessary bond using a minimum of cut bricks. Openings in external face walls,

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 80

the sills, jambs, soffit of opening may be rebated and the sill shall be sloped slightly for drainage
of rain water.

Architectural features

All projecting architectural features such as in plinth projections, string courses or cornices shall
be effectively bonded into the brick work to ensure stability. Such architectural features shall be
set straight and true with the finished joints. Where such features are not to be plastered over,
they shall be built with bricks of even size, good shape and quality, which have durability,
resistance to abrasion and moisture penetration.

Sun shades and such projecting features which depend on the weight of brick masonry over them
for stability, shall be kept supported till such time as the brick masonry above is built and
hardened sufficiently.

All exposed brick work shall be rubbed down, thoroughly washed, cleaned and pointed as
specified. Where face bricks of specific quality are used the same shall be rubbed with
carborundum stone.

Half-brick masonry

The work of half-brick work shall be done in the same manner as for brick work except that all
courses shall be laid in stretchers. Both faces shall be true to plane and the joints raked on both
faces. Where reinforcement is considered necessary or shown in drawing, MS bars shall be
provided as stipulated in the Schedule of Items. The reinforcement shall be cleaned of rust and
loose scale with a wire brush, and shall be laid straight on the mortar and lapped with the dowel
bars provided in the column, securely anchoring them at their ends where the half-brick wall
butts. The batching of mortar usually shall be in the proportion of 1:4 or as stipulated in the
Schedule of Items. Half of the mortar for the joints shall first be laid and the other half laid after
the reinforcement is laid in position, so that the reinforcement is fully embedded in position.

Brick on edge masonry

The work brick on edge masonry wall in superstructure shall be done in the same manner as
mentioned for brick work except that it shall always be reinforced with a mesh of 18 gauge
netting of approved variety and embedded in cement mortar at interval as specified in the
Schedule of Items. The wire netting shall be continuously laid and securely anchored with the
dowel bars provided & projecting from the walls/RCC structure or steel structures at their ends
where the 75 mm thick brick wall butts. The batching of mortar usually shall be in the proportion
of 1:3 or as stipulated in the Schedule of Items.

Protection of brick work

The brick wall shall be protected and covered with gunny bags or water proof sheets from the
effects of inclement weather, rain, frost, etc., during the construction and until the mortar sets.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 81

Care shall be taken during construction that the edges of jambs, sills and soffit of openings are not
damages.

Mortar

The mortar for the bricks work shall be as specified, and conform to accepted standards. Lime
shall not be used where reinforcement is provided in brick work.

CURING:

Brickwork shall be protected from rain by suitable covering when mortar is green. Masonry work
shall be kept constantly moist on all faces for a minimum period of seven days by spraying water.

Scaffolding

Necessary and suitable scaffolding shall be provided at all heights to facilitate the construction of
brick wall. Scaffolding shall be sound, strong and all supports and other members shall be
sufficiently strong and rigid, stiffened with necessary bracings and shall be firmly connected to
the walls securing them against swing or sway. Planks shall be laid over the scaffolding at
required levels. Scaffolding shall preferably be of tubular steel, although the Engineer may permit
other material, depending upon the circumstances.
Scaffolding shall be double, having two sets of vertical supports, particularly for the face wall and
all exposed brick work. Single scaffolding may be used for buildings upto two storeys high or at
other locations, if permitted by the Engineer. In such case the inner ends of horizontal members
shall rest in holes provided in header course only. Such holes shall not be allowed in pillars under
one meter in width, or immediately near the skew backs or arches. The holes thus left in masonry
shall be filled with bricks set in rich mortar and the surface made good on removal of scaffolding.

If for any reason the Contractor is required to erect scaffolding in property other than that
belonging to the Owner, including municipal corporation or local bodies, necessary permission
shall be obtained by the Contractor from the appropriate authorities and necessary licensing fees
shall have to be borne by him.
All scaffoldings once erected shall be allowed to remain in position, efficiently maintained
by the Contractor, till all the finishing works required to be done are completed and shall not be
removed without the approval of the Engineer.

The Contractor shall allow workmen of other trades to make reasonable use of the scaffolding
without any extra cost.

ANTI TERMITE TREATMENT:-

SCOPE

The scope of job is to form a chemically soil barrier to prevent growth of nests or colonies of the
sub terrianian termites.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 82

MATERIAL :

The following chemical (as specified) in water emulsion shall be used:

Chemicals Concentration (by weight)

Chloropyrifos 1. 0%

PRE-CONSTRUCTION CHEMICAL TREATMENT:

Hand operated pressure pumps shall be used for uniform spraying and proper check shall be
maintained to ensure that specified quantity of chemical is used for the required area.

TIME OF APPLICATION

Anti-termite treatment shall start in foundation trenches and pits before laying the leveling course
of PCC. The PCC shall be done only after the chemical emulsion has been observed by the soil
and surface is quite dry. Treatment should not be carried out when it is raining or the soil is wet.
The treated soil barriers shall not be disturbed after they are formed and if by chance, they are
disturbed, the same shall be made good before laying the PCC.

PROCEDURE:

Treatment of Column Pits, Wall Trenches and Basement Excavation:-

The bottom surface and sides (upto 300mm) shall be treated with chemical at the rate of 5 litres
/sq.m.

The portion of the column foundations and the retaining walls coming in contact with the backfill,
the structure shall be treated at the rate of 15 litres / sq.M of the vertical surface. If water is used
for ramming the earth fill then treatment shall be carried out after the ramming operation is
completed by rodding the earth at 150mm c/c close to the structure surface and spraying the
required quantity of chemical. For RCC framed structures using 1:2:4 or richer concrete the
treatment shall start from the depth of 500 mm below ground level and there is no need to start
from the bottom of excavation for columns and plinth beams. The earth from 500mm below the
ground level and above shall be treated as described in previous paragraph. However for RCC
frame structure, there shall be no chemical treatment for column foundations.

Treatment of top Surface of plinth filling:-

The top surface of filled earth within plinth walls shall be treated with chemical emulsion at the
rate of 5 liters / sq.M before the subgrade of floor is laid. Holes upto 50-70mm deep at 150mm
centers shall be made to facilitate saturation of the soil with chemical emulsion.

Treatment of junction of Wall and Floor :-

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 83

To achieve continuity of vertical chemical barrier on inner surfaces, small channels of 30x30mm
shall be made at all the junctions before laying the subgrade and rod holes shall be made upto
ground level at 150mm centres and chemical emulsion shall be poured at 15 litres / sq.m of the
vertical surface.

Treatment of soil along external perimeter of Buildings:-

After the building is complete, rod holes shall be made along external perimeter at 150 mm
centers and 300mm deep and these holes shall be filled with chemical emulsion at 5 liters
/running meter of perimeter.

RECORD OF CHEMICAL UESD :

A detail record of quantity of chemical used for each operation shall be kept at site duly approved
by Engineer-in-Charge /Architects.

GUARNTEE

The Contractor shall give a guarantee of 10 years for effective anti-termite treatment barrier.

MEASUREMENT :

The measurement shall be made in square metres on the basis of the plinth area of the building at
plinth level only for all operations described above. Nothing extra shall be measured.

PLAIN & REINFORCED CEMENT CONCRETE :

SCOPE :

This specification covers the general requirements for concrete to be used on jobs using on-site
production facilities including requirements in regard to the quality, handling, storage of
ingredients, proportioning, batching, mixing and testing of concrete and also requirements. This
also covers the transportation of concrete from the mixer to the place of final deposit and the
placing, curing, protecting, repairing and finishing of concrete.

APPLICABLE CODES AND SPECIFICATIONS :

The following specifications, standards and codes are made a part of these specifications. All
standards, tentative specifications, specifications, codes of practice referred to herein shall be the
latest editions including all applicable official amendments and revisions.

In case of discrepancy between this specification and those referred to herein, this specification
shall govern.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 84

APPLICABLES IS SPECIFICATIONS AND CODES OF PRACTICE :

IS: 269 :- Specification for ordinary, rapid hardening and low heat portland cement.

IS:8112:- Specification for high strength ordinary, portland cement.

IS:1489:- Specification for portland pozzolona cement.

IS:383:- Specification for coarse and find aggregate from natural source for concrete.

IS:2386:- Method of test for aggregates for concrete. ( part I to VIII)

IS:516:- Method of test for strength of concrete.

IS:1199:- Method of sampling and analysis of concrete.

IS:3025:- Method of sampling and test (physical and chemical ) water used in industry.

IS:432:- Specification for mild steel and medium tensile steel (parts I& II) bars and hard
drawn steel wire for concrete reinforcement.

IS:1139:- Specification for hot rolled mild steel and medium tensile steel deformed bars for
concrete reinforcement.

IS:1566:- Specification for plain hard drawn steel wire fabric (part II) for concrete
reinforcement.

IS:1786:- Specification for cold twisted steel bars for concrete reinforcement.

IS:2645:- Specification for integral cement waterproofing compound.

IS:456:- Code of practice for plain and reinforced concrete.

IS:3370:- Code of practice for concrete structures for storage of liquids (parts 1 to 1V).

IS:2502:- Code of practice for bending and fixing of bars for concrete reinforcement.

IS:2571:- Code of practice for laying in situ cement concrete flooring.

IS:3596:- Safety code for scaffolds and ladders. (part- I& II)

IS:1200:- Method of measurement of building works.

In the event that state, city or other Government bodies have requirements, more stringent than
those set forth in this specification, such reinforcements shall be considered part of this
Specification and shall supersede this specification where applicable.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 85

The quality of materials, method and control of manufacturing and transportation of all concrete
works irrespective of the mix. Whether reinforced or otherwise, shall conform to the applicable
portion of this specification.

Engineer shall have the right to inspect the source/s of material/s, the layout of operations of
procurement and storage of materials, the concrete batching and mixing equipment and quality
control system. Such an inspection shall be arranged and approval of Engineer-in-Charge shall be
obtained prior to starling of concrete work.

Concrete shall be mixed by mechanical mixer only and no hand mixing shall be allowed for RCC
works.

GENERAL :

The quality of materials and method and control of manufacture and transportation of all concrete
work irrespective of mix, whether reinforced or otherwise, shall conform to the applicable
portions of this specification.

Engineer shall have the right to inspect the source/s of materials/s, the layout and operation of
procurement and storage of materials, the concrete batching and mixing equipment, and the
quality control system. Such an inspection shall be arranged and Engineer s approval obtained,
prior to starting of concrete work.

MATERIALS FOR STANDARD CONCRETE :

The ingredients to be used in the manufacture of standard concrete shall consist solely of a
standard type portland cement, clean sand, natural coarse aggregate, clean water and admixture, if
specifically called for on drawings or specifications.

CEMENT

The use of bulk cement will be permitted only with the approval of Engineer. Changing of brands
or type of cement within the same structural will not be permitted.

Contractor will have to make his own arrangement for the storage of adequate quantity of cement.
If supplies are arranged by owner, cement will be issued in quantities to cover work requirements
of one month or less. As deemed fit by the engineer and it will be the responsibility of Contractor
to ensure adequate and proper storage. Cement bags shall be stored in a dry enclosed shed
(storage under tarpaulin will not be permitted), well away from the outer walls and insulated from
the floor to avoid contact with moisture from ground and so arranged as to provide ready access.
Damaged or reclaimed or party set cement will not be permitted to be used and shall be removed
from the site. Not more than 12 bags shall be stacked in any tier. The storage arrangement shall
be approved by engineer. Consignment of cement shall be stored as received and shall be
consumed in the order of their receipt at site.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 86

Cement held in storage for a period of Ninety (90) days or longer shall be tested. Should at any
time Engineer have reasons to consider that any cement is defective, then irrespective of its
origin, date of manufacture and/ or manufacturer s test certificate, such cement shall be tested
immediately at Contractor s cost at a national Test such tests are found satisfactory, it shall not be
used in any work. Contractor shall not be entitled to any claim of any nature on this account.

Volumetric Mix Concrete

Where concrete is specified in volumetric proportions such as 1:4:8, 1:3:6, 1:2:4, 1:11/2:3, 1:1:2
etc., in the schedule of items, coarse and fine aggregates shall be measured by volume and cement
by weight. The water cement ratio shall be within 0.45 to 0.70 depending upon the workability

CONSISTENCY:

The consistency of the Concrete shall be such that it flows sluggish into the forms and around the
reinforcement without any segregation coarse aggregate from mortar. The slump tests are
mandatory and shall be carried out at regular intervals so that the consistency concrete can be
monitored.

Workability

The workability of fresh concrete shall be such that the concrete is just suitable for the conditions
of handling & placing so that after compaction if becomes completely consistent and
homogeneously surrounds all the reinforcement and completely fills the formwork.

The workability of fresh concrete at the place of batching/mixing shall be measured by

compacting factor test and at the place of disposition by means of slump test. During the
finalization of Trial Mixes, the relationship between compacting factor and slump test shall be
established for each grade of concrete as well as for various levels of workability.Normally, in the
condition of low water cement ratio as well as for medium/high workability, the workability shall
be achieved by increasing the cement content.

In cases where the cement content is to be limited to reduce the heat of hydration, and the
water/cement ratio is also to be kept low to reduce the permeability or due to other requirements
the desired workability may be achieved with use of limited doses of platiciser or air entraining
agent. In such cases the method of mixing and dosage of the plasticiser/air entraining agent shall
be according to the manufacturer's specification and with the approval of the Engineer.

Durability

The durability of concrete, depending on the exposure condition, is to be taken into account while
designing the mix. For given aggregates, the cement content should be sufficient to make
sufficiently low water cement ratio and Appendix A of IS: 456 shall be taken as guideline for
durability considerations

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 87

Mixing & Transportation of concrete

Mixing of Concrete

Machine mixing

Concrete shall always be mixed in mechanical mixer. Water shall not, normally, be charged into
the drum of the mixer until all other ingredients are already in the drum and mixed for atleast one
minute. Mixing shall be continued until there is uniform distribution of materials and the mass is
uniform in colour and consistency. The mixing time from the time of adding water shall in
accordance with IS: 1791 but in no case less than 2 minutes or atleast 40 revolutions.

Hand mixing

When hand mixing is permitted by the Engineer it shall be carried out on a water tight platform
and care shall be taken to ensure that mixing is continued until the mass is uniform in colour and
consistency. In case of hand mixing 10% extra cement shall be added to each batch at no extra
cost to the Owner.

Transportation of concrete

Concrete shall be transported from the place of mixing to the place of placing concrete as rapidly
as practicable by means which will prevent the segregation or loss of any of the ingredients and
maintain the required workability. No water shall be mixed with the concrete after it has left the
mixer.
Where concrete is transported over long distances, the Contractor shall provide suitable means by
which different grades of concrete are readily indentifiable at the place of final deposit.

Placing and Compaction of Concrete

The concrete shall be placed and compacted before setting commences and should not be
subsequently disturbed. No water shall be mixed with the concrete after it has left the mixer.
Method of placing should be such as to preclude segregation. Approved mechanical vibrator shall
be used for compacting concrete, and concrete shall not be non-vibrated or under vibrated. No
concrete shall be placed until the place of deposit has been thoroughly inspected and approved by
the Engineer. all inserts and embedments properly secured in position and checked and forms
properly oiled. No concrete shall be placed in the absence of the Engineer.

Concrete shall be placed on clean bed having the designed level. The bed shall be cleaned of all
debris and other objectionable materials. Seepage water, if any, shall be controlled or diverted.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 88

Concreting shall not be carried on during rains unless all precautions have been taken by the
Contractor and necessary permission has been given by the Engineer. Suitable measures shall be
taken to control the temperature of concrete.
Where plums are permitted is massive concrete, they shall be washed and carefully placed. No
stone shall be closer than 30 cm to an exposed face, nor nearer than 15 cm to an adjacent stone.
Concrete shall not be dropped from a height of more than 2m except through a chute,the design
and type of which shall be subject to approval of the Engineer.
The concrete shall be placed, spread and compacted by approved mechanical vibrator.Vibrators
shall not be used for pushing concrete to adjoining areas.
For members involving vertical placing of concrete (e.g. columns, walls etc.,), each lift shall be
deposited in horizontal layer extending for the full width between shuttering and of such depth
that each layer can be easily and effectively vibrated and incorporated with the layer below by
means of compaction being employed
For members involving horizontal placing of concrete (e.g. slabs, beams etc.,) theconcrete shall
be placed along the line of starting point in such quantities as will allow members to be cast to
their full depth along the full width between side shuttering and then gradually brought towards
the finishing point along its entire front parallel to the starting line. Vibration and surface finish
shall follow behind the placement as closely as possible.
Utmost care shall be taken to avoid the displacement of reinforcements/embedded parts or
movement of formwork or damage to faces of the form work or transmission of any harmful
vibration/shocks to the concrete which has not yet hardened sufficiently.
All members shall be concreted at such a rate that no cold joint is formed and fresh concrete is
placed always against green concrete which is still plastic and workable.
Should any unforeseen occurrence result in a stoppage of concreting for one hour or such other
time as might allow the concrete, already placed, to begin to set before the next batches can be
placed, the Contractor shall make at his own cost, suitable tongue,and groove construction joint,
as approved by the Engineer. Any additional reinforcement required as directed by the Engineer
shall also be provided by the Contractor at his own cost. Before placement of new batches of
concrete over that construction joint, the surface preparation according to this specification
stipulated earlier, shall be done by the Contractor.
The concrete shall be worked well up against whatever surface it adjoins and compacted to such a
degree that it reaches its maximum density as a homogeneous mass, free from air and water holes
and penetrates to all corners of moulds and shuttering and completely surrounds the
reinforcement. All measures shall be taken to make the shape, size, and location of the finished
concrete including its embedments, holes, openings etc., well within the accepted tolerance limit

Finishes to Exposed Surfaces of Concrete

The Contractor is to include his quoted rate for concrete, the provision of normal finishes in both
formed & unformed surfaces as and where required by the Engineer without any extra cost to the
owner. Some common finishes are indicated below

Surface which do not require plastering

Surface in contact with casings shall be brought to a fair and even surface by working the
concrete smooth against casings with a steel trowel while it is being deposited and also by

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 89

working over the surface with a trowel immediately after the removal of the casings or centerings,
removing any irregularities and stopping air holes, etc. Use of mortar plaster is not permissible
for correcting levels, removing unevenness etc. However, if, in the opinion of the Engineer, such
plastering is unavoidable then the thickness of plaster shall in no case exceeds 5 mm and the
plastering shall be in cement mortar.(1:3).

Faces of foundations which will be back filled

Neither the smoothness of the surface not the positions of the joints in the form work are
important. Small blemishes caused by entrapped air are permitted. No special surface finish is
required.

Exposed surfaces which need plastering

Surfaces of beams/columns flushing with the block work or other structures where is intended to
plaster, shall be hacked adequately as soon as the shuttering is stripped off so that proper bond
with the plaster can develop.

Surface for non-integral finish

Where a non-integral finish such as floor finish is specified or required, the surface of the
concrete shall be struck off at the specified levels shall be finished and finished rough.

For monolithic finish

Where no more finishing course is to be applied as in the case of basement floor, industrial
flooring or the screed concrete flooring etc, the concrete shall be completed and struck off at the
specified levels and slopes with a screed, board and then floated with a wooden float. Steel
trowelling is then started after the concrete has hardened enough to prevent the excess of fines
and water to rise to the surface but not hard enough to prevent proper finishing. Trowelling shall
be such that the surface is flat,smooth and neatly finished.

Cold weather concreting

When conditions are such that the ambient temperature may be expected to be 4.5 C degree or
below during the placing and curing period, the work shall conform to IS: 7861 (Part-II).

Hot weather concreting

When concreting in very hot weather the Contractor shall take all precautions as stipulated in IS:
7861 (Part-I) and stagger the work to cooler parts of the day to ensure that the temperature of wet
concrete used, specially in massive structure, does not exceed 38 degree 'C'.Positive temperature
control by methods like pre-cooling, post cooling or cooling of
concrete by circulating cold water through small embedded pipe lines inside concrete, if required,
shall be specified and shall be undertaken.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 90

Curing of Concrete

General

The purpose of curing is either to provide sufficient water at optimum temperature or to prevent
loss of moisture from the concrete itself so that the cement inside the concrete is sufficiently
hydrated which of course in slow and prolonged process. As soon as the concrete has hardened
sufficiently the curing shall be started

Any one of the following may be used for curing as approved by the Engineer.

(a) Curing by direct water.

(b) Curing by covering the concrete with absorbent material and kept damp.
(c) Covering the concrete with an impervious sheet.
(d) Curing by providing protective membrane.

Curing by direct water

This is done either by ponding or spraying water.

(a) Ponding
Ponding is widely used for curing slab and pavements. Earth bunds are formed over the slabs and
water is pumped or poured into them and the same is replenished at interval to make up for the
loss of evaporation. As this type of curing is one of the best methods, 10 days of curing after final
setting is sufficient.
(b) By spraying water
Curing is done by spraying water by suitable means at approved time intervals.While spraying it
shall be ensured that the complete area is covered. In order to avoid cracking, cold water shall not
be applied to massive members immediately after striking the form work, while the concrete is
still warm. Alternate wetting and over drying shall be avoided. Curing by spraying water shall be
continued at least for 18 days.
Curing of concrete with absorbent material kept damp
The entire concrete surface is covered either with hessian, burlap, sawdust, sand,canvas or similar
material and kept wet continuously for atleast 12 days after finalsetting.
Curing by covering concrete surface with an impervious sheet
This is achieved by covering the entire concrete surface with water proof paper or plastic sheets
specially manufactured for this purpose. The waterproof papers are stuck together by adhesive
compound and the plastic sheets can be welded at site. Such type of covering shall be kept at least
for 24 days after the final setting. It is preferable to have sheet as white in appearance since the
white colour will reflect hot sunrays and keep the concrete temperature at reasonable level.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 91

Ready mix Conctrete(RMC)

The following parameters shall be adopted for mix design in moderate exposure.

1. Nominal Maximum size of aggregate : 20mm angular as Per HPCL specification

2. Degree Of quality control : Good
3. Type of Exposure :Moderate
4. Maximum water cement/ratio : 0.50
5. Type of cement to be used : OPC 53 grade
6. Sand : Coarse Sand as per HPCL specification
7 Use Of Fly Ash in RMC : Strictly not permitted.

The rate for the item of Ready Mixed Concrete shall be inclusive of all the ingredients including
admixtures if required, labour, machine Transportation&Placeement( T&P) etc ( incl. shuttering )
required for design mix concrete of required strength and workability.
The rate quoted by the vendor shall be net & nothing extra shall be payable in account of change
in quantities of concrete ingredients like cement and aggregates and admixtures etc. in the
approved mix design.
The contractor shall engage Ready Mix Concrete (RMC) producing plants (Distance of plant
from site to be approved by Engineer in Charge) supplying Concrete to supply RMC for the
work. The RMC plant proposed to be engaged by the contractor shall fulfil the following
requirements.
i) It shall be fully computerised.
II) It should have supplied RMC for Govt. projects of similar magnitude.
iii) It should have facility for providing printed advice showing ingredients of concrete carried by
each mixer.

The Engineer reserves the right to exercise over the:-

i) Ingredients, water and admixtures purchased, stored and to be used in the concrete including
conducting of tests for checking quality of materials recordings of test results and declaring the
material fit or unfit for use in production of mix.
ii) Calibration check of the RMC.
iii) Weight and quality check on the ingredient, water and admixture added for batch mixing.
iv) Time of mixing of concrete.
v) Testing of fresh concrete, recordings of results and declaring the mix fit or unfit for use. This
will include continuous control on the workability during production and taking corrective
action.For exercising such control, the Engineer shall periodically depute his authorized
representative at the RMC plant. It shall be the responsibility of the contractor to ensure that the
necessary equipment manpower & facilities are made available to Engineer and/or his authorized
representative at RMC plant
Ingredients, admixtures & water declared unfit for use in production of mix shall not be used. A
batch mix found unfit for use shall not be loaded into the truck for transportation.
All required relevant records of RMC shall be made available to the Engineer or his authorized
representative. Engineer shall, as required, specify guidelines & additional procedures for quality

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 92

control & other parameters in respect of materials, production and transportation of concrete mix
which shall be binding on the contractor & the RMC plant.
53 grade OPC of approved brand/make/source approved by Engineer shall only be used for
production of concrete.
It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that the RMC producer provides all
necessary testing equipment and takes all necessary measures to ensure Quality control of ready -
mixed concrete. In general the required measures shall be:-
i) CONTROL OF PURCHASED MATERIAL QUALITY
RMC producer shall ensure that the materials purchased and used in the production of concrete
conform to the stipulation of the relevant agreed standards with the material Supplier and the

by visual checks, sampling and testing, certification from materials suppliers and information
/data from material supplier. Necessary equipment for the testing of all material shall be provided
and maintained in calibration condition at the plant by the RMC producer.
ii) CONTROL OF MATERIAL STORAGE
Adequate and effective storage arrangement shall be provided by RMC producer at RMC plant
for prevention of contamination, reliable transfer and feed system, drainage of
aggregates,prevention of freeing or excessive solar heating of Aggregate etc,
iii) RECORD OF MIX DESIGN AND MIX DESIGN MODIFICATION
RMC producer shall ensure that record of mix design and mix design modification is available in
his computer at RMC plant for inspection of Engineer or his representative at any time.
iv) COMPUTER PRINT OUTS OF EACH TRUCK LOAD
Each truckload / transit mixer dispatched to site shall carry computer printout of the ingredients
of the concrete it is carrying. The printout shall be produced to Engineer or his representative at
site before RMC issued in work.
v) TRANSFER AND WEIGHING EOUIPMENT RMC
Producer shall ensure that a documented calibration is in place. On demand,Proper calibration
records shall be made available indicating date of next calibration due, corrective action taken etc.
RMC producer shall ensure additional calibration checks whenever required by the Engineer in
writing to contractor. RMC producer shall also maintain a daily production record including
details of mixes
production including water and admixtures.The accuracy of measuring equipment shall be within
+2% of quantity of cement +/- 3% of quantity of aggregate, admixture and water being measured.
vi) MAINTENANCE OF PLANT, TRUCK MIXERS AND PUMPS
Plant, Truck Mixers and Pumps should be well maintained so that it does not hamper any
operation of production, transportation and placement.
vii) PRODUCTION OF CONCRETE
The following precautions shall be taken during the production of RMC at the plant
i) Weighing ( correct reading of batch data and accurate weighing) :- For each load,
written,printed or graphical records shall be made of the weights of the materials batched, the
estimated slump, the total amount of water added to load the delivery tickets number for that load
and the time of loading the concrete into the truck.
ii) Visual observation of concrete during production and delivery or during sampling and testing
of fresh concrete assessment of uniformity, cohesion, workability adjustment to water content.
The workability of the concrete shall be controlled on a continuous basis during production. The

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 93

batch mix found unfit shall not be loaded into the truck for transportation. Necessary corrective
action shall be taken in the production of mix as required for further batches.
iii) Use of adequate equipment at the plant to measure surface moisture content of
aggregates,particularly fine aggregates or the workability of the concrete, cube tests etc. shall also
be ensured.
iv) Making corresponding adjustment at the plant automatically or manually to batched quantities
to allow for observed, measured or reported changes in materials or concrete qualities.
v) Sampling of concrete, testing monitoring of results.
vi) Diagnosis and correction of faults identified from observations /complaints.

The RMC plant produced concrete shall be accepted by Engineer at site after receipt of the same
after fulfilling all the requirements of mix mentioned in the tender documents.The rate for the
Item of design mix cement concrete shall be inclusive of all the ingredients including admixtures
if required, labour, machinery T&P etc. required for a design mix concrete of required strength
and workability. The rate quoted by the agency shall be net & nothing extra shall be payable on
account of change in quantities of concrete, ingredients like cement and aggregates and
admixtures etc. as per the approved mix design.
Ready mix concrete shall be arranged in quantity as required at site of work. The ready mix
concrete shall be supplied as per the pre-agreed schedule approved by Engineer.
Frequency of sampling and standards of acceptance shall be as per HPCL specific ations.
i) No addition of water or other ingredients shall be permitted in the RMC at site or during transit.
ii) The RMC shall be placed by pump of suitable capacity end the contractor shall arrange
sufficient length of pipe at site to place the RMC in the minimum required time. The contractor
shall co-ordinate with RMC supplier and pumps hirer to have effective concrete placement.
iii) Pre-paid delivery tickets shall be produced with each truck load of RMC.
iv) The representative of RMC supplier shall attend the site meeting as and when decided by the
Engineer
iv) The contractor shall assess the quantity of RMC requirement at site well in advance and order
accordingly to the RMC supplier. In case excess RMC is received at site, HPCL shall not be
under any obligation to get extra quantities utilized and no payment for such RMC shall be made.
V) The contractor shall have to employ labour in shifts to ensure continuous casting of raft and
other RCC members. No extra payment on this account shall be made. .

INSPECTION AND RECTIFICATION OF DEFECTS :

Immediately on removal of forms, the RCC works shall be examined by the Engineer-in-Charge
/Architects before any defects are made good.

The work that has sagged or contains honey combing to an extent detrimental to the structural
safety or architectural concept shall be rejected.

Surface defects on a minor nature may be accepted and the same shall be rectified as follows:

a. Bulges due to movement of forms, ridges at forms, ridges at form joints shall be carefully chipped
and then rubbed with a grinding stone.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 94

b. Honeycombed and other defective areas must be chipped out, the edges being out as straight as
possible and perpendicular to the surface. Shallow patches are first treated with a coat of thin
grout (1 cement :1 sand) and then filled with mortar similar to that used in concrete. Large and
deep patches shall be filled up with concrete held in place by forms and shall be reinforced.

c. Holes left by bolts shall be filled carefully with mortar. Holes extending right through the
concrete shall be filled with mortar a pressure gun.

d. The same amount of care the material in patches should be taken as with the whole structure.

POST TREATMENT OF SURFACE :

The surface which has to receive plaster or where it has to be joined with brick masonry walls
shall be properly roughened immediately after the shuttering is removed.

Testing of Concrete
General
The Contractor shall carryout, entirely at his own cost, all sampling and testing in accordance
with the relevant I.S. standards and as supplemented herein. The Contractor shall get all tests
done in approved Laboratory and submit to the Engineer, the test result in triplicate within 3 days
after completion of the test.

Strength test of concrete

While placing concrete, the Contractor shall make 6 nos. of 15 cm test cubes from particular
batches of concrete as desired by the Engineer. The frequency of taking test cubes shall be either
according to clause 14.2 of IS: 456 or as directed by the Engineer.
The cubes shall be prepared, cured and tested according to IS: 516. Out of 6 nos. of test cubes 3
shall be tested for compressive strength at 7 days after casting and the remaining 3 at 28 days
after casting.
A register shall be maintained at site by the Contractor with the following details entered and
signed by both the Contractor and the Engineer. That register shall be considered as the property
of the Owner.

(a) Reference to the specific structural member

(b) Mark on cubes
(c) The grade of concrete
(d) The mix of concrete
(e) Date and time of casting
(f) Crushing strength at 7 days
(g) Crushing strength at 28 days
(h) Any other information directed by the Engineer.
ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA OF CONCRETE WORK :
The acceptance criteria of concrete on strength requirement shall be in accordance with the
stipulations under clause 15 of IS: 456.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 95

Minimum of six samples cubes shall be taken for all concreting work (periodicity as specified in
9.6 of section III) and three cubes shall be tested after 7 days curing and balance after 28 days
curing.

7 DAYS TEST:

The average strength of the three specimens shall be accepted as the compressive strength of the
concrete provided that the difference between maximum and minimum strength of the three cubes
does not exceed 15% of average strength

In case the 7 days strength is not satisfactory all further work structurally interlinked with the
concrete represented by the samples shall be stopped till the remaining three cubes are tested for
23 days strength and are found satisfactory.

28 Days Test :

The tests should generally be carried out on 28th day, but in no case, should be delayed beyond 35
days. The strength of the cubes shall be as specified in table above if they are tested on the 28th
day. In case, the cubes are tested after 28 days, the minimum acceptable compressive strength
shall be increased by 1.5 kg /cm2 for each day beyond 28 day.

The acceptance criteria of 28 days test shall be as follows:

a) if the average compressive strength of three cubes is more or equal to the comp. strength shown
in table above, the concrete shall be accepted at full rates.

b) If the average comp. strength of the three cubes is less than specified but not less than 75% of the
specified strength, the concrete shall be accepted at reduced rates at the discretion of EIC. The
reduced rate shall be calculated on proportionate basis, i.e. for every percent decrease in the
specified strength the rate shall be reduced by the same percentage.

c) If the average compressive strength of the three cubes is less than 75% of the specified strength,
etc shall either reject the defective portion or get it dismantled along with the structurally
connected work as considered necessary at the risk and cost of the Contractor . EIC may also
desire to carry out additional tests on the defective work and if on the basis of these additional
tests, EIC is satisfied about the structural adequacy of the concrete the concrete work may be
accepted at the reduced rate as specified in b)above except, for the reduced strength below 75%
for which the reduction shall be 1.5 times for every percent decrease below 75%.

Example: Average compressive strength is 70% of specified strength. The rate payable shall be
75-1 5(75-70) = 67.5% of tendered rate.

MEASUREMENT

All measurements shall be as per IS 1200

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 96

PLASTERING

General

Plastering shall be done in accordance with provisions of IS: 1661. Mix proportions of mortar for
plastering and thickness of plaster shall be as given either in the drawing, or as per Schedule of
Items or as directed by the Engineer. For special plaster work, necessary admixtures shall be
added to mortar in required proportion as per manufacturer's specifications or as specified herein

Preparation of surface

The surface to be plastered shall be cleaned of all extraneous matter and rubbish. In masonry the
joints shall be raked to a minimum depth of 12 mm and cleaned with wire brush. Concrete
surfaces to be plastered shall be roughened and hacked to form key for plastering. All plastered
surfaces shall be finished smooth with a wooden float in one plane and all internal angles shall be
finished slightly rounded. If desired by the Engineer, any unevenness shall be rubbed down by
carborundum stones. The surface to be plastered shall be wetted evenly before the application of
plastering. For one coat plastering the plaster shall be laid slightly thicker than the specified
thickness and the surface then levelled with flat wooden float to the required thickness. For two
coat plaster work, the first coat (usually half of total thickness) shall be applied as detailed above
except that the surface shall be left rough and keys formed for the application of second coat. The
second coat shall be laid on with a wooden float to the specified thickness and shall be applied a
day or two after the first coat has set, but has not dried up. Cement mortar for plastering work
shall be used within 30 minutes after adding water to cement and should be kept agitated at
intervals of 20 minutes. Unless otherwise specified cement punning shall be done over the
plastered surface by sprinkling neat cement powder evenly on the surface and rubbed smoothly
with a trowel to give a fine coating, at no extra cost. The plaster shall be kept wet for at least
seven days and protected from extremes of temperature and weather during this period.The
arrises of doors and windows shall have richer mortar 1:3 in a width of 75 mm on either side or as
required at respective location.

CEMENT PLASTER (SINGLE COAT)

APPLICATION :

Plastering shall be stared from the top and worked down towards the floor. All holes shall be
property filled in advanced of the plastering as the scaffolding is being taken down. To ensure
even thickness and a true surface, plaster of about 15x15cm shall be first applied horizontal and
vertically, at 3 meters intervals over the entire surface to serve as gauges. The surfaces of these
gauged areas shall be truly in the plane of the finished plaster surface. The mortar shall then be
laid on the wall, between the gauges with trowel. The mortar shall be applied in a uniform
manner slightly more than the specified thickness and brought to true surface by working a
wooden straight edge reaching across the gauges with small upward and sideways movements at
a time.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 97

All corners, arises, angles and junctions shall be truly vertical or horizontal as the case may be
and shall be carefully finished. Rounding or chamfering corners, arises, junctions, etc. where
required shall be done without any extra payment. Such rounding or chamfering shall be carried
out with proper templates to the sizes required.

Horizontal joints in plaster shall not occur on parapet tops and copings as these invariably lead to
leakages. Good quality lime neroo shall be applied to plastered surface with steel trowel to a
thickness slightly more than specified and rubbed down to give overall thickness of 12mm and
polished to a perfectly smooth and even finish working from top to bottom.

Curing shall be commenced as soon as the plaster has hardened sufficiently. This shall be done by
spraying water at regular intervals.

CEMENT PLASTER (TWO COAT WORK)

The plaster shall be applied in two coats as detailed below:

Apply 12mm thick coat of CM 1:4 mixed with CICO / ACCO Proof, water proofing compound
mixed as per manufacture s specifications as 1st cost leaving the surface rough.

When the plaster has been brought to true surface with a wooden straight edge the surface shall
be left rough with 2mm deep furrows shall be made with a scratching tool form key for the
finished coat. The surface shall be kept wet till the finishing coat is applied.

Apply 2nd coat of 8mm thick of CM 1:3 and finishing the surface by rubbing with sponge till
uniform texture is obtained.

The finishing coat shall be applied after the undercoat has sufficiently set but not dried and in any
case within 48 hours of laying the first coat.

Water Proofing

All waterproofing works to be carried out in this scope of work shall be through the following
approved agencies/ any other reputed approved local agency :-

For Cement Based Water Proofing :

( i) Indian water Proofing Company.

(ii) Leak proof Waterproofing Corporation of India.

(iii) Nina Industries.

(iv) Hindustan Waterproofing.

(v) Overseas Waterproofing.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 98

Contractor will be required to submit a guarantee in respect of performance of waterproofing for

10 years on stamp-paper. In addition to this, an amount equal to 10% of cost of waterproofing
items shall be retained as retained as retention money for 2 years from the date of completion,
which shall be returned only after successful completion of this period.

Cement Pointing
Where shown on drawing, Schedule of Items, or as directed by the Engineer, exposed brick faces
shall be cement rule pointed. The mortar shall be raked out of the joints to a depth of 12 mm. The
dust shall be brushed out of the joints and the wall well wetted. Unless otherwise specified the
pointing shall be made with cement and sand mixed in proportion 1:3 with water proofing
compound. The joints of the pointed work shall be neatly finished truly vertical and horizontal or
as directed and the lines shall be kept wet till the cementing material has set and become hard. If
required, the whole brick face shall be rubbed and polished with fine grade of carborundum
stones. Particular care shall be taken to see that no brick face or brick edge is damaged during this
work.

Flush Pointing

The mortar shall be pressed into the joints and shall be finished flush and levelled. The edges
shall be neatly trimmed with trowel and straight edges.

Ruled Pointing

The joint shall be initially formed as for flush pointing and then, while mortar is still green , a
groove of required shape and size shall be formed by running a forming tool straight along the
centre line of the joint till a smooth and hard surface is obtained. The vertical joints shall also be
finished in similar way. The pointing line shall be uniform in width and truly horizontal in case of
floors and ceilings.

CEMENT PAINTING

All outside exposed surface of masonary and concrete shall be painted with cement paint of
approved make and shade.

The surface shall be thoroughly cleaned & wetted with water just before the painting commence.

Cement paint shall be mixed with water as per the Specification of manufacturer. Cement paint
which can be used within an hour of its mixing shall be prepared.

FLOORING, PAVING & FACING

Scope
Flooring Paving and facing includes flooring, skirting and dado of various types encountered in
plants, buildings, pavements etc. as described under respective heads

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 99

General

Flooring, skirting & dado may have to be done in discontinuous strips or areas to suit the needs of
erection and commissioning of equipment. Flooring shall be done in close co-ordination with
erection of equipment or other services and shall keep pace with the demands in respect of
commissioning of individual equipment. No claims for extra shall be tenable for reasons of
discontinuity of work or delay in having areas available for work. Unless otherwise specifically
included in the Schedule of Quantities or stated in the description of work, no extra shall be
payable for works such as forming coves at internal angles, nosing at plinths, steps, window sills
and stair treads, dishing in bath rooms and toilet and cutting to line and fair finish to top edge of
skirting and dado. Thickness mentioned shall be the minimum.

Sub-base

Flooring at ground level having sub-base of sand or earth as specified shall be laid in layers of 15
cm, watered and consolidated by rolling with hand roller or ramming with iron rammer and with
butt ends of the crow bars. When filling reaches the required level, the surface shall be flooded
with water for 24 hours, allowed to dry and then rammed and consolidated to avoid any
settlement later. The thickness of the sub-base shall be as specified either in the drawing or in the
Schedule of Items.

Subgrade

The surface shall be brought to the desired level before subgrade is laid.

Hard core subgrade

Where hardcore subgrade is specified, stone/slag boulders/laterite boulders shall be laid closely
stacked together, the longer edge being laid vertically. All interstices shall be filled with smaller
particles of the same material or with gravel or red earth. The top surface shall be spread with
loose moorum sufficient to cover the gap and to achieve uniform top surface. The surface shall
then be adequately watered and rolled by roller. Hard core shall be laid to form the desired slope
in the finished floor.

Brick Khoa subgrade

Over burnt bricks shall be used for getting brick khoa as per sizes described in Schedule of Items.
The khoa shall be laid uniformly and rammed in dry and wet conditions so as to get a uniform
compact surface.

Concrete subgrade

The concrete subgrade shall be allowed to set for seven days and the flooring shall be laid in the
next three days.The flooring shall be commenced within 48 hours if the subgrade is of lean
cement concrete, failing this the surface of the subgrade shall be lightly brushed with steel
wire,wetted and smeared with a coat of cement slurry @ 2 kg/sqm. to get a good bond

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 100

between subgrade and flooring. The subgrade shall be provided with slope as specified.

Brick Flooring

Laying and finishing of brick flooring shall, in general conform to IS : 5766. Where dry brick
paving is specified the bricks shall be laid on their long edges on prepared subgrade or on
rammed earth formed to desired slope in floor. Bricks shall be laid with gaps of about 6 mm,
lightly tamped and brought to proper level and fall as indicated.The joints shall then be filled with
sand.Where bricks are specified to be laid in cement mortar, mortar mix shall be 1:6 (1cement : 6
sand) unless otherwise shown on the drawings/Schedule of Items. When lime mortar is specified,
mix proportions shall be 1:5 (1 lime : 5 surkhi) unless otherwise shown in drawings. Mechanical
mixing shall be employed for preparing mortar unless otherwise permitted by Engineer. Cement
mortar shall be consumed before initial setting has taken place. Bricks shall be sufficiently soaked
in water before use.Unless otherwise directed, the bricks shall be laid in herring-bone pattern with
their long axes at 45'C to the length of the paving.

MATERIALS :

Cement, sand, terrazo tiles shall conform to the Specification detailed in the Materials Section.

Mixing of mortar shall be done in accordance with the specification laid down under Cement
Mortars .

LAYING :

Subgrade concrete or the RCC slab on which tiles are to be laid shall be cleaned, wetted and
mopped. The bedding of the tiles shall be either with lime mortar 1:3 ( 1 lime putty : 3 sand ) or
cement mortar 1:3 or as specified. The average thickness of mortar shall be 30mm and thickness
at any place shall not be less than 10mm.

Lime mortar bedding shall be spread, tamped and corrected to proper levels and allowed to
harden for a day before the tiles are laid.

Over this bedding, neat grey cement slurry of honey like consistency shall be spread at the rate of
4.4 kg/sq.mt over such an area that would accommodate 20 tiles.

Before laying, the tiles shall be soaked in water for at least 20 minutes and then allowed to dry for
about 10 minutes. It is necessary to have tiles damp but not wet when they are laid. Tiles shall be
fixed by gently tapping with a wooden mallet till they are properly bedded and in level with the
adjoining tile. The joints shall be kept as thin as possible not exceeding 1.5mm. Where full-size
tiles cannot be fixed, tiles shall be cut to the required size and their edges rubbed to ensure a
straight and true joint. Tiles which are fixed in the floor adjoining the wall shall enter not less
than 12mm under the plaster, skirting or dado. After the tiles have been laid, excess cement
coming out through the joints upto the surface shall be immediately wiped clean.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 101

CURRING, POLISHING AND FINISHING :

They day after tiles are laid all joints shall be cleaned of the grey cement with a wire brush. The
joints shall after 24 hours be filled with matching cement paste and allowed to set. The same
cement slurry shall be applied to the entire surface of the tiles in a thin coat with a view to protect
the surface from abrasive damage and fill the pin holes that may exit on the surface.

The floor shall then be kept wet and protected for a minimum period of seven days before starting
the polishing. No one shall be allowed to walk on the floor during the first 24 hours immediately
after the tiles are laid.

The surface shall thereafter be grounded evenly with machine fitted coarse grade grit block.
Water shall be used profusely during grinding. It shall then be covered with a thin coat of cement
mixed with colouring pigment to match the topping of the wearing surface of the tile sand second
grinding shall then be carried out with machine fitted with fine grade grit blocks.

The final grinding with machine fitted with the finest grade grit blocks shall be carried out after
24 hours of completion of second grinding or before handling over the floor. The entire surface
shall be finally washed with weak solution of soft soap in warm water.

For small areas or where circumstances so require, hand polishing may be permitted as in the case
of skirting, treads and risers of staircase, etc. by the Engineer-in-Charge/ Architects.

MEASUREMENT:

Length and breadth dimensions shall be measured to the correct centimetre before laying skirting,
dado or wall plaster and area calculated in square metres correct to two decimal places. No
deduction shall be made nor extra amount paid for any opening in the floor area upto 0.5 sq.mt.
No extra shall be paid for use of cut tiles not for laying the tiles at different levels in the same
room.

TILES IN SKIRTING

PREPARATION OF SURFACE :

The joints of masonry shall be raked out to a depth of at least 15mm. in case of concrete and
plastered surfaces, the surface shall be roughened by hacking. All the surface receiving tiles shall
be cleaned thoroughly, washed with water and kept wet before the tiling is commenced.

LAYING:

12 mm thick plaster of CM 1:3 or mixed as specified shall be applied and allowed to harden. The
plaster shall be roughened with wire brushes making grooves of at least 2mm deep before the
plaster dries. The tiles shall be soaked in water. The tiles shall be buttered with a coal of grey
cement slurry and then shall stamped in position corrected to proper planes and lines with a
wooden mallet. The tiles shall be set in required pattern and butt jointed with very fine joints. Top

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 102

of skirting or dado shall be truly vertical unless specified otherwise. The skirting or dado shall
rest on the top of flooring. The projection of skirting from the finished wall surface shall not be
more than 12mm.

POINTING AND FINISHING

Joints shall be cleaned off grey cement grout with wire brush or travel to the depth of 2 to 3mm
and all dust and loose mortar removed. Joints shall then be flush pointed with while cement added
with colouring pigment if required to match the colour of the tiles. The wall shall be kept wet at
least for seven days. The finished wall shall not sound hollow when tapped with a wooden mallet.

MEASUREMENTS:

Length shall be measured correct to a cm. Height shall be measured correct to a cm in case of
dado and 5mm in case of riser and skirting. The area shall be calculated in square metres correct
to two decimal places. Length and height shall be measured along the finished face of the skirting
or dado including curves where specials such as coves, internal and external angles and beads are
us e d.

SHAHABAD/KATNI/TANDUR/KOTA STONE SLAB WORK

MATERIALS
The slabs shall be of approved selected quality, hard, sound, dense and homogenous in texture,
free from cracks, decay, weathering and flaws.

The percentage of water absorption shall not exceed 5 percent as per test conducted in accordance
with IS:1124.
The slabs shall be hand or machine cut to the required thickness.Tolerance in thickness for
dimensions of tile more than 100 mm shall be ±5mm. This shall be + 2mm on dimensions less
than 100mm.
Slabs shall be supplied to the specified size with machine cut edges or fine chisel dressed to the
full depth. All angles and edges of the slabs shall be true and square, free from any chipping
giving a plane surface.Slabs shall have the top surface machine polished (first grinding) before
being brought to site. The slabs shall be washed clean before laying.

WORKMANSHIP
The type, size, thickness and colour/shade etc. of the slabs for flooring/dado/ skirting shall be as
specified in the respective items of the work.
Preparation of the concrete base, laying and curing shall be as per specifications above The
thickness of the slabs for dado/skirting work shall not be more than 25mm. Slabs shall be so
placed that the back surface is at a distance of 12mm. If necessary,slabs shall be held in position
temporarily by suitable method. After checking for verticality, the gap shall be filled and packed
with cement sand mortar of proportion 1:3. After the mortar has acquired sufficient strength, the
temporary arrangement holding the slab shall be removed.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 103

Grinding and polishing shall be as specified except that first grinding with coarse grade
carborundum shall not be done and cement slurry with or without pigment shall not applied
before polishing.

Doors, Windows and Ventilators

Dimensions of the various components of doors, windows and ventilators shall be in accordance
with IS : 1003, or as shown on the drawings.

Flush Door Shutters

Unless otherwise specified, flush door shutters shall be not less than 4 cm thick, with a
solid/cellular core, a teak wood frame, and faced with approved quality of plywood on both faces.
The core and stock shall be made from well seasoned approved timber and treated with approved
preservatives. The plywood faces shall be glued on to the solid/cellular core with waterproof glue
under pressure. The construction of flush doors shall be such that no difficulty should arise in
fixing mortice locks, hydraulic door closers etc. The shutters shall be rebated in the case of the
double leaf doors.

Hardware Fittings for Doors, Windows & Ventilators

All mortice or rim locks, latches, cabinet and wardrobe locks, hydraulic door closers,floor springs
etc. shall be of Godrej, Everite make or of similar approved make. The rate shall include for all
necessary screws, other adjuncts, fixing in position and is for the completed work. The finish
shall be as specified in the schedule of quantities. Door ,window and ventilator fittings shall be as
per specifications already described. The rates for doors, windows and ventilator shutters shall
include the cost of fixing the fittings, with the necessary screws to the shutters and the frame. The
cost of fittings only shall be paid separately. Where specified in the schedule of quantities, the
cost of fittings shall be included in the rates for doors , windows and ventilator shutters. In such
case the contractor shall supply and fix the various fittings strictly to the standard laid down in the
schedule of hardware fittings and no separate payment for this shall be made.

Inspection
The Contractor shall provide all facilities to the Engineer for the inspection of the goods at his
premises. No primer shall be applied to wood work until it has been inspected and passed by the
Engineer. The Engineer shall have the option of rejecting any article or asking for replacement of
any article found to be defective or not complying with the requirements of this specification and
the relevant Indian Standards.

Aluminium Windows

Alimunium windows and ventilators shall conform to IS:1948-1961 or equivalent as approved by

the Engineer. The fixtures like handles, stoppers, stays, etc., shall also be anodized aluminium
and shall be of approved make. Glazing shall be 6 mm thick plain glass or as given in BOQ and
shall be fixed with glazing clips and metal putty. It shall conform to IS:1081-1960. Average

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 104

anodizing coating to windows ventilation and fixtures shall not be less than 25 microns as per
IS:1868-1982.
All work shall be fitted and shop assembled to a first job, and ready for erection. Shop joins shall
be made to hair lines and then welded or braced by such method as will produce a uniform colour
througout the work. Wherever possible, joints shall be made in concealed locations and on edges
of doors. Field connections of all work may be made with concealed screws or other approved
type of fasteners. Glazing beads shall be shap fit type without visible screws and shall be of sizes
to accommodate glazing. All work shall be adequately braced and reinforced as necessary for
strength and rigidity.

PVC DOORS
MATERIALS
The door frame and shutters shall be made from UV-stabilised PVC extruded sections of
SINTEX or equivalent, cut to correct lengths, mitred and welded at the corners to a true right
angle The door frame shall have overall dimensions 53 mm x 60 mm having multichamber cross
section with a minimum wall thickness of 2.8 mm duly reinforced with steel. It shall be mitre cut
at the corners and welded. A tie rod at bottom shall be provided.13.1.3 The PVC flush type door
shutter shall be one piece door having overall
dimensions of 25 mm x 750 mm. Top and Bottom of the door will beconcealed with PVC
extruded capping section having 1 mm thickness.Proper reinforcement of Aluminium or
polymeric material shall be provided on both vertical sides.
The PVC Panel section type door shutter shall have overall dimensions 25 mm x 305 mm joined
together with tongue and groove arrangement.Panels shall be provided with supporting ribs at a
distance not more than 40 mm. Average wall thickness of panels shall be 1 mm. The shutter
frame shall be PVC extruded sections having overall dimensions 29 mm x 59 mm and lockrail
shall be PVC extruded sections of overall dimensions 29 mm x 100 mm.

The physical properties shall be as listed below:

Physical Properties Test method Value Unit : Density DIN 53479 1.40 gm/cc
Tensile Strength: DIN 53455 1) 480 Kp/sqcm
Limiting Bending Stress : DIN 53452 770 Kp/sqcm
Bending E-modulus : DIN 53457 27300 Kp/sqcm
Notch Impact Strength at 23oC: DIN 53453 25.0 Kp.cm/sq.cm
Dimensional Stability under heat as per Martins : DIN 53458 60/61 per oC
Thermal conductivity at 20oC : DIN 52613 0.155 kcal/m.h.deg

The colour shall be as approved from HPCL.

WORKMANSHIP

Tolerance in overall dimensions shall be within + 0.3 mm. The frames and shutters shall be free
from warp or buckle and shall be square and truly plane. Punching of holes, slots and other
provisions to install fittings or fixtures later shall be made at the correct locations, as per the
requirements.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 105

All PVC doors shall be as described in the item of work and/or HPCL instructions/ directive or
drawings which indicates generally the arrangement along with the overall size of the various
components.

In general, masonry opening size shall be 10 mm more than the finished size of the door unit. The
door frame shall be fixed in wall opening either by dowels or by expandable fasteners. The
expandable fasteners consists of shank, sleeve, wedge and nut. The matching hole shall be made
from the outer frame to the wall. The fasteners shall be put in the hole and tightened and upon
tightening the screw the bottom leaves expand and provides the firm grip in the wall. After
alignment and fixing of the door unit the gap shall be filled in with polymeric sealant.

MEASUREMENT
Measurement shall be in sq.m correct to two places of decimal.Measurement shall be from out to
out of the frames. Rate shall be for the works including providing and fixing with all necessary
fittings and fixtures as specifically described in the respective items of work alongwith sealing the
gaps.

WHITE WASHING, COLOUR WASHING AND PAINTING

Scope

This chapter deals with white washing, colour washing, distempering, cement washing,emulsion
painting, silicate painting etc., to concrete and masonry surfaces and painting to the wood works
and steel works.

White Washing, Colour Washing

General

Wherever scaffolding is required/necessary, it shall be erected on double support tied together by

horizontal pieces, over which the scaffolding planks shall be fixed. No part of it shall rest on or
touch the surface which is being washed. Where ladders are used,pieces of old gunny bags shall
be tied on their tops to avoid damage or scratches to walls. For white washing the ceiling, proper
stage scaffolding shall be erected. The surface on which wash is to be applied shall be thoroughly
brushed free from mortar droppings and foreign matter.

White wash

The wash shall be prepared from fresh stone white lime of approved quality and shall be
thoroughly slaked on the spot mixed and stirred with sufficient water to make a thin cream. This
shall be allowed to stand for 24 hours and then shall be screened through a clean course cloth. 4
Kg of gum dissolved in hot water shall be added to each cubic meter of the cream.The
approximate quantity of water to be added in making the cream will be 5 litres of water to 1 kg of
lime. Indigo upto 3 gm per kg of lime dissolved in water shall then be added and wash stirred

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 106

well. Water shall then be added at the rate of about 6 litres per kg of lime to produce a milky
solution. The white wash shall be applied with approved brushes to the specified number of coats.
The operation for each coat shall consist of stroke of brush given from the top downwards,
another from the bottom upwards over the first stroke and similarly one stroke horizontally from
the right and another from the left before it dries.Each coat shall be allowed to dry before the
next-one is applied and shall subjected to inspection and approval by the Engineer. No portion of
the surface shall be left out initially to be patched up later on.The finished dry surface shall not
show any signs of cracking and peeling nor shall it come off readily on the hand when rubbed.
Doors, windows, floors and such other parts of the building not to be white washed shall be
protected from being splashed upon.

Colour wash

A priming coat of white wash with lime shall be applied before applying two or more coats of the
colour wash (as specified). Entire surface should represent a smooth and uniform finish. Sample
of colour wash shall be duly approved by the Engineer before application. Same specification as
that of white wash shall be followed for colour wash also using necessary amount of colouring
ingredient of approved tint.

White washing with whiting

Whiting (ground white chalk) shall be dissolved in sufficient quantity of hard water and
thoroughly stirred to form a thin slurry which shall then be screened through a clean coarse cloth.
2 Kg of gum and 0.4 kg of copper sulphate dissolved separately in hot water shall be added for
every cum. of slurry which shall then be diluted with water to the consistency of milk so as to
make wash ready for use. Other specification remains same as per white washing with lime.

Cement primer coat

The surface shall be thoroughly cleaned of dust etc., and shall be allowed to dry for at least 48
hours. It shall then be rubbed thoroughly be sand paper to give a smooth and even surface. Any
unevenness shall be made good by applying putty, made of plaster of paris mixed with water on
the entire surface including filling up the undulation and then sand papering the same after it is
dry. The cement primer shall preferably be applied by brushing and not by spraying. Horizontal
strokes shall be given first and vertical strokes shall be applied immediately, afterwards. This
entire operation will constitute one coat. The surface shall be finished as smooth as possible,
leaving no brush marks.

Water proof cement paint

The prepared surface shall be thoroughly wetted with clean water before water proof cement paint
is applied. The paint shall be prepared strictly as per manufacturer's specifications, in the absence
of which it shall be mixed in two stages. The first stage shall comprise of 2 parts of water proof
cement paint and one part of water stirred thoroughly and allowed to stand for 5 minutes. Care
shall be taken to add the paint gradually to the water and not vice versa. The second stage shall

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 107

comprise of adding further one part of water to the mix and stirring thoroughly to obtain a liquid
of workable and uniform consistency. The paint shall be mixed in such quantities as can be used
up within an hour of its mixing.Paint shall be applied with brushes or spraying machine. The
solution shall be kept well stirred during the period of application. It shall be applied on the
surface which is on the shady side of the building so that direct heat of the sun on the surface is
avoided.Method of application shall be similar to oil bound distemper. The completed surface
shall be watered, after the day's work. Before application of the second or subsequent coats, the
surface of the previous coat shall not be wetted and a uniform shade should be obtained after
application of paint. Cement paint shall not be applied on surfaces already treated with white
wash, colour wash, distemper, varnish paint etc., and on gypsum, wood and metal surfaces.

Oil bound distemper

The surface shall be prepared as for 'Cement Primer Coat'. A primer coat of cement primer or
distemper shall be applied as specified in the description of the item. After the primer coat has
dried for at least 48 hours, the surface shall be lightly sand papered to make it smooth, taking care
not to rub the priming coat out. All loose particles shall be dusted off. One coat of distemper
properly diluted with thinner, shall be applied with brushes/rollers in horizontal strokes followed
immediately by vertical ones which together constitute one coat. The subsequent coats shall be
applied in the same way.Two or more coats of distemper as are found necessary shall be applied
to obtained an even shade. A time interval of at least 24 hours shall be allowed between
consecutive coats. The brushes shall be of 15 cm. double bristled type. They shall be maintained
in proper condition and those that are dirty or caked will not be allowed to be used.

Dry Distemper

The surface shall be prepared in the same manner as for oil bound distemper. A primer coat using
approved primer or sizes shall be applied. Distemper prepared as per manufacturer's direction
shall be applied and each coat shall be allowed to dry before subsequent coat is applied. The
finished surface shall be free from chalking when rubbed, even, uniform and shall show no brush
marks.
Plastic emulsion paint
The surface on which plastic paint has to be laid must be thoroughly cleaned and prepared and all
defects rectified. The surface shall be dry and rubbed smooth by means of sand paper to the
satisfaction of the Engineer. One coat sealer and two coats of plastic emulsion paint are to be
applied. The work is to be carried out under direct guidance and instructions from the
manufacturers whose expert advise and supervision are to be made available in order to achieve
the high grade finish. The painters employed for this work must be capable of producing the
highest standard of workmanship required. If the finish is of doubtful nature, the contractor shall
have to rectify at his own cost to the entire satisfaction of the Engineer. Plastic emulsion paint of
approved make or equivalent quality and of approved colour and shade shall only be used.

Painting to steel surfaces

General

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 108

All surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned of all dirt, grease, rust and mill scale. Areas which
become inaccessible after assembly shall be painted before assembly after cleaning the surfaces
as described above. The surfaces shall be perfectly dry before painting.Wherever shop primer
painting is damaged, the surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned and touched up with corresponding
primer.Site painting shall not be done in frosty or foggy weather or when humidity is such as to
cause condensation on the surface to be painted.

Steel structures

Unless otherwise specified all structures shall be painted with two coats of primer as specified
and approved. One coat shall be applied at shop and the second coat at site. All structures after
erection shall be given two coats of finishing paint and shall be of synthetic enamel of approved
colour. The under coat shall have different tint to distinguish from the finishing coat.

Galvanized iron sheets

All plain and CGI sheets requires surface pre-treatment or use of other patented primer to ensure
adhesion of paint to zinc coated surfaces. Such pre-treatment shall be as per manufacturer's
specifications. Where pre-treatment is adopted one coat of primer paint of suitable quality shall
be applied. Unless otherwise specified the finishing coats shall consist of an under-coat of an
aluminium paint having blue tint and a second coat of aluminium paint having aluminium colour.

DETAILED SPECIFICATION FOR WATER SUPPLY AND SANITORY SYSTEM

WATER SUPPLY AND SANITARY SYSTEM
1.00 SCOPE

This specification covers the general requirements for sanitary and water supply
installation work with all fittings and fixtures including ancillary works such as connections,
manholes, inspection chambers etc.

The scope of work covers supplying and installing sanitary, water supply and drainage
items of works in accordance with drawings and specification.
2.00 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
2.01 The contractor shall furnish all skilled and unskilled labour plant, equipment, scaffolding
all materials etc. required for complete executions of the work in accordance with the drawings
and as described herein and / or as directed by the Engineer.
2.02 All pipe lines, locations of fittings and fixtures etc. shall be as per approved drawings or
as directed by the Engineer. Correctness of lines, plumb, orientation, symmetry and levels shall
be strictly ensured. All items shall be fully secured against movement in any direction and so
located as to allow easy maintenance where desired by the Engineer.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 109

2.03 All pipe lines and fittings shall be installed leak proof. When the works under scope of
this specification connect with others the connections shall be such as to prevent any splashing
or emission of foul odour and gases.
2.04 The installation shall also be in conformity with the byelaws and requirements of the local
authority in so far as these become applicable to the installation. Wherever this specification calls
for a higher standard of materials and/or workmanship than those required by any of the above
regulations and standards, then this specification shall take precedence over the said regulations
and standards. Wherever drawings and specifications require something which will violate the
regulations, the regulations shall govern.
2.05 Contractor shall set out the drainage, soil, waste and water pipes lines and other
fittings and fixtures in accordance with the plans and instructions of the Engineer. The Contractor
shall be responsible for the correctness of the above and any inaccuracies are to be rectified at his
own expense. He will be responsible for taking levels of the site before setting out and putting
them on record without extra charge
2.06 All works should conform to the description given for each item and in specification in
addition to the bye-laws / requirements of the Municipal Corporation / Local Authorities within
whose jurisdiction the work is required to be done.
2.07 The contractor shall arrange completion certificate and occupation certificate from local
authorities. Work shall be considered as completed only when the contractor produces such
certificate. If no such certificates are issued by the Municipal / Local Authorities, the work shall
be considered as completed only when permanent water supply, sewage and drainage connections
are obtained and the installation successfully commissioned and virtual completion certificate
issued by the Engineer.
2.08 The drawings, specifications and schedule of quantities forming part of the contract are
explanatory and are complementary to one another, representing together the works / installation
to be carried out. If neither the specification nor the schedule of quantities include any provision
specifically, but if such provision is necessary to complete the work as per drawing the contractor
shall provide the same without any extra cost. In case of any discrepancy in between bill of
quantities and drawings, the former will take precedence subject to the approval of the Engineer.
2.09 Works to comply with local regulations and rates to include all costs :
a. All sanitary installations, water supply and drainage work shall conform to the Local
Municipal Bye-Laws and/or rules and regulations of Local Bodies and the work shall be inspected
and passed by the various authorities having jurisdiction.
b. The work shall be carried out through a licensed plumber.

c. The Contractor shall arrange with the Local Municipal and/or Public Authorities for
obtaining water and drainage connections and the Owner will reimburse the permanent
connection charges on production of receipts.
d. The Contractor shall obtain all necessary permission forms from the various authorities
having jurisdiction and shall make application and file all plans required for obtaining permission
and satisfactory completion of the work.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 110

e. The rates quoted shall be for complete items as fixed in position and cover all costs of
materials, labour, tools, supervision, cutting of holes, chases, etc. and also for providing fixing
arrangements viz. clamps brackets, wooden blocks etc. The rate shall also include restoration to
original condition of all damages to walls, floors, etc. during the process of fixing of sanitary
installations, water supply and drainage to the entire satisfaction of the Engineer. All debris of
plumbers' excavation etc. shall be removed without any extra charge. The plumbing work or the
other building work affected by the plumber's work shall be left thoroughly cleaned to the
satisfaction of the Engineer.
f. All C. I. pipes, brackets, C. I. cisterns, G. I. pipes and fixtures, M. S. fixtures, A. C. pipes
and fittings shall be painted with one coat of approved primer and two coats of enamel/flat oil
paint. All painting work shall be carried out to the entire satisfaction of the Engineer. If directed,
additional coats of paint shall be applied to get uniform and matching finish without any extra
cost.
g. In the interior of the building all pipes whether of cast iron, lead or G. I., shall be embedded in
an approved manner in chases made in walls or floors if required by the Engineer. The plumber
shall make necessary holes in the walls, etc. and restore them to the original condition.
h. All water supply and sanitary fixtures, pipes and pipe fittings, traps, etc., which are to be
embedded into the concrete or masonry work or other building work shall be placed in position
and embedded or concealed at the time of casting concrete or erecting brickwork. In case where
chasing or cutting of concrete, masonry, or other structural or construction work is unavoidable,
the locations of such fittings, pipe lines and traps etc., shall be marked suitably and the cutting,
chasing or disturbing of the construction work shall proceed only after due approval of the
Engineer.
i. All cutting, chasing and fixing work shall be completed before commencement of any
plastering, tiling or finishing work.
j. Unless otherwise specified, galvanized iron pipes and pipe fittings shall be of medium quality
conforming to IS : 1239 and shall be tested if required by the Engineer.
k. The Contractor shall be responsible for the adequacy and efficiency of the entire plumbing
system and if, in his opinion, he finds any serious objection to the system shown on the drawings,
he shall set forth his objection or his suggestions to ensure adequacy and efficiency of the said
system and notify the Engineer before proceeding with the work.
l. The work in every respect during its progress and till final acceptance by the Engineer,
including raw materials delivered at site to be incorporated for use in construction of the work by
the Contractor shall be under the charge and in the care of and under the responsibility of the
Contractor and at his risk. Any loss or damage to such materials or work prior to final acceptance
of the work by the Engineer shall immediately be replaced by the Contractor at his expense.
2.10 The Contractor shall strictly follow, at all stages of work, the stipulations contained in the
Indian Standard Safety Code and the provisions of the safety rules as specified in the General
Conditions of the Contract for ensuring safety of men and materials.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 111

2.11 Any approval, instructions, permission, checking, review, etc. whatsoever by the Engineer
shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility and obligation regarding adequacy,
correctness, completeness, safety, strength, workmanship etc.
3.00 MATERIALS
3.01 Materials shall be of the best approved quality obtainable and unless otherwise specified
they shall conform to the respective Indian Standard Specification.

Sample of all materials shall be got approved before placing order and the approved
samples shall be deposited with the Engineer.
In case of non-availability of materials in metric sizes, the nearest size in FPS units shall be
provided with prior approval of the Engineer for which neither extra will be paid nor any rebate
shall be recovered.
If directed, materials shall be tested in any approved Testing Laboratory and the Contractor
shall produce the test certificate in original to the Engineer and entire charges for original as well
as repeated tests shall be borne by the Contractor. If required by the Engineer, the Contractor
shall arrange to test portions of the work at his own cost in order to prove their soundness and
efficiency. If after any such test the work or portion of works is found, in the opinion of the
Engineer, to be defective or unsound, the Contractor shall pull down and redo the same at his
own cost. Defective materials shall be removed from the site.
It shall be obligatory for the Contractor to furnish certificate, if demanded by Engineer,
from manufacturer or the material supplier, that the work has been carried out by using their
material and installed/fixed as per their recommendations.
4.00 SANITARY INSTALLATION & FIXTURES :

4.01 All fixtures and fittings shall be of approved quality and type manufactured by well
known manufacturers. All items brought to the site must bear identification mark of the type
and manufacturer. Procurements shall be made well in advance and got inspected and approved
immediately by the Engineer. All fixtures shall be adequately protected covering and plugging
till handed over.

All fittings, gratings, fasteners, unless specified otherwise, shall be chromium plated.

All fixtures shall be fixed in a neat workman like manner true to line and as recommended
by the manufacturer or shown on the drawings. Care shall be taken to fix all fixtures, brackets
and accessories by proper wooden cleats, rawl plugs, bolts and nuts as each fixture will warrant
with the correct site of screws, nuts or bolts.

Care shall be taken in fixing all approved chromium plated fixtures and accessories so as
not to leave any tool marks or damages. All such fixtures shall be tightened with fixed spanners.
Use of pipe wrenches with toothed jaws shall not be allowed.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 112

All fixtures shall be thoroughly tested after connecting up the drainage and water supply
system. All fixtures shall be thoroughly finished and any leakage in piping, valves and waste
fittings corrected to the entire satisfaction of the Engineer.

Upon completion of the work, remove all labels, stickers, plasters etc. from the fixtures and
clean all fixtures with soap and water so as to present a neat and clean toilet.
4.02 Water closet
i) Indian type W. C. pans
The W. C. pan shall be of white vitreous china/ approved shade,of specified size and pattern as
per schedule of quantities (SOQ). Pan shall be of approved quality and shall bear the mark of the
firm manufacturing it. It shall have 10 cm. (4") porcelain trap ('P' or 'S' type with effective seal)
and 5 cm. (2") vent arm.
The footrests shall be of white glazed stoneware with chequered surface.
Orissa type pans
Shall be from an approved manufacturer and trapped as specified in SOQ.
Fixing
Pan shall be fixed securely with a cushioning bed in an approved manner taking care that the
cushion is uniform and even, without having any hollows between pan and the concrete. The joint
between the pan and the trap shall be made with cement mortar 1 : 1 and shall be leak proof.
Each closet shall be provided with the following accessories and the rate shall be all inclusive
a. Necessary length of 10 cm. H. C. I. pipe or lead pipe connecting the pan and plug
bend. (The plug bend/tee connection to vertical stack shall be paid under appropriate item).

b. Wherever antisyphonage pipe connections are required necessary length of lead

pipe 62.5 mm. dia. shall be provided.

c. Necessary length of porcelain or lead or C.I. connecting pipe 10 cm. dia. (plug
bend/tee connection to vertical stack shall be paid under appropriate item.)
ii)European Type W.C.
Water Closet
Water closet shall be wash down or siphonic wash down type floor or wall mounted set, as
shown in the drawings or as per SOQ, concealed type (as detailed n the drawings or as directed

pipe / bend shall be connected to the WC by means of a suitable rubber adaptor. Wall hung WC
shall be supported by CI floor mounted chair which shall be fixed in a manner as approved by
the Owners site Representative.

Each WC set shall be provided with approved quality with approved quality of seat, rubber
buffers and chromium plated hinges. Seat shall be so fixed that it remains absolutely stationary
in vertical position without falling down on the WC.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 113

Each WC shall be provided with 110 mm dia (OD) PVC pan connector connecting the ceramic
outlet of WC to CI pipe.

WC shall be flushed by means of concealed type (as detailed n the drawings or as directed by

4.03 Urinals
Urinals shall be lipped type half stall with glazed vitreous china of size as called for in the SOQ.
Half stall urinals shall be provided with 15mm dia CP sprender, 32mm dia CP domical waste
and CP cast brass bottle trap with pipe trap with pipe and wall flange and shall be fixed to wall
by CI brackets, CI wall clips and CP brass screws as recommended by manufacturer complete
as directed b

Flushing for urinals shall be by means of hand operated flush valve with complete kit of
plumbing or with auto flusing sensor.
4.04 Wash basins
Wash basins shall be white glazed/colored vitreous china of size, shape and type specified in the
schedule of Quantities.
Each basin shall be provided with painted MS angle or CI brackets and clips and the basin
securely fixed to wall/counter slab. Placing of basins over the brackets without secure fixing
shall not be accepted. The MS angle shall be provided with two coats of red oxide primer and

Representative. The cost of fixing the basin shall be inclusive of supply and installation of
brackets as described above.

Each basin shall be provided with 32mm dia CP waste coupling, CP bottle trap as specified in
the schedule of Quantities.

Each basin shall be provided with CP pillar cock and a CP angle valve with connection tube as
specified in the schedule of Quantities.
5.00 TOILET REQUISITES

5.01 Mirrors

Mirrors shall be of the best quality, specified size, approved design and make. It shall be
mounted on asbestos sheet backing and shall be fixed in position by means of four C. P. brass
screws and cup washers over rubber washers on wooden plugs firmly embedded in the wall.
Alternative method for fixing could be by using brass clamps with C. P. brass screws. A suitable
T. W. cover of approved design shall be fixed all round as directed.
5.02 Glass shelf
The shelf shall be of glass of approved quality and thickness with edges rounded off. The size of
the shelf shall be as specified and shall rest on C. P. brass brackets which shall be fixed with C. P.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 114

brass screws to wooden plugs, firmly embedded in the wall. The shelf shall have C. P. brass guard
rail all round.
5.03 Toilet paper Holder

Toilet paper holder shall be white glazed vitreous china or chrome plated of size, shape and type
specified in the Schedule of Quantities.

Porcelain toilet paper holder shall be fixed in walls and set in cement mortar 1:2 (I cement : 2
coarse sand) and fixed in relation to the tiling work.

The latter (chrome) shall be fixed by means of screws/capping having finish similar to the toilet
paper holder in wall/temper partitions with law I plugs or nylon sleeves. When fixed on timber

Representative.
5.04 Tower Rail

Tower rail shall be chromium plated brass or of stainless steel or powder coated brass of size,
shape and type specified in the Schedule of Quantities.

Tower rail shall be fixed with screws/capping having finish similar to the towel rail in wall with
rawl plugs or nylon sleeves and shall include cutting and making good as required or directed

5.05 Liquid Soap Dispenser

Liquid Soap Dispenser shall be wall/counter mounted suitable for dispensing liquid soaps,
lotions, detergents. The cover shall lock to body with concealed locking arrangement, opened
only be key provided.

Liquid soap dispenser body and shank shall be of high resistance material. The piston and spout
shall be stainless steel with I litre capacity polyethylene container.

The valve shall operate with less than 2.27 kg (5 lbs) of force.
5.06 Hand Drier
The hand drier shall be no touch operating type with solid state time delay to allow user to keep
hand in any position.

The hand drier shall be fully hygienic, rated for continuous repeat use (CRU.

The rating of hand drier shall be such that time required to dry a pair of hands up to wrists is
approximately 30 seconds.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 115

The hand drier shall be of wall mounting type suitable for 230 v, single phase, 50 Hz Ac power
supply.

5.07 Towel Ring, Soap Tray, Cloth Stand etc.

These shall be of CP/anodised aluminium as described in the schedule and as per the displayed
sample. These shall be fixed by means of CP brass screws to wooden cleats, firmly embedded in
the wall.
5.08 Shower

These shall be of CP finish swivel type as specified.

5.09 WATER HEATERS
These shall be of Venus / Racold make. The type and capacity will be as per schedule of
quantities. They shall be mounted on the wall with necessary bolts of approved make. They shall
have 8 mm PVC inlet pipe, 12 mm lead pipe outlet, 15 mm non-return valve.
5.10 TOILETS FOR THE DISABLED
Where specified, in washroom facilities designed to accommodate physically

Stainless steel garb brass of required size suitable for concealed or exposed
Mounting and peened non-slip gripping surface shall be provided in all washroom.

The flushing cistern/valve shall be provided with chromium plated long handles.
6.00 PVC PIPES AND FITTINGS

6.1 MATERIAL
PVC pipes and fittings for Soil, Waste and Vent pipes shall confirm to IS 13592-1992 (SWR-
type) as mentioned in Schedule of quantities.

6.2 LAYING

Exposed as the case may be as shown on the drawings, The minimum thickness of the fittings
shall be of 3.2 mm the fittings shall be injection moulded type with rubber rings socket. The
exposed pipes and fittings shall be capable of withstanding sunrays (Ultra violet radiation)
without having decolourisation and brittleness.
6.3 JOINTING

instructions/recommendation. The rubber ring socket fittings and pipes shall be jointed as
follows:

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 116

Clean the outside of the pipes spigot-end and the inside of the sealing groove of the fitting.
Apply the lubricant uniformly to the spigot end, sealing ring and pass the spigot end into the
socket containing sealing rung until fully home. Mark the position of the socket edge with
pencil or felt-open on the pipe, the withdraw the pipe from the socket by approximately 10 mm
to make the pipe fully fitted to the fitting. The horizontal pipes on the wall shall be fixed with
MS fabricated clamps with necessary provision to take care the expansion and contraction in
PVC pipes. The spacing of the clamps shall be at the intervals of 1.5 m to 2 m depending on the
requirement of the supporting arrangements.

Sturdy hangers, brackets and saddles of approved design shall be installed to support all pipe
lengths which are not embedded over their entire run. The hangers and brackets shall be
fabricated from suitable MS rolled section. The hangers and brackets shall be of adjustable
heights and prime coated with red oxide primer. Clamps, collars and saddles to hold pipes shall
be designed to carry the weight of pipes safely. All pipes & fittings shall be secured near every
joint and half way through every pipe length unless otherwise specified.

6.4 TESTING
PVC pipes and fittings shall be tested for three metres of water head. The openings of the pipes
shall be sealed for the section to be tested. The water pressure shall be maintained for
maximum of one hour. The Engineer shall examine carefully all the joints for leakage.

6.5 Mode of Measurement Pipes and fittings

These pipes shall be measured along the center line of the pipe in Rm. The quoted rate for
respective items shall include the following
a. Cost of respective pipes and Jointing materials.

b. Laying, fixing and jointing with necessary clamps, MS fabricated brackets asper

c. Making good all damages to the parts of the building to suit the surroundings.

d. Testing and making good the defects, if any.

0 PVC-U PIPES
MATERIAL
All pipes shall be Unplasticised Non-Pressure Polyvinyl chloride ( PVC-U) Pipes for
underground drainage and sewerage systems. Pipes shall be true and straight with uniform bore
throughout. Cracked, warped pipes shall not be used on the work. All pipes shall be tested by
the manufacturer and the contractor shall produce, prior to use on site, a certificate to that effect
from the manufacturer.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 117

The pipes shall be with or without reinforcement as required and of the class as specified. These
shall conform to IS 15328:2003.
All pipes shall be true to shape, straight, perfectly sound and free from cracks and flaws. The
external and internal surface of the pipes shall be smooth and hard. The pipes shall be free from
defects resulting from imperfect grading of the aggregate mixing or moulding.
7.2 LAYING
PVC-U pipes shall be laid on cement concrete bed of cradles as specified and shown on the
detailed drawings. The cradles may be precast and sufficiently cured to prevent cracks and
breakage in handling. The invert of the cradles shall be left 12mm below the invert level of the
pipe and properly placed on the soil to prevent any disturbance. The pipe shall then be placed on
the bed concrete or cradles and set for the line and gradient by means of sight rails and boning
rods, etc. Cradles or concrete bed may be omitted, if directed by the Project Manager.
a. EXCAVATION
Measurement for excavation of pipes trenches shall be made per linear meter.

b. Trenches shall be measurement between outside walls of manholes at

Top and the depth shall be the average depth between the two ends to
The nearest cm. The rate quoted shall be for a depth upto 1.5 metre or as given in the Bill of
Quantities.
Payment for trenches more than 1.5 m in depth shall be made for extra depth as given in the Bill
of Quantities and above the rate for depth upto 1.5 m.

c. RCC pipes shall be measured for length of the pipe line per linear meter.

i) Length between chamber shall be recorded from inside of one chamber or inside of other
chamber.

8 CPVC PIPES AND FITTINGS

8.1 Materials

The CPVC pipes and fittings to be made from a specialty thermoplastic known chemically as
post-
with wide range of suitable fittings as per CTS (Copper Tube Size) 13.5 CPVC pipe and fittings
are produced to the specifications of ASTMD 2846.

8.2 Cutting

In order to make a proper and neat joint, measure the pipe length accurately and make a small
mark. Ensure that the pipe and fittings are size compatible. You can easily cut with a wheel type

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 118

plastic pipe cutter or hacksaw blade. Cutting tubing as squarely as possible provides optimal
bonding area within a joint.

8.3 Deburring / Beveling

Burrs and Fillings can prevent proper contact between tube and fitting during assembly and
should be removed from the outside and inside of the pipe. A pocket knife or file are suitable
for this purpose. A slight bevel on the end of the tubing will ease entry of the tubing into the
fitting socket.
8.4 Fitting preparation

Using a clean, dry rag, wipe dirt and moisture from the fitting sockets and tubing end. The
tubing should make contact with the socket wall 1/3 to 2/3 of the way into the fitting socket.
8.5 Solvent cement application

Use only CPVC cement or an all purpose cement conforming to ASTM 493 or joint failure
may result. When making a joint, apply a heavy ,even coat of cement to the pipe end. Use the
same applicator without additional cement to apply a thin coat inside the fitting socket. Too
much cement can cause clogged water ways

8.6 Assembly

Immediately insert the tubing in to the fitting socket, rotation the tube 1/4 to 1/2 turn while
inserting. This motion ensures and even distribution of cement within the joint. Properly align
the fittings. Hold the assembly for approximately 10 seconds, allowing the joint to set-up.

8.7 Set and cure times

Solvent cement set and cure times are a function of pipe size, temperature and relative humidity.
Curing times is shorter for drier environments, smaller sizes and higher temperatures. It requires
to 20 minutes for perfect joint.

CPVC PIPE CTS-SDR 13.5 DIMENSION DETAILS

Nominal size Outside diameter in MM Wall thickness in MM

Inch Average Tolerance Minimum Tolerance
15.8 0.08 1.40 +0.51
22.2 0.08 1.65 +0.51
28.6 0.08 2.12 +0.51
34.9 0.08 2.59 +0.51
41.3 0.10 3.06 +0.51

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 119

54.0 0.10 4.00 +0.58

CPVC pipe table of usage of CPVC solvent cement joint

Dia of pipe in
inch (mm) (12.7) (19.0 (25.4) (31.75) (38.1) (50.8)
5)
Appx.Nos. of
joints which can
be made per 200 180 150 130 100 70
ltr.of solvent
cement joint
8.8 Testing

Before any pipes are painted or covered, they shall be tested to a hydrostatic pressure 7
kg/sq.cm.. Pressure shall be maintained for at least eight hours without appreciable drop in
pressure. In addition to the sectional testing of water supply pipes, the contractor shall test the
whole of the installation to the entire satisfaction of the Engineer. He shall rectify any leakages,
failure of fittings or valves.
9.00 TRAPS
Floor traps where specified shall be siphon type full before P or S type cast iron having a
minimum 50mm deep seal. The trap and waste pipes when buried below ground shall be set and
encased in cement concrete blocks firmly supported on firm ground or when installed on a
sunken RCC structural slab. The blocks shall be in 1:2:4 mix (1 cement : 2 coarse sand : 4 stone
aggregate 20mm nominal size).

Contractor shall provide all necessary shuttering and centering for the blocks. Size of the block
shall be 30 x 30 cms of the required depth.

9.02 Floor Trap Inlet / Hopper

Bath room traps and connection shall ensure free and silent flow of discharging water. Where
specified, contractor shall provide a special type of floor inlet fitting fabricated from GI pipe,
with one ,two or three inlet sockets welded on side to connect the waste pipe, All joint between
waste hopper and CI inlet socket shall be lead caulke
Floor trap inlet and the traps shall be set in cement concrete blocks where buried in floors with
out extra charge. Floor trap for the shower cubicle shall suit site and as per the approval of
esentative. All fabricated hopper shall be hot dip galvanized.

9.03 Floor Trap Grating

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 120

Floor and urinal traps shall be provided with 100-150mm square or round stainless steel
gratings, with frame and rim of approved design and shape or as specified in the schedule of

9.04 Cleanout plugs

Floor clean out plug

Cleanout plug for soil,waste or rain water pipes laid under floors shall be provided near pipe
s at such intervals as required as per site
conditions. Cleanout plugs shall terminate flush with the floor level. They shall be threaded and
provided with key holes for opening. Cleanout plugs shall be cast brass suitable for the pipe dia.
With screwed to a GI socket. The socket shall be lead caulked to the drain pipes.
Cleanout on drainage pipes
Cleanout plugs shall be provided on head of each drain and in between at locations indicated on
shall be of size matching the
full bore of the pipe but not exceeding 150mm dia CO plugs on drains of greater diameters shall
be 150mm dia. Fixed with a suitable reducing adapter.

Floor cleanout plugs shall be cast brass.

Cleanouts provided at ceiling level pipe shall be fixed to a CI flanged tail piece. The cleanout
doors shall be specially fabricated from light weight galvanized sheets and angles with hinged
type doors with fly nuts,gasket etc. as per drawing

9.05 PIPE SLEEVES

Pipe sleeves, next larger diameter than pipes shall be provided wherever pipe pass through walls
& slabs and annular space filled with fiberglass & finished with retainer rings. All pipes shall be
accurately cut to the required sizes in accordance with relevant BIS codes and burrs removed
before laying. Open ends of the pipe shall be closed as the pipe is installed to avoid enterance of
foreign matter.

10.00 WATER SUPPLY

10.01 Brass water fittings :
All brass water fittings shall be of approved quality and design and shall generally comply
with the latest I. S. Specifications. They shall be fixed in the pipe line in a workmanlike manner
and care shall be taken to see that joints between fittings and pipes are made leak proof. The
fittings and joints shall be tested in an approved manner to ensure that the joints are leak proof.
The defective fittings and the joints shall be repaired or redone/replaced at contractor's expense.
10.02 SLUICE VALVES :

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 121

10.03 Sluice valves :- The valve shall be of the specified size and shall be of approved quality.

The body and cover of the valve shall be of tough, homogeneous cast iron, the spindle of
forged bronze, the nut and the valve seats of high grade gun metal and machine- faced. It shall be
fitted with a C. I. wheel or a cap of standard type, marked with an arrow to show the direction of
turn for opening of the valve. It shall have flanged ends drilled to Indian Standard Specifications.

The valves shall work easily and smoothly under all conditions and shall be watertight
when closed under the working pressure as stipulated in the relevant I. S. S. Unless otherwise
specified, valves shall be class II type as in IS : 778 - 1971.

The diameter of the water way, when the valve is fully opened shall not be less than the
diameter of the pipe.

Fixing :- Fixing of the valve shall be done by means of bolts, nuts and 3 mm. (1/8") rubber
insertions with the flanges of the spigot and socket tail pieces drilled to the same specifications.
The tail pieces shall be jointed to the pipe line by means of lead caulked joints.
10.04 Butterfly Valves
Valves above 50 mm dia. shall be butter fly valves.

Butterfly valves shall conform to the following specification :

Body : High duty cast iron to IS 210 FG 220 and BS 1452 Gr

220

Seating : Moulded in situ resilient lining of black nitrile rubber.

Disk : Nylon coated S.G iron to IS 1865/SG 400/12 and

BS 2729 Gr. 470/12.

Shaft : The shafts are made of stainless steel AISI 431. Only flanged and valves to be
used with flanges drilled to BS 10 Table F. Valves shall be capable of being locked in open
position. Hand wheel shall be with flow control lever unit for smooth opening and closing of the
valve. Key rods with MS coated extended spindles to be provided whenever the valves are not
approachable from the ground surface.

10.05 APPURTENANCES

The other appurtenances of the pipe line are mentioned below :

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 122

10.06 Air valves :- These are placed at every summit in the pipe line to permit the escape of air
when the main is filled, and afterwards air if any is carried into the main (they are also placed on
long stretches of nearly level main).

10.07 Scour valves :- These are placed at the bottom of all depressions for emptying the main or
letting out sediment.

10.08 Reflux valves :- These are fixed on the ascending parts of the main which open in the
direction of flow, but automatically close if a burst occurs and the water flows back. They
diminish the damage done by the escape of water at a burst.

10.09 Safety or relief valves :- These are fixed at the down stream ends of long lengths of mains
or where water hammer may take place so as to reduce to the normal any excessive pressure that
may occur.
10.10 Water meter :- It shall consist of meter, 'Y' striner and other accessories shall be fixed as
per the requirement of the Local Water Supply Authority. The cost of meter shall include the cost
of testing and sealing by Municipal authorities and fixing including a masonry chamber as shown
on the drawing, C. I. cover and locking arrangement complete as directed.
10.11 Manhole chambers and surface chambers for housing valves etc. shall be constructed as per
standard drawings.
10.12 Fixtures Etc.
All fixtures and fittings shall be connected by water tight joints. No dripping shall be
accepted.
10.13 MODE OF MEASUREMENT
1. Unless otherwise stated, all pipes shall be measured net, length as laid or fixed and measured
linear over all fittings, such as bends, junctions, etc. and given in running metres. The length shall
be taken along the centre line of the pipes and fittings.
2. Length of fittings viz., taps, valves, traps, etc. which are paid under appropriate items shall not
be remeasured under linear measurements as enumerated above.
3. Soil, waste and vent pipes shall be measured along the centre line of the stack including the
connecting bends/tees to W. C. Pan, Nahani trap, etc. and shall be paid as enumerated above.
4. W. C. pans, Lavatory basins, Sinks, Drain boards, Urinals, Mirrors, Glass shelf, Toilet paper
holder shall be measured by number and shall include all accessories as enumerated in detailed
specifications under each item.
5. Unless otherwise specified, all types of taps, valves, etc. shall be measured by number and
paid separately.
6. Manholes, Inspection Chambers, Gulley traps, etc. shall be constructed according to
detailed specifications, and measured by number and paid separately. The depth of manhole shall
mean the vertical distance from the top of the manhole cover to the outgoing invert of the main
drain channel.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 123

7. Water meter shall include 'Y' strainer and other appurtenances required by the Local
bodies and shall include Brick Masonry Chamber etc. as per detailed specification and item shall
be measured by number and paid for accordingly.
11.00 Trenching for Water Supply Pipeline
Under no circumstances, unless specifically cleared by the Engineer in special, drainage
and soil pipes shall be allowed to come close to water supply pipelines.
11.01 Excavation
The trenches for the pipes shall be excavated to lines and levels as directed. The bed of the
trench shall be truly and evenly dressed throughout from one change of grade to the next.
The gradient is to be set out by means of boning rods and should the required depth exceed
at any point, the trench shall be refilled by means of cement concrete of proportion 1 : 4 : 8 at the
contractor's own expense.
The bed of the trench, if in soft or made up earth, shall be well watered and rammed and
depression thus formed shall be made up with sand or other suitable materials as directed by the
Engineer without any extra cost.
If rock is met with, it shall be removed to 15 cm. below the level of the pipe and the trench refilled
with concrete or sand or other suitable material as directed by the Engineer without any extra cost.

The rates shall include keeping trenches dry either by bailing out or pumping water,
timbering and shoring of sides of excavation if required and as directed by the Engineer.

The trench width shall be nominal diameter of the pipe plus 38 cm. (15") but it shall not be
less than 53 cm. (21").

Excavated material shall be stacked sufficiently away from the edge of the trench and the
side of the spoil bank shall not be allowed to become such as to endanger the stability of the
excavation. Spoil may be carried away and used for filling the trench behind the work.
11.02 Protection of existing services
All pipes, water mains, cables etc. met with in the course of excavation shall be carefully
protected and supported.

11.03 Refilling :

Refilling in trenches for pipes shall be commenced as soon as the joints are tested,
approved and launching is done. The refilling on the top and around the drain shall be done with
great care and in such a manner as will obtain the greatest amount of compactness and solidity
possible. For this purpose the selected excavated earth shall be laid in regular layers of 15 cm.
watered and each layer rammed. Utmost care shall be taken in doing this, so that no damage shall
be caused to the pipe line and other permanent works.
All surplus earth shall be disposed off as directed by the Engineer.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 124

11.04 Concreting

All pipes at shallow road crossings and made up ground shall be laid on a bed of 15 cm.
1:4:8 concrete (one part of cement, four parts of sand and eight parts of 40 mm and down gauge
stone metal) and properly consolidated. The pipe shall be encased with 1:3:6 cement concrete
using 25 mm and down gauge stone metal. Concrete shall be laid to the full width of the trench
and also in haunches as per the standard drawings.
11.05 Laying
The pipe shall carefully laid to the levels and gradients shown on the drawings with

Each separated pipe shall be individually set for line, level, plumb etc. Where lengths of
sewer or drain pipes are laid in trench, properly painted sight-rails shall be fixed across the
trench at a height, equal to length of the boning rod to be used, above the required invert level
of the drain or sewer at the point where the sight is fixed. More sight rails shall be required at
manholes, change of gradient and intermediate positions if the distance for sighting is too far,
which shall not be more than 1.5. ft apart. The excavation shall be boned in at least once in
every 2.0 ft. The foot of the boning rod shall be set on a block of wood of the exact thickness of
the wall of the pipe. Each pipe shall be separately and accurately boned between sight rails.
11.06 Jointing
Jointing of laid pipes shall be so planned as to avoid completely any movement or strain
to the joints already made. If any joint is suspected to be damaged it shall be opened out and
redone.
All joints between pipes, pipes and fittings and manholes shall be gastight when above
ground and watertight when underground. Method of jointing shall be as per instruction of the
pipe and fittings manufacturer and as approved by the Engineer. However, in the absence of
any instruction available from the manufacturer, methods as detailed hereunder shall be used.
11.07 Spun yarn soaked in thick cement slurry shall be passed round the joint and inserted in it by
means of caulking tool. More skins of yarn shall be added and caulked tightly so as to fill more
than 1/4th of the total depth of the socket. The remainder of the socket in the joint shall be
carefully filled with a stiff cement mortar of 1:1 (One part of cement and one part of sand)
proportion by hand. When the joint is completely filled with tightly caulked mortar, a fillet shall
be formed round the joint with a trowel, forming an angle of 45o with the barrel of the pipe. The
newly laid joints shall be protected, until set from sun and rain and shall be covered with damp
sacking or other suitable materials.

11.08 Curing

The joints shall be cured at least for seven days.

11.09 Testing

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 125

All lengths and joints shall be fully tested for water tightness by means of water pressure
maintained for not less than 30 minutes. Testing shall be carried out from manhole to manhole.
All pipes shall be subjected to a test pressure atleast 2.0 mtr. head of water at the highest point of
the section under test. Any joint found leaking or sweating shall be remade and section re-tested
at contractors own cost.
11.10 Support and Protection to Pipelines
All drainage and sewer pipes shall be laid with socket leading uphill. Preferably the pipes
shall rest on solid and even foundations for the full length of the barrel. However, the pipe

support and jointing. The minimum support and protection for glazed stoneware pipes shall be
as follows:
(a) When cover is less than 1 metre below ground level and where pipes are unavoidably
exposed above ground surface, the pipes shall be completely encased or surrounded with
concrete.

(b) Where the pipes are laid on a soft soil with the maximum water table lying at the invert of
the pipe, the pipe sewer shall be bedded on concrete.

(c) Where the pipes have to be laid on a soft soil with the maximum water table rising above
invert of the pipe, but below the top of the barrel, the pipe sewer shall be haunched.

(d) Where the maximum water table is likely to rise above the top of the barrel or wherever
the pipe is laid on soft soil the pipe sewers shall be completely encased or surrounded with
concrete.
Cast iron pipes and concrete pipes may be supported on suitable concrete or brick
support, where specified. The supports shall be unyielding and strong enough. At least one
support shall be located close to each joint. Spacing of intermediate supports shall be as desired
by Engineer. Pipes shall be secured to the supports by approved means.
Anchoring of pipes where necessary shall be achieved by suitable concrete encasing
designed for the expected thrust.
Entry Into Structures
For entry of the pipelines into any building or structures suitable conduits under the
structures or sleeves shall be used. The conduits and sleeves shall be such as to allow easy
repairs and replacement of the pipes. When openings or chases are required to be made in the
structure for entry of pipe-lines, locations and sizes shall be marked and checked by the
Engineer. After laying of the pipeline the openings and chases shall be made good.

11.11 Ducts
Where soil, waste and ventilating pipes, rain ware pipes are accommodated in ducts,
access to cleaning eyes shall be provided. Connection to drain shall be through a gully with
sealed cover to guard against increase of sewer gas, vermin or back flow.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 126

11.12 Traps and Ventilating Pipes

Pipes for carrying off the waste from water closets and waste water and overflow from
baths, wash basins, sinks to drains shall be trapped immediately beneath such fixtures. Traps
shall have minimum water seal of 50 mm and shall be ventilated whenever such ventilation is
necessary to maintain water seal of the trap.

Ventilating pipes shall be carried up vertically from the drain to a height of at least 800
mm above the outer covering of the roof of the building or as shown on drawings. All vertical
ventilating, anti-syphonage and similar pipe shall be covered on top with a cowl. The cowl
shall be made of C.I. unless desired otherwise by the Engineer.
12.00 Manholes and Inspection Chambers

12.01 The maximum distance between manholes shall be 30 metres unless specially permitted
otherwise. In addition, at every change of alignment/gradient or diameter there shall be a
manhole for inspection chamber. The distance between manhole or inspection chamber and
gully chamber shall not exceed 6 metres unless desired otherwise. Manhole shall be
constructed so as to be watertight under test. The benching at the sides shall be carried out in
such a manner as to provide no lodgement for any splashing in case of accidental flashing of the
chamber. The chamber or drain at the bottom of chamber shall be plastered with 1:3 cement,
sand mortar and finished smooth to the grade. The channels and drains shall be shaped and laid
to provide smooth flow.

Connection to existing sewer lines shall be through a manhole.

Manholes shall be provided with standard covers, usually C.I. or as desired by the
Engineer. The covers shall be close fitting so as to prevent gases come out.
12.02 Size of manholes

The size specified in the Schedule of Quantities shall be internal size of the manhole.

The work shall be done strictly as per standard drawing and following specifications.

12.03 Bed concrete

Shall be in 1 : 4 : 8 cement concrete 150 mm thick for inspection chambers, 230 mm for
depths upto 2.1 metres and 300 mm for greater depths in case of manhole.

12.04 Brickwork

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 127

Shall be with locally available best quality chamber burnt bricks in 1 : 4 cement mortar or
as specified.

12.05 Concrete Manhole

RCC manholes shall be with M-20 grade concrete or as specified and as per drawing.
Specifications for concrete works and steel reinforcement shall be followed.
12.06 Plaster

Inside of the walls shall be plastered with 12 mm. thick cement plaster 1 : 3 and finished
with a floating coat of neat cement.
In wet grounds, 20 mm thick plaster of the above specification shall be done on the exterior
surface of the walls also and this plaster shall be waterproofed with the addition of approved
waterproofing compound as per manufacturer's specification.
12.07 Pointing

In dry ground, pointing shall be done in 1 : 2 cement mortar to the outside surface.

12.08 Benching
Channels and benching shall be done in cement concrete 1 : 2 : 4 rendered smooth with
neat cement.

The following size of channels for the bench shall be adopted.

Size of drain Depth at the centre Depth at sides at walls

in cm. in inches in cm. in inches in cm. in inches

10 4 15 6 25 10
15 6 20 8 30 12
23 9 28 11 38 15
30 12 35 14 45 18
38 15 43 17 53 21
45 18 50 20 61 24

12.09 Foot rests

C.I. foot rests / steps shall be embedded in masonry, whenever the depth of the manhole /
chamber is more than 1.2 metres as shown in the drawing. They shall be fixed 30 cm. apart and
projecting 11 cm. from the wall. Foot rests shall be painted with bitumen as directed.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 128

12.10 Manhole covers

Manhole covers shall be of tough homogeneous cast iron of heavy or light type as
specified. The sizes specified are the clear internal dimensions. Covers for manholes in the road
proper shall not weigh less than 200 kgs. On footpaths and backyards, lightweight covers of 45
cm. diameter having weight not less than 58 kgs. or covers of size 90 cm. x 45 cm. having weight
of 135 Kgs. or 61 cm. x 45 cm. having weight of 90 kgs. shall be used.

Covers shall be of heavy duty cast iron with lifting hooks as per the details given in the
drawing and fixed on the CI frame embedded in concrete. Cover placed on the frame shall be air
tight. Weight of the cover and frame shall be as specified in the schedule of quantities.

The frame and the cover shall be painted with black bitumen anti-corrosive paint.

PUMPS FOR HYDROPNEUMATIC & DRAINAGE SYSTEM

PUMPS
Pumps shall be vertical, centrifugal, multistage directly coupled to motor. Provision of pump
with pump head & base of cast iron and other parts in SS 304 shall be made for pumps required
in Hydro pneumatic system and water fountain re-circulation system. Impeller shall be
hydraulically balanced and keyed to shaft. Pump shall be mounted on a concrete foundation,
projecting at least 15 CM above finished floor level. The pumps base shall be set on a vibration

instructions and shall be factory aligned prior shipment. All motors and bases shall be painted
with approved finish shop coat of paint. The pump shall be selected for the lowest operating
noise level and shall be complete with flexible connections, valves, and pressure gauges. The
pumps shall include cost of foundation channel complete.

The contractor shall supply and install pumps of the type and performance as shown on the
drawings. All duties of pumps given in the Tender Drawings shall be checked and where
necessary corrected before ordering. All the parts of the pumps that are in contact with water
e.g. shaft, impeller etc. shall be of stainless steel construction.

Pumps shall be so selected that the design duty point is within 5% of the maximum efficiency
point. The pump casing so selected shall have ample space to take an impeller one size larger
than that capable of performing the design duty.

The pump shall have a speed of not more than 1500 rpm. However pumps of 2900 rpm with
high efficiency and low noise motor can be selected and noise data submitted for approval. All
pumps and motors shall be of minimum vibration and noise level during operation. Vibration
isolators shall be provided for all pump sets.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 129

Facilities shall be provided to prevent starting of pumps when the water tank is at low water
level. And indicator for this low water lwvel alarm shall be provided.

Facilities to select which pump to be duty pump and standby pump shall be provided and be
interchangeable.

Leakage from pump gland shall be drained to the nearest floor waste.

Pump curves for all pumps offered shall be submitted. All curve indicating excessive shut-off
head will not be approved.

Each pumps shall be provided with a gate valve at suction and discharge, approved check valve
at discharge, approved strainer at suction, flexible connections at pump suction and discharge,
eccentric reducer at suction, concentric reducer at discharge, pressure gauges at suction and
discharge, circulation relief valve and automatic air relief valve.

Appropriate neoprene vibration isolation mountings shall be provided for each pump sets.
Vertical multi-stage pumps
7.0 Multi-stage pumps shall be of centrifugal type and arranged with shafts vertically
installed. The impellers shall be of stainless steel mechanically balanced and keyed to shaft.
Renewable guide rings are to be provided in the casting, keyed to prevent rotation.

Pumps shall be driven by elevated in-line TEFC squirrel cage motors via extended vertical
shafted complete with universal couplings.

The shafts shall be stainless steel. Stainless steel sleeves shall be provided to protect the shaft in
the water space and through the sealing glands. The sleeves shall be keyed to prevent rotation
and secured against axial movement.

The bearings shall be of ball or roller type protected against ingress of water, dirt and other
matter.

Vertical multistage pumps shall have universal flanges. Intermediate bearing, support bearing
shall be provided in the pump.

The shaft seal shall be easily serviceable and shall allow for correct adjustment and lading of
seal. Pump motors above 7.5 kW shall be equipped with a spacer coupling which allows

insulation and IP55 rating and shall be provided with built-in thermistors for protection against
over heating.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 130

SEWAGE SUBMERSIBLE PUMP

1. Submersible

These shall be fully submersible with a fully submersible motor. The pumps shall be provided
with an automatic level controller and all interconnecting power and control cabling which shall
cause the pumps to operate when the water level in the sump rises to a preset level and stop
when the preset low level is reached.

Pumps for drainage shall be single stage, single entry.

Pump shall be C.I. casing and C.I. two vane open type with dynamically balanced impeller
connected to a common shaft of the motor. The vane for sewage pump will be open type, while
for drainage pump, etc. it will be of semi open type. The MOC of the sump shall be in
accordance to schedule of quantity.
Stuffing box shall be provided with mechanical seals.

Each pump shall be provided with a suitably rated induction motor suitable for 415 volts, 3
phase, 50 Hz A.C. power supply.

Each pump shall be provided with in built liquid level controller for operating the pump
between predetermined levels.

The pumping set shall be for stationary application and shall be provided with pump connector
unit. The delivery pipe shall be joined to the pump through a rubber diaphragm, and bend and
guide pipe for easy installation.

Pump shall be provided with all accessories and devices necessary and required for the pump to
make it a complete working system.

Sump pump shall be complete with level controllers, power and control switch gear,
Auto/off/Manual switches, pumps priority selections and control and power cabling upto motor
and controller/probes etc. (Including earthing). Level control shall be such that one pump starts
on required level, 2nd pump cuts in at high level and alarms is given at extra high level. All
level controllers shall be provided with remote level indications.

Motor Design
The pump motor shall be a squirrel cage induction, housed in air filled water-tight enclosure.
Oil filled motors are not acceptable.
-8
grade 2) for submersible type.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 131

The stator shall be heat shrunk fitted into the enclosure and shall not use bolts, pins or other
fasteners that penetrate through the stator enclosure. The starter shall be equipped with a
thermal switch embedded in series in the coils of the stator windings to protect the stator from
wheel.

The motors shall be designed for continuous running duty type at 415 volts, 3 phase, 50 Hz
power supply and capable of sustaining a minimum of 20 starts/stops per hour.

Between stator housing and pump, tandem seal arrangement will be provided with an oil barrier.
Both seals run in oil, allowing dry running without seal damage. Both seals shall be of the
rubber bellows or metallic below type with positive drive between shaft and rotating seal face.

ROAD WORKS

General

Road works in general shall be constructed according to the requirements to the various
specifications and codes of practices of the Indian Roads Congress.Works such as earthwork,
masonry, concreting and the like, wherever they occur in association with construction of roads,
shall be governed by the respective specifications of these series.

Trenching and Preparation of Subgrade

The surface of the formation of width equal to that of soling coat shall first be cut to a depth
below the proposed finished level equal to the combined depth of soling and wearing coat, (due
allowance being made for consolidation), and dressed parallel to the finished profile. Any roots of
bushes, trees etc., shall be taken out to the full depth and the cavities thus formed shall be filled
up and rammed. The subgrade shall then be consolidated with a road roller true to proper camber
and grade, and surplus earth shall be disposed off as directed by the Engineer.
Boulder Soling
Boulders shall be hand packed true to camber and grade and shall be of the thickness specified.
The boulders shall be laid in such a manner that the gap in between them is reduced to a
minimum.It shall then be rolled with a power roller of not less than 10 tons, so that the boulders
are well locked together and the top surface of the soling is perfectly true to camber and grade.
Any disturbance in grade or camber shall be rectified. The top surface shall then be blinded with
atleast 5 cm of moorum of approved quality or any other approved material, and rolled wet to
obtain proper compaction. The Contractor shall supply camber board, spirit level, straight edge
etc., at site for checking the camber and grade at any time during the execution of work.

Kerbs

Concrete or stone kerbs, where shown in drawings, shall be fixed in position after laying and
consolidation of soling. They shall be fixed true to line and level and secured and position by
approved means.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 132

Water Bound Macadam Surfacing

The construction of water bound macadam shall be carried out according to IRC:19,"Standard
Specification and Code of Practice for Water Bound Macadam".

Preparation of Base and Shoulders

The subgrade shall be reshaped to the required grade and camber. Where water bound macadam
is to be laid over an existing black top surface, 50 mm x 50 mm furrows shall be cut in the
existing surface at 1 m intervals inclined 45 degree to the center line of the carriageway, before
laying of coarse aggregates. Necessary arrangements shall be made for the lateral confinement of
aggregates by constructing shoulders in advance.

Spreading Coarse Aggregate

The coarse aggregates shall be spread uniformly and evenly upon the prepared base in required
quantities from stock piles along the roadside or directly from vehicles. In no case shall these be
dumped in heaps directly on the base. The aggregates shall be spread to proper profile by using
templates placed across the road about 6 mm apart.Where possible, mechanical devices shall be
used to spread the aggregates uniformly.The water bound macadam layer shall be constructed in
layers of not more than 75 mm thickness. However, the Engineer may permit courses of 100 mm
compacted thickness to be constructed in a single layer. Each layer shall be tested by depth
blocks. No segregation of large or fine particles shall be allowed.

Rolling

The coarse aggregates spread as described above shall be compacted to full width by rolling with
either three wheel power roller of 8 to 10 tonnes capacity or an equivalent vibratory roller. The
weight of roller shall depend on the type of coarse aggregate. The rolling shall begin from edges
and after the edges have been compacted, progress gradually towards the center, parallel to the
center line of the road, uniformly lapping each proceeding rear wheel track by one half width. On
super elevated portions, rolling shall commence from the lower edge. Where screenings are to be
applied, rolling shall be discontinued when the aggregates are partially compacted with sufficient
voids to permit application of screenings. Where screenings are not to be applied, as in the case of
crushable aggregates compaction shall be continued until the aggregates are thoroughly keyed,
with no creeping of stones ahead of the roller. Slight sprinkling of water may be done during
rolling, if necessary. Rolling shall not be done when the subgrade is soft or yielding nor when it
causes a wave like motion in the base course. If irregularities develop during rolling, which
exceed 12 mm when tested with a 3m straight edge, the surface shall be loosened and aggregates
added or removed before rolling again. The surface shall be checked by template for camber. In
no case shall screenings be used to make up depressions.

Application of Screenings

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 133

After coarse aggregates have been rolled, screenings to fill the interstices shall be applied
gradually over the surface in thin layers. Dry rolling shall be done when the screenings are being
spread, so that the jarring effect of roller causes them to settle into the voids of the coarse
aggregates. Damp and wet screenings shall not be used and the spreading, rolling and brooming
of screenings shall be taken up on sections which can be completed within one day's operation.

Sprinkling and Grouting

After application of screenings, the surface shall be copiously sprinkled with water,swept and
rolled. The sprinkling, sweeping and rolling operations shall be continued and additional
screenings applied where necessary until the coarse aggregates are well blended and firmly set
and a grout of screenings and water form ahead of the wheels of the roller.

Application of Binding Material

After the application of screenings, binding material, where it is required to be used, shall be
applied at a uniform and slow rate in two or more successive thin layers to a thickness of 2.5 cm.
After each application of binding material, the surface shall be copiously sprinkled with water
and the resulting slurry swept in with brooms, so as to fill the voids properly. This shall be
followed by rolling with a 8-10 tonne roller, during which, water shall be applied to the wheels to
wash down the binding material that may get stuck to them. The spreading of binding material,
sprinkling of water, sweeping with brooms and rolling shall continue until the slurry of binding
material and water forms a wave ahead of the wheels of moving roller.

Setting and Drying

After final compaction the road shall be allowed to cure overnight. Next morning, hungry spots
shall be filled with screenings or binding material, lightly sprinkled with water and rolled. No
traffic shall be allowed till the macadam sets.

Surface Evenness

The surface evenness of completed water bound macadam course in longitudinal direction shall
be within 12 mm when tested with a 3 m straight edge and in cross profile within 8 mm when
checked with a template.
Bituminous Pavements

Bitumen premix carpet

Surface preparation
Waterbound macadam surface on which black topping is to be provided shall be thoroughly
cleaned of dust, loose materials, caked mud and other foreign material with the help of wire
brush, chisel, picks etc. Cleaning shall be such as to expose the stone metal to a depth of 1 to 2
mm without dislodging the interlock of the metal. All dust and other materials thus removed shall

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 134

be thrown away at a suitable place as directed by the Engineer. Any potholes, depressions and
undulations found after cleaning shall be made good with premixed chippings, and well rammed.

Tack coat

Just before the application of tack coat, the surface shall be thoroughly cleaned by gunny bags.
Bitumen heated to 177 degree to 188 degree 'C' shall be spread on the prepared surface uniformly
at the rate of 1 kg/sqm. by means of sprayers. It shall be applied just ahead of and keeping pace
with, laying of premix carpet.

Premix carpet

In preparing premix carpet the following method shall be adopted.Bitumen heated to a

temperature of 177 degree 'C' to 188 degree 'C' shall be first mixed in an asphalt mixer with hot
metal chips at the rate of 60 kg/m3 of metal and thoroughly mixed, till chips are completely
coated with bitumen. Sand shall then be added and a further quantity of hot bitumen at the rate of
110 kg/cbm of sand shall be added to the mixer and mixed till complete coating of aggregate with
bitumen is obtained.The Premix shall be emptied on to wheel barrows or stretchers and carried to
the site of work. It shall then be spread uniformly on the prepared surface with rakes, to the
desired thickness and camber. When the premix has been laid for a length of 15-20 meters it shall
be rolled. Rolling shall commence from edges and proceed towards the center. The roller wheels
shall be moistened continuously so as to prevent metal chips sticking to it. After preliminary
rolling, all honeycombs shall be filled up with smaller size precoated chips, and rolled again.
Camber and grade shall be checked at every stage to ensure correctness, and any defect found
shall be rectified.

Asphaltic concrete
Asphaltic concrete surface course shall be prepared, laid and finished in accordance with the
Indian Roads Congress "Tentative Specification for 4 cm Asphaltic Concrete Surface Course",
IRC : 29.
Surface evenness

The finished surface of premix carpet and asphaltic concrete shall be tested with a straight edge
4.5 m long and any irregularity greater than 6 mm shall be corrected.

Cement Concrete Roads

Cement concrete roads shall be constructed in accordance with IRC : 15, "Standard Specification
and Code of Practice for Construction of Concrete Roads".

Berms

Shoulders and berms shall be prepared as shown on the drawings. Work on making berms shall
not lag more than 100 meters behind the water bound macadam consolidation. Suitable drains
shall be cut on the berms so that the water bound macadam surface is kept drained till bituminous
macadam is laid.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 135

Kerbs

Kerbs shall be laid and set in place before completing the bituminous or concrete wearing surface
as well as the wearing surface of footpath sitting shall be done in mortar where so specified with
Schedule of Items. They shall be laid and set in such a way as to obtain straight lines in the
finished work, the top surface matching with the finished surface of footpath.Where the road edge
curve, the kerbs shall follow such curve.Gaps shall be left as shown in drawings or as may be
required to provide for drainage

Barbed Wire Fencing

Materials
Galvanized barbed wire

Barbed wire shall be 2.24 mm dia 2 ply lines with 4 points barbes 7.5 cm apart and shall be
properly galvanized and shall be obtained from the approved manufacturer.( in case
Specifications are provided in Job schedule, the same prevails)

Other materials
The specifications of materials, for angle iron posts, concrete works, plasters, if any, and
for other works, shall conform to the requirements as specified by SIC

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 136

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR PRECAST CE M E NT

CONCRETE INTERLOCKING PAVER BLOCKS
1. Scope Of Work.

2. Technical Specification

1. Paver Block Manufacturing Facilities.

2. Raw Materials.
3. Specifications for coloured Paver Blocks
4. Specifications for reflective type Paver Blocks
5. Paver Block Characteristics.
6. Paver Block Dimensions.
7. Testing of Paver Blocks.
8. Laying of Paver Blocks.
9. Laying Patterns.
I. Scope Of Work

The scope of work includes manufacturing , supplying and laying of precast paver
blocks at various Retail outlets. The work includes:

1.1 Verification of the existing site condition and advising our project incharge to lay
suitable base course if required. Contractors are required to satisfy themselves with
quality of sub-grade, sub-base course before the paver blocks are laid and suggest
strengthening if required .

1.2 Clearing the site by removing all obstacles such as stones, debris etc. for laying of paver
blocks.

1.3 Manufacturing of paver blocks in the plant as per requirements in technical specification
enclosed.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 137

1.4 Supplying of paver blocks at site , including handling at both ends .

1.5 Laying of paver blocks at site as per requirement in technical specification, within shortest
possible time .The site being existing operating Retail Outlets , care should be taken to
ensure that the operation is not closed . The job of laying may required to be carried out
during night also .

1.6 Testing of paver blocks through reputed Govt./Non Govt. Test house and submission of
test results as per requirements in technical specifications. HPCL reserves the right to
carryout tests at random. Cost for such tests to be borne by party.

1. The contractor shall guarantee that all material and components designed,fabricated ,supplied
and laid by him shall be free from any type of defect due to faulty material and/or
workmanship/laying for a period of One year from the date of completion of work at
individual sites. However, free Maintenance for two years shall be rendered by the
contractor.

II. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS.

II.1 Paver Block Manufacturing Facilities

The Paver Block shall be made in factory with following minimum facilities:

II.1.1 Concrete Blockmaking Machines:

The machine should be capable of producing high quality Paver Blocks by obtaining high
level of compaction by application of hydraulic compaction and also by high intensity
vibration to the moulds. The machine should have automatic control panel for uniformity
in strength.

II.1.2 Concrete Batching & Mixing Plant:

The concrete Mix Design should be followed for each batch of materials. The concrete
ingredient should be mixed in concrete Batching & Mixing plant. The plant should
equipped with automatic control panel for maintaining water cement ratio from batch to
batch to obtain concrete of uniform quality and strength. The plant should be equipped
with adequate mechanism for mechanised loading of raw materials into mixer and
conveyor belt for transportation of concrete from mixer to concrete block making
machine to maintain quality of wet cement.

II.1.3 Curing:
The factory should have well designed curing area to ensure adequate curing of paver blocks.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 138

II.1.4 Laboratory
The factory should have the following:
( i) Compression testing machine of adequate capacity
( ii) Other tools and equipment for testing raw materials and paver blocks.
(iii) (1). Systematic record of test results of various paver blocks manufactured in the
factory .
(2) Concrete Mix Design for various grade of concrete used for making of paver
roads

II.TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS.

2. Raw Materials.

II.2.1 CEMENT

The cement used in the manufacture of high quality precast concrete paving blocks shall be
conforming to IS 12269 (53 grade ordinary portland cement) or IS 8112 (43 grade ordinary
portland cement) .
The minimum cement content in concrete used for making paver blocks should be 380
kg/CuM.

II.2.2 AGGREGATES

The fine and coarse aggregates shall consist of naturally occurring crushed or uncrushed
materials which, apart from the grading requirements comply with IS 383-1970.The fine
aggregates used shall contain a minimum of 25% natural silicon sand. Lime stone
aggregates shall not be used. Aggregates shall contain not more than 3% by weight of clay
& shall be free from deleterious salts and contaminants.

II.2.3 WATER

The water shall be clean and free from any deleterious matter. It shall meet the requirements
stipulated in IS:456- 2000.The amount of water to be used in concrete mix should be based
on optimum water content required for consistency of cement paste and having no slump
depending upon the compaction capacity of the block making machine. The water cement
ratio shall not be more than 0.36.

II.2.4 OTHER MATERIALS

Any other materials/ingredients used in the concrete shall conform to respective BIS
Specifications.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 139

II. Technical Specifications

3. SPECIFICATIONS FOR COLOURED PAVER BLOCKS

Coloured concrete paver blocks shall be manufactured as per attached specifications using
approved colour Pigment of BAYER make BAYFERROX IRONOXIDE PIGMENTS
with minimum colour pigment of 3 % by weight of cement. The colour shall be RED or as
selected by HPCL from colour pigment manufacturar s shade card & sample shall be approved
by HPCL before commencement of the work. Grey OPC 53 grade /43 grade cement shall be
used for coloured pavers to obtain the desired shade. The job also includes providing 50 mm
thick sand bedding to match the shade of the paver block.

The colour of the Paver Block shall be guaranteed against fading of colour for a period of 12
months from the date of laying of the same at site.

All other technical specifications & procedure for testing,laying & sampling of coloured pavers
will be as per attachment.

II. Technical Specifications .

4. SPECIFICATIONS FOR REFLECTIVE TYPE PAVER

BLOCKS

The Paver blocks shall be made in two layers . Top layer shall be 10 to 15 mm & balance for
bottom layer. Both the layers shall be mixed to achieve desired compressive strength mentioned
under Testing of paver blocks.

Top layer shall have 10 to 15 mm uniform thickness made out of Granite/Quartz crushed
aggregated of cubical sizes not more that 6 mm and downsize( shall have good abrasion
resistant properties) as wearing layer and relective coating & cement shall be mixed with UV
resistant pigment and colour as per HPCL s selection and without impairing the characteristic
properties of cement. Top surface shall be made anti skid (indentations) with lacquer coating
finish. (Pls. Also refer clause no.3,under Chapter II Technical specifications.)

Approved admixture (confirming to IS9103) ,if required, shall be used as per manufacturer s
recommendation & as per IS 456.

Compaction -Compaction of moulds shall be done by mechanical vibrators. The vibrator

should vibrate in both horizontal & vertical directions simultaneously. Mould should be
retained minimum 1& 1/2 minutes on table type vibrator s platform.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 140

Curing : The rubber moulds shall be placed tightly closed so that they are not exposed to
outside atmosphere. Steam or mist curing to be done for minimum 24 hours period.

After curing the pavers shall be spread for spread for drying and then HPCL approved
laquer coating shall be applied to give the top surface of block a smooth & shiny finish
free of pot holes. Laquer coating to be applied as per manufacturer s specifications.

The lacquer coating & colour of the Paver Block shall be guaranteed for a period of 12 months
from the date of laying of the same at site .the top surface shall have no pin holes & should be
dense. The coloured pigment & laquer coating should not be harmful to concrete.
All other technical specifications & procedure for testing, laying & sampling of reflective
type pavers will be as per attachment.
II. Technical Specifications .

5. Pavers Block Characteristics

1. The concrete pavers should confirm to IS 2185,IS 456 & IS 1238 or ASTM C 936 or
CSA A 231.2-95.

2. The concrete pavers should be unipaver shape.

3.. The surface should be of anti skid type. The top surface shall have no pinholes &
should be densed. The coloured pigment & laquer coating,if provided, should not be
harmful to concrete.

4. The concrete pavers should have perpendicularities after release from the mould
and the same should be retained until the laying.

5. . The paver should have uniform chamfers to facilitate easy drainage of surface
run off.

6. The pavers should have uniform interlocking space of 2mm to 3mm to ensure
compacted sand filling after vibration on the paver surface.

7. The concrete mixing to be done in batching plants. Rubber moulds to be used to achieve
better edges.

8. The concrete mix design should be followed for each batch of materials
separately and automatic batching plant is to be used to achieve uniformity in
strength and quality.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 141

9. The pavers shall be manufactured in single layer or double layer.

10. Compaction -Compaction of moulds shall be done by mechanical vibrators. The vibrator
should vibrate in both horizontal & vertical directions simultaneously. Mould should be
retained minimum 1& 1/2 minutes on table type vibrator s platform.

11. Curing : The rubber moulds shall be placed tightly closed so that they are not exposed to
outside atmosphere. Steam or mist curing to be done for minimum 24 hours period.

12. After curing the pavers shall be spread for spread for drying .

13. Skilled labour should be employed for laying blocks to ensure line and level of
laying, desired shape of the surface and adequate compaction of the sand in the
Joints.

14. The pavers shall be of cement grey colour without any pigment or coloured
Pavers or relective type as per attached specifications.

II.4.9 The pavers are to be skirted all round with kerbing using solid concrete blocks of size
100mm X 200mm X 400mm. The kerbing should be embedded for 100mm depth. The
concrete used for kerbing shall be cured properly for 7 days minimum.

II. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS.

6. PAVER BLOCK DIMENSIONS
Thickness 80 mm
Shape Uniregular (Uniform Shape with no Hollow Or
Cracks)
Chamfer 4mm to 6mm along top edges
Colour A. Natural cement grey colour without use of
any pigment
B. For coloured pavers refer Specifications
for coloured pavers
C. For reflective type pavers ,pls. Refer
Specfications for reflective type pavers.

Dimensional Tolerance (+/-) 2mm for Length & width, (+/-)3 mm for
Height (Thickness)

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 142

II. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS.

7. Testing of Paver Blocks.

SPECIFICATION
SR.NO * TEST Average Values
(Average Of Minimum Five Samples/ Site )

1. Compressive Strength Min. 40 N/Sqmm for 80mm thick

BS 6717

2. Flexural Strength Minimum 4.5 N/Sqmm

3. Abrasion Resistance Maximum 1.5

4. Water Absorption Maximum 5.00 %

ASTM C 936

5. Minimum Cement Content 380 Kg/CuM

Visual Inspection: All units should be sound and free of defects .

Resistance to freezing & thawing : Concrete Pavers should have adequate resistance to
freezing and thawing. When tested in laboratory in accordance with section 8 of method C67 of
ISO-DIS-4108,specimens shall have no breakage and loss in dry weight of any individual unit
should not be more than 1.0% , when subjected to 50 cycles of freezing and thawing . The test
shall be conducted not more than 12 months prior to delivery of units.

* Sampling and Testing Procedure As Per Enclosed Specifications

Sampling and Testing procedures for Paver Blocks
Sample size :
INTERNAL - Average of minimum 3 samples per 5000 Blocks
EXTERNAL - Minimum 2 Blocks per 10000 blocks . Average of minimum
8 blocks per site
1. Sampling For Testing
Sampling for testing of paver blocks shall be done in accordance with Appendix-A.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 143

2. Compressive Strength
Testing for compressive strength shall be undertaken in accordance with Appendix-B. The
average compressive strength of the blocks tested shall be min.40 N/Sqmm for 80 mm thick.
3. Abrasion Resistance
Testing for abrasion shall be in accordance with IS 1237 (Specifications for Cement Concrete
Floor Tiles) - Appendix C.
4. Flexural Strength
Testing for flexural shall be in accordance with IS 1237 (Specifications
for Cement Concrete Floor Tiles) - Appendix D.
5. Water Absorption
Testing for water absorption shall be in accordance with IS 2185:1979 :Part 1( Specifications
for Concrete Masonry Units ) - Appendix E.
II.TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
8. LAYING OF PAVER BLOCKS.
8.1.1 PRIMING
The contactors are required to verify the existing WBM driveway surface and ascertain the
CBR value . Accordingly the total sub grade thickness required to achieve the desired CBR
value to be advised to HPCL within seven days of receipt of call-up . HPCL shall, through
regular vendors arrange to carryout such WBM, wherever required. Before taking over the sites
the Paver block laying party is required to verify the stabilization of the surface with CBR values
.
It will be the responsibility of the Paver block party to ensure that the Manholes/ Pipeline/ Cable
trenches / circular drainage s ystem etc. raised to driveway level using the requisite materials as
per instruction of Engg In Charge (EIC) of HPCL . The areas of potholes /deep depressions at
the isolated locations also have to be filled up before laying the paver blocks. No extra payments
will be made for this purpose. The area of raised manholes shall be included in the
measurement of overall area of paver blocks for the purpose of payment.

It will be the responsibility of the contractors to ensure that udulations on the paver blocks are
eliminated after the traffic is allowed on it . Proper slope for draining of water needs to be
ensured by the contractor. All necessary materials , tools , tackles are required to be arranged
by the contractor.

8.1.2 BEDDING SAND COURSE

The bedding sand shall consist of a clean well graded sand passing through 4.75 mm sieve and
suitable to concrete manufacture .The bedding should be from either a single source or blended
to achieve the following grading.

IS SIEVE SIZE % PASSING

9.52 mm 100

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 144

4.75 mm 95-100
2.36 mm 80-100
1.18 mm 50-100
600 microns 25-60
300 microns 10-30
150 microns 5-15
75 microns 0-10
______________________________________________________________________

Contractor shall be responsible to ensure that single-sized, gap-graded sands or sands

containing an excessive amount of fines or plastic fines are not used. The sand particles should
preferably be sharp not rounded , as sharp sand possess higher strength and resist the migration
of sand from under the block to less frequently areas. Even though sharp sands are relatively
more difficult to compact than rounded sands , the use of sharp sands is preferred for the more
heavily trafficked driveways. The sand use for bedding shall be free of any deletorious
soluble salts or other contaminants likely to cause efflorescence .
The sand shall be of uniform moisture content and within 4%-8% when spread and shall be
protected against rain when stockpiled prior to spreading . Saturated sand shall not be used.

The bedding sand shall be spread loose in a uniform layer as per drawing . The compacted
uniform thickness shall be of 50mm and within + 5mm .Thickness variation shall not be used
to correct irregularities in the base course surface .

The spread sand shall be carefully maintained in a loose dry condition and protected against pre-
compaction both prior to and following screeding .Any pre-compacted sand or screeded sand
left overnight shall be loosened before further laying of paving units take place.
Sand shall be slightly screeded in a loose condition to the predetermined depth only slightly
ahead of the laying of the paving unit.

Any depressions in the screeded sand exceeding 5mm shall be loosened , raked and rescreeded
before laying of paving units .
8.1.3 LAYING OF INTERLOCKING PAVING UNITS :
Paving units shall be laid in herringbone laying pattern throughout the pavement. Once the
laying pattern has been established , it shall continue without interruption over the entire
pavement surface. Cutting of blocks, the use of infill concrete or discontinuities in laying pattern
is not be permitted in other than approved locations .
Paving units shall be placed on the uncompacted screeded sand bed to the nominated laying
pattern, care being taken to maintain the specified bond throughout the job. The first row shall
be located next to an edge restraint. Specially manufactured edge paving units are permitted or
edge units may be cut using a power saw, a mechanical or hydraulic guillotine, bolster or other
approved cutting machine.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 145

Paving units shall be placed to achieve gaps nominally 2 to 3mm wide between adjacent paving
joints. No joint shall be less than 1.5 mm nor more than 4mm. Frequent use of string lines shall
be used to check alignment. In this regard, the laying face shall be checked at least every two
metres as the face proceeds. Should the face become out of alignment, it must be corrected prior
to initial compaction and before further laying job is proceeded with .

In each row , all full units shall be laid first. Closure units shall be cut and fitted subsequently.
Such closure units shall consist of not less than 25% of a full unit.

To infill spaces between 25mm and 50mm wide, a concrete having 1:2:4 cement : sand :coarse
aggregate mix and a strength of 45 N/Sqmm shall be used. Within such mix the nominal
aggregate size shall not exceed one third the smallest dimension of the infill space. For smaller
spaces dry packed mortar shall be used.

Except where it is necessary to correct any minor variations occurring in the laying bond, the
paving units shall not be hammered into position. Where adjustment of position is necessary
care shall be taken to avoid premature compaction of the sand bedding.

8.1.4 INITIAL COMPACTION

After laying the paving units, they shall be compacted to achieve consolidation of the sand
bedding and brought to design levels and profiles by not less than two (2) passes of a suitable
plate compactor.

The compactor shall be a high-frequency, low amplitude mechanical flat plate vibrator having
plate area sufficient to cover a minimum of twelve paving units.

Prior to compaction all debris shall be removed from the surface.

Compaction shall proceed as closely as possible following laying and prior to any traffic.
Compaction shall not, however, be attempted within one metre of the laying face. Compaction
shall continue until lipping has been eliminated between adjoining units. Joints shall then be
filled and recompacted as described in Clause 6.1.5.

All work further than one metre from the laying face shall be left fully compacted at the
completion of each day s laying.

Any units that are structurally damaged prior to or during compaction shall be immediately
removed and replaced .

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 146

Sufficient plate compactors shall be maintained at the paving site for both bedding compaction
and joint filling.
8.1.5 JOINT FILLING AND FINAL COMPACTION
As soon as practical after compaction and in any case prior to the termination of work on that
day and prior to the acceptance of construction traffic, sand for joint filling shall be spread over
the pavement.
Joint sand shall pass a 2.36 mm (No 8) sieve and shall be free of soluble salts or contaminants
likely to cause efflorescence. The sane shall comply with the following grading limits:

IS SIEVE SIZE % PASSING

2.36 mm 100
1.18 mm 90-100
600 microns 60-90
300 microns 30-60
150 microns 15-30
75 microns 10-20
______________________________________________________________________

The Contractor shall supply a sample of the jointing sand to be used in the contract prior to
delivering any such material to site for incorporation into the works. Certificates of test results
issued by a recognised testing laboratory confirming that the samples conform to the
requirements of this specification shall accompany the sample .

The jointing sand shall be broomed to fill the joints. Excess sand shall then be removed from the
pavement surface and the jointing sand shall be compacted with not less than one (1) pass the the
plate vibrator and joints refilled with sand to full depth. This procedure shall be repeated until all
joints are completely filled with sand. No traffic shall be permitted to use the pavement until all
joints have been completely filled with sand and compacted.

Both the sand and paving units shall be dry when sand is spread and broomed into the joints to
prevent premature setting of the sand.

The difference in level (lipping) between adjacent units shall not exceed 3mm with not more
than 1% in any 3m x 3m area exceeding 2mm. Pavements which is deformed beyond above
limits after final compaction , shall be taken out and reconstructed to the satisfaction of the
Engineer.
- - - - - - -- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -- - - - - - - ------------
8.1.6 Edge Restraint
Edge restraints need to be sufficiently robust to withstand override by the anticipated traffic, to
withstand thermal expansion and to prevent loss of the laying course material from beneath the

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 147

surface course. The edge restraint should present a vertical face down to the level of the
underside of the laying course.

The surface course should not be vibrated until the edge restraint, together with any bedding or
concrete launching, has gained sufficient strength. It is essential that edge restraints are
adequately secured.

II. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

9. Laying Patterns.

Details of laying pattern should be specified before commencement of laying.

appendix -A

Sampling of Paver blocks.

1. Method of sampling
Before laying paver blocks, each designated section comprising not more than 50000 blocks,
shall be divided into ten approximately equal groups. Three blocks shall be drawn from each
group.
2. Marking and Identification
All samples shall be clearly marked at the time of sampling in such a way that the designated
section of part thereof, and the consignment represented by the sample, are clearly defined.
The sample shall be dispatched to the approved test laboratory taking precaution to avoid
damage to the paving in transit. Protect the paving from damage and contamination until they
have been tested. The testing shall be carried as soon as possible, after the sample has been
taken. As soon as practicable after sampling. The samples shall be stored in water at 20
degree C 5 degree C for 24 hours prior to testing.
APPENDIX B
Procedure for Testing of Compressive Strength of Paver Blocks.
Reference : BS 6717 Part-I (1993) Specification for Paving Blocks

B.1 TESTING MACHINE : The testing machines shall be of suitable capacity for the test and
capable of applying the load at the rate specified. It shall comply, as regards repeatability and
accuracy with the requirements of relevant ISI specs.

B.2 PROCEDURE : The sample specimens shall be tested in wet condition after being stored for
at least 24 hours, in water maintained at a temperature of 20 degrees C 5 degrees C. before the
specimens are submerged in water, the necessary area shall be determined by the method
described in Appendix A .
The plates of the testing machine shall be wiped clean and any loose grit or other material
removed from the contact faces of the specimen. Plywood nominally 4mm thick, shall be used

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 148

as packing between the upper and lower faces of the specimen and the machine plates, and
these boards shall be larger than the specimen by a margin of at least 5mm at all points. Fresh
packing shall be used for each specimen tested. The specimen shall be placed in the machine
with the wearing surface in a horizontal plane and in such away that the axes of the specimen
are aligned with those of the machine plates. The load shall be applied without shock and
increased continuously at the rate of Approximately 15 N/sqmm per minute until no greater load
can be sustained. The maximum load applied to the specimen shall be recorded.

B.3 CALCULATION OF CORRECTED STRENGTH : The compressive strength of each block

specimen shall be calculated by dividing the maximum load by full cross section area and
multiplying by an appropriate factors.

Thickness And Chamfer Correction Factors

For Compressive Strength
Work Size Thickness in mm Correction Factors
Plain block Chamfered block
60 1.00 1.06
80 1.12 1.18
100 1.18 1.24
B.4 COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH CALCULATION : The average corrected compressive
strength for the designated block section shall be calculated.
APPENDIX - C
Method for Determining of Wet Transverse Strength
( Flexural Strength )
1. The pavers shall be tested wet after soaking in water for 24 hours.
2. The specimen shall be placed horizontally on two parallel steel supports, with wearing
surface upwards and its sides parallel to the supports. At least one of the supports shall be
self-adjusting.
3. The load shall be applied by means of a steel rod parallel to the supports and mid way
between them.
4. Plywood padding about 3mm thick and 20mm wide shall be placed between the paver
and each of the supports and between the paver and the steel rod.
5. The load shall be applied gradually and at a uniform rate.
6. The load P which caused the breaking of the paver shall be recorded.
7. The wet transverse strength F shall be calculated as follows:
F=3PL / 2BT
Where,
P- breaking load in N,
L- span between supports in mm,
B- with of the paver in mm,
T- thickness of the paver in mm.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 149

8. The average wet transverse strength shall be reported.

APPENDIX D

Method for Determining of Resistance to wear

(Abrasion Resistance)
The grinding path of the disc of the abrasion-testing machine shall be event strewn with
20 g. of the abrasive powder. The specimen shall than be fixed in the holding device with
the surface to be ground facing the disc, and loaded at the center with 300N (30 kgf). The
grinding disc shall than be up in motion at a speed of 30 rev/min and the abrasive powder
is continuously fed back on to the grinding pat so that it remains uniformly distributed in
a track corresponding to the width of the test piece. After every 22 revolutions, the disc
shall be stopped the abraded tile powder and the remainder of the abrasive powder shall
be removed from the disc, and fresh abrasive powder in quantities of 20g applied each
time. After every 22 revolutions the specimen shall be turned about the vertical axis
through an angle of 90 in the clockwise direction and it should be repeated 9 times
thereby giving total number of revolutions of 220. the disc, the abrasive powder and the
specimen shall be kept dry throughout the duration of the test. After the abrasion is over,
the specimen shall be reweighed to the nearest 0.1 g. it shall then be placed in the
thickness measuring apparatus once again in an identical manner and the reading taken
with the same position and setting of the dial gauge as for the measurement before
abrasion.
The wear shall be determined from the difference in readings obtained by the measuring
instrument before and the abrasion of the specimen. The value shall be checked up with
the average loss in thickness of the specimen obtained by the following formula.

T = ( W1-W2) V1
W1 X A
Where,
T = average loss in thickness in mm,
W = initial mass of specimen in g,
W = final mass of abraded specimen g,
V = initial volume of specimen in mm
A = surface area of the specimen in mm
APPENDIX E

Method for the determination of water Absorption

1. The test specimens shall be completely immersed in water at room temperature
for 24 hours.
2. The specimens shall then be weighed, while suspended by a metal wire and
completely submerged in water.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 150

3. They shall be removed from the water and allowed to drain for one minute.

4. Visible surfaces water being removed with a damp cloth , and immediately
weighed.

5. Subsequent to saturation, all specimens shall be dried in a ventilated oven at 100 to

115 C for not less than 24 hours and until two successive weighting at intervals of 2
hours show an increment of loss not greater than 0.2 percent of the last previously
determined mass of the specimen.

6. Calculate the absorption as follows:

Absorption, kg/m = A B X 1000
A-C
Absorption, percent = A B X 100
B
Where,
A = wet mass of unit in kg,
B = dry mass of unit in kg, and
C = suspended immersed mass of unit in kg.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 151

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR FABRICATION, ERECTION AND PAINTING OF

STEEL STRUCTURES AND CHAIN LINK FENCING

GENERAL
This specification shall apply to general steelwork, chain link fencing and other structures. The
structures shall include platforms, ladders, staircases, canopies, sheds, etc.
FABRICATION OF STEEL STRUCTURES

SCOPE OF WORK
The scope of work under fabrication includes, but not limited to, the following:

a) Preparation and submission of modification/rectification sketches, As-Built drawings erection

drawings, bill of materials, and shipping documents for approval of HPCL
b) Cold straightening of section and plates, whenever they are bent and kinked.
c) Fabrication of all steel structural components covered under tender drawings, design drawings
and generally described under the scope of the project.
d) Making arrangements for and conducting tests such as chemical analysis, physical and
mechanical tests on raw materials where specified/as directed by HPCL.
e) Control Assembly of steel structural components at shop, wherever required.
f) Preparation of steel structural surfaces for painting as provided in the specifications/drawings.
g) Application for one primer coat of painting at shop, as specified in the design
drawing/specifications.
h) Loading, transportation from fabrication workshop to site of erection and unloading of all steel
structural components/units/assemblies.
i -

MATERIALS

Structural Steel

Structural steel and other related materials for construction shall conform to IS standards and of
approved make only
Due to non-availability of specified materials, suitable substitutions may be provided with the
consent of HPCL Such substitut -
All the items are to be cut as per requirements of the drawing. If joints are to be provided in any
item in order to meet requirements of size and shape, cutting plan showing locations of joints
shall b -

Rolling and cutting tolerances shall be as per IS:1852-1985.

Only tested materials shall be used unless use of untested materials for certain secondary
structural members is permitted by HPCL. If test certificate for the material is not available from
the main producer, the following tests shall be carried out at the discretion of HPCL:
a) Chemical Composition
b) Mechanical Properties
c) Weldability test

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 152

Bolts and Nuts

Black hexagonal bolts, nuts and lock nuts shall conform to IS:1363-1992.

Electrodes

Electrodes shall conform to IS:814-1991.

STORING OF MATERIALS

Materials shall be stored and stacked properly ensuring that place is properly drained and is free
from dirt. It shall be ensured that no damage is caused due to improper stacking
MATERIAL PREPARATION
Cut edges shall be finished smooth by grinding or machining wherever necessary. Sufficient
allowance (3mm to 5mm) should be kept in the items incase machining is necessary.

Cutting may be effected by gas cutting, shearing, cropping or sawing.

Straightening and bending shall be done in cold condition as far as practicable.
.
DRILLING AND PUNCHING OF HOLES
Drilling and punching of holes for bolts shall be done as per clause no.11.2.4 of IS:800-
1984,unless otherwise specified by HPCL.

Drifting of holes for bolts during assembly shall not cause enlargement of holes beyond
permissible limit or damage the metal.
Holes for bolted connection should match well to permit easy entry of bolts. Gross mismatch of
holes shall be avoided.

ASSEMBLY FOR FABRICATION

Fabrication of all structural steelwork shall be in accordance with IS:800-1984 and in conformity
with various clauses of this Specification, unless otherwise specified in the drawings.
Fabrication of structures shall preferably be taken up as per the sequence of erection.
All erection units shall bear reference drawing no. at a prominent location on the structures for
easy identification at site.
Fabricated structures shall conform to tolerance as specified in this Specification and inIS:7215-
1974. In case of contradiction, tolerance specified in this Specification shall prevail.
All the components of structures shall be free from twist, bend, damage, etc.
Splice joints shall generally be of full strength butt weld and wherever possible, shall be located
at zones of minimum or substantially lesser stress.
Splice joints of flange and web should preferably be staggered.
Where necessary, washers shall be tapered or otherwise suitably shaped to give the heads of nuts
and bolts satisfactory bearing.
The threaded portion of each bolt shall project through the nut at least by one thread.
Tolerance of assembled components of structures are given

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 153

Permissible deviations from designed (true) geometrical form of the despatch elements shall be in
accordance with IS:7215-1974

WELDING

All metal arc welding shall be carried out as per IS:9595-1980.

Electrodes shall be stored in a dry place. Electrodes whose coatings are damaged due to
absorption of moisture or due any other reason shall not be used.
Recommendations of electrode manufacturer are to be strictly followed.
Welding surface shall be smooth, uniform, free from fins, tears notches or any other defect which
may adversely affect welding.
For multi-run weld deposit, the next run should be done only after thorough removal of slag and
proper cleaning of surface.
Fillet weld shall have the correct profile with smooth transition into parent metal. Dressing of
welds, if specified, shall be done by such method which does not cause grooving and other
surface defects on the weld or on the parent metal.
Fillet welds shall not be stopped at corners but shall be returned round them.
Welding shall not be done under such weather conditions which might adversely affect the
efficiency of the welding.
Ends of structural members and portions of gussets receiving welding at site shall be left
unpainted.

INSPECTION & TESTING

HPCL/Consultant shall have free access at all times to -

all reasonable facilities at all stages of preparation, fabrication and trial assemblies for satisfying
himself that the fabrication is being undertaken in accordance with the provisions of relevant
specification.
All gauges and templates, tools, apparatus, labour and assistance for checking shall be supplied
by the contractor free of charge. HPCL/Consultant may, at his discretion, check the test results

elsewhere, and should the material so tested be found to be unsatisfactory, the cost of such test
shall be borne by the Contractor.
Contractor shall make all necessary arrangements for stage inspection by HPCL/Consultant
during the fabrication at shop and incorporate all on-the-spot instructions/ changes conveyed in
writing to the Contractor.
Material improperly detailed or wrongly fabricated shall be reported to HPCL/Consultant and
shall be made good as directed. Minor misfits which can be remedied by moderate use of drift
pins, and moderate amount of reaming and slight chipping may be corrected in that manner, if in
the opinion HPCL/Consultant, the strength or appearance of the structure will not be adversely
affected. In the event HPCL/Consultant directs otherwise, the items will be rejected and a
completely new piece shall be fabricated. The cost of correcting errors shall be to the account of
the Contractor

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 154

COMPLETION DOCUMENTS

On completion of work, the Contractor shall submit to HPCL the following documents:
a)The technical documents according to which the work was carried out.
additions and alterations made during
the fabrication.
/ approved lab certificates ( in case HPCL directs)

ERECTION OF STEEL STRUCTURES

SCOPE OF WORK
In addition to provision of erection and transport equipment, the scope of work includes supply of
tools and tackles, consumables, materials, labour and supervision and shall cover the following:
a) Storing and stacking of all fabricated structural components/units/ assemblies at site storage
yards till the time of erection.
b) Transportation of structures from storage yard to site of erection, including multiple handling,
if required.
c) Fabrication of minor missing items as directed by HPCL.
e) Verification of the position of embedded anchor bolts and inserts w.r.t. line find levels,installed
by others based on Geodetic Scheme/Bench mark/ Reference co ordinates taken by the
Contractor.
f) Rectifying at site damaged portions of shop primer by cleaning and application touch-up paint.
g) Erection of structures including making connections by bolts/welding as per drawing.
h) Alignment of all structures true to line, level plumb and dimensions within specified limits of
tolerance.
i)Application at site after erection, required number of coats of primer and finishing paint as per
specification and drawing.
j) Rectification of structures as per instructions of the Engineer-Incharge

ERECTION

General
Erection shall be carried out in accordance with IS:800-1984 and other relevant standards referred
to therein.
For safe and accurate erection of structural steelwork, staging, temporary support, false work,etc.
shall be erected as required.
The fabricated materials received at erection site shall be verified with respect of marking on the
key plan/marking plan or shipping list.
Any material found damaged or defective shall be stacked separately and the damaged or
defective portions shall be painted in distinct colour for identification and the same shall be
brought to the notice of HPCL
Erection work shall be taken up after receipt of clearance from HPCL.
For safety requirements during erection, provisions in IS:7205-974, IS:7969-1975 and other
relevant Indian standards shall be followed.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 155

Erection shall be carried out with the help of maximum mechanization possible.
Prior to commencement of erection, all the erection equipment, tools, tackles, ropes, etc. shall be
tested for their load carrying capacity. Such tests may be repeated at intermediate stages also if
considered necessary and frequent visual inspection shall be done of all vulnerable areas and
components to detect damages or distress in the erection equipment, if any.
Following shall be taken care of during erection, whenever necessary:
Erected members shall be held securely in place by bolts to take care of dead load, wind load
and erection load.
All connections shall achieve free expansion and contraction of structures wherever provided.
No final bolting or welding of joints shall be done until the structure has been properly
aligned.Instrumental checking of correctness of initial setting out of structures and adjustment of
alignment shall be carried out in sequence and at different stages as required. The final levelling
and alignment shall be carried out immediately after completion of each section.
The Contractor shall design, manufacture, erect and provide falsework, staging temporary support
etc. required for safe and accurate erection of structural steelwork and shall be fullyresponsible
for the adequacy of the same.
The Contractor shall also provide facilities such as adequate temporary access ladders,gangways,
tools & tackles, instruments, etc. to HPCL/Consultant for his inspection at any stage during
erection..

PAINTING AFTER ERECTION

The painting shall be as per painting specification and instruction given on drawings.
Site painting shall not be done in frosty or foggy weather or when humidity is such as to cause
condensation on the surface to be painted

CHAIN LINK FENCING AND GATE

The scope of work shall cover:

a) Procurement and supply mesh, line wire, stretcher bar, barbed wire (if shown in the drawings)
and other accessories for chain link fencing and gate all as per specifications and drawings.
b) Loading, transportation, unloading and delivery of material for fencing and gate from place of
procurement to erection site.
c) Provision of all tools, tackles, equipment, labor, supervision and services required for the
satisfactory completion of the work specified herein and on the drawings.
d) Erection in position of the fencing and gate at all locations, all work as per specification and
drawings.

MEASUREMENTS
Structural Steel

Structural steelwork will be measured by the metric tonne and as per IS:1200(Part-8)-1993 and
IS:1200(Part-9)-1973 subject to provisions outlined below:
a) The calculation of quantities shall be based on unit weights for structural sections as given in
IS Handbooks. In the case of mild steel plates, the calculated weights shall be based on 78.5

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 156

kg/m2/centimeter thick plate. The payments will be made on the basis of weights of members
as per drawings. However, any changes on the above weights during fabrication erection,
payment shall be based on sketches approved by HPCL
b)In the event the IS does not specify any mode of measurement for a particular item of work, the
same shall be measured as per any other relevant international standard or as directed by HPCL.
c) The weight of all plates and sections shall be calculated from the approved drawing using the
minimum overall square or rectangular dimensions and theoretical weight, no deduction being
made for skew cuts, holes etc. In the case of plates, other than gussets, the actual dimensions
shown on approved drawings will apply unless approved otherwise by the purchaser based on
cutting diagram of mother plates.
d) The weight of all welding runs, bolt, stanchion base packing, cuttings to waste and rolling
margins, and coatings of paint, will be excluded from the measured weight and shall be deemed
to have been allowed for in the rates for structural steelworks quoted by the Contractor.
e) Temporary works and all other materials not included in the permanent works shall be
excluded from any measurement for payment.

AC Sheets

Asbestos Cement Corrugated sheets for roofing and side cladding shall be measured by the square
meter of net laid area, as specified and shown on the drawings.
No allowance shall be made for wastage, cutouts, overlaps, etc., in the measurement.
The unit rate shall include all fasteners, flashing and fitting such as ridges corners, aprons and
other accessories.
No deduction will be made for openings for area less than a single sheet. Also no extra payment
will be made for making openings

Material of construction (as applicable)

Unless otherwise specified in the drawing, all rolled sections and plates shall conform to Grade-A
as per IS: 2062-1992.
Steel sheets shall conform to IS:1079-1988.
Steel tubes for structural purposes shall conform to IS: 1161-1979 (Grade YST-240).
ACC sheets shall be 6mm. thick with corrugation conforming to IS: 459-1992.
All black hexagonal bolts, nuts and lock nuts shall conform to IS: 1363-1984 and IS: 1364-1983
(for precision and semi-precision hexagonal bolts). Washers shall conform to IS: 1148-1982.
Covered electrodes for arc welding shall conform to IS: 814-1991. Coding of electrodes shall be
as follows:
ER 421 'C' x for mild steel of Grade A and Grade B as per IS: 2062-1992.
.

Material for chain link fencing shall conform to IS:2721-1979. Mesh for chain link fencing shall
be of 3.15mm hot dip galvanized steel mesh wire, the diameter being measured over zinc coating.
The diameter of mesh wire shall not vary from the specified diameter by more than 0.05mm. The
material for mesh wire and line wire of chain link fencing shall conform to IS:280-1978.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 157

TESTING OF MATERIALS

The conductor shall carryout the following tests at his own expense and as directed by the
Engineer-in-Charge. Also Engineer-in-Charge reserves their right to ask the Contractor to carry
out any further tests on any material which is being used in the project.

1. WATER: Suitability for construction / concreting purposes as per IS 456-2000.

Periodicity: One test at the beginning of the project and once in every 3 months as per as IS
code.

2. SAND

Tests to be conducted

a. Particle size -Lab

b. Silt content Field

c. Bulking of sand Field

d. Percentage of Deleterious material / Organic impurities lab

Is code for material IS -383-1970

IS code for testing IS-2386 (Part 1)to IS-2386 9Part VIII)

Periodicity of testing

Whenever there is a source of supply or as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge .

Remarks

1. Silt content should not exceed 8%

2. For sand pad foundation no need of particle size distribution. Only silt & bulk content to
be carried out.

Sand (for plastering)

Tests to be conducted

a) Particle size - Lab

b) Slit content Field

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 158

c) Percentage of Deleterious / Organic impurities Lab

IS code for material IS -1542

IS code for testing IS -1727

Periodicity of testing

Same as above, Test shall be repeated for Minimum qty. 500 sq.m of plastering.

Remarks

1. Silt content not to exceed 5%

2. Sand to be sieved in sieve size 4.75 mm

3. COARSE AGGREGATE

Tests to be conducted

a. Percentage of Soft deleterious materials-Field (Visual)

b. Particle size distribution

c. Aggregate value:

1. Crushing Lab

2. Impact Lab

3. Abrasion Lab(Only for Roads)

IS code for material IS -383-1970

IS code for testing IS -2386 (Part 1) to IS 2386 (Part VIII)

Periodicity of Testing

Minimum 45 cum. Tests to be repeated for every 45 cum of coarse aggregate or part thereof.

Remarks

Percentage of soft deleterious materials. Usually visual inspection shall be carried

out. If Engineer-in-Charge / Architects has doubts the same may be tested in Lab.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 159

4. CEMENT

Tests to be conducted

a. fineness - Lab

b. Soundness- Lab

c. Setting Time- Lab

d. Compressive strength Lab

Periodicity of Testing

Minimum qty. 20 MT, Tests to be repeated for every 50 MT or part thereof or change of
supplier.

Remarks

Cement to be tested if supplied by the Contractor. cement to be tested if stored for more than 3
months.

5. CEMENT CONCRETE

Tests to be conducted

a. Slump test-Field

b. Cube strength-Lab / field

Periodicity of Testing

a. Once for minimum 5 cum.

b. Minimum 15 cum of part thereof.

Remarks

Cube strength to be taken for both 7 days as well as 28 days. Cubes of critical members (decided
by Engineer-in-Charge) shall be tested at lab.

6. REINFORCEMENT STEEL

Tests to be conducted

a. Free from defects Field (Visual)

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 160

b. Weight Lab

c. Size- Lab

d. Ultimate tensile stress Lab

e. Yield stress- Lab

f. Elongation percentage Lab

g. Bend Re-bend test-Lab

IS code for material

IS- 432 for mild steel

IS-1786 for Tor steel

IS code for testing-IS -1608

Periodicity of testing

Minimum qty. 10MT, tests shall be repeated for every 10 MT of each size (dia) or part thereof.

a. Steel shall be tested if supplied by Contractor.

b. Steel shall be tested if stored in open yard for more than one year.

NOTE: All the testing equipments / machines like sieve. Compression testing machine etc.
required for field tests shall be arranged by the party at site. In case of failure of machine. Testing
to be carried out by the Contractor at lab at no extra cost.

7. BRICKS

Tests to be conducted

a. Compressive Test -Lab

b. Water absorption Lab

c. efflorescence Lab

d. Percentage of Deleterious material Lab

e. Dimension test Lab

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 161

IS code for material IS-1077-1986

IS code for testing IS-3495(Part 1) to IS-3495(Part III)

Periodicity of Testing

Minimum 20000 bricks but tests shall be repeated for every 40000 or part thereof depending on
the volume of work.

8. 0 TILES

Tests to be conducted

Tolerance in size (+/- 1mm on length & breath)

Thickness of wearing layer Lab

Water absorption Lab

Transverse Strength Lab

Abrasion Strength- Lab

IS Code for testing as per standard

Periodicity of testing

sample tiles to be tested for minimum quantity of 80 Sqm.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 162

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

REGULATIONS AND STANDARDS

All equipments their installation, testing and commissioning shall conform latest IS
specifications in all respects.

Indian Standard Code of Practice for Electrical Wiring Installation IS:732-1989. It shall also be in
conformity with Indian electricity Rules and the Regulations, National Electric Code, National
Building Code, amended up to date and requirements of the Local Electric Supply Authority. In
general, all materials equipment and workmanship shall conform to the Indian Standards
specifications and code.

SCOPE OF WORK

The scope of work covered by this specification shall include supply and installation of all
electrical equipment and materials including testing and commissioning.

Any equipment, device and component of work not specifically mentioned in this specification
but considered essential for proper design and operation shall be included by the tenderer in this
offer.

The successful tenderer shall carryout the installation as per the arrangement and details shown in
the construction drawings, standards and instructions given by the Engineer.

Any variation or changes to be carried out ay site shall be done with the approval of the Engineer.

The scope of work shall include, but not to be limited to the supply, storing, installation, testing
and commissioning and drawing of the following:

i. Electricity Board meeting arrangement to receive incoming supply, LT switch board as per
Specification and drawings. LT cabling between switch boards.

ii. Motor Control Centre for pumps/ compressors.

iii. Miniature Circuit Breaker Distribution Boards for lighting distribution boards and power
distribution boards, miniature breakers and earth leakage circuit breaker.

iv. 1.1 k. grade aluminium copper conductor, PVC insulated / FRLS PVC insulated and sheathed
armoured / unarmoured power / control cables and cable termination accessories like glands, lugs,
ferrules etc.

v. Luminaries and Lamps, Ceiling fans, Exhaust fans.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 163

vi. Switch socket boxes, junction boxes and draw boxes.

vii. Switches sockets and accessories.

viii.1100 grade copper conductor, PVC insulated / FRLS PVC insulated multi stranded wires of
various colours.

ix. Wiring materials and accessories.

x. Earth electrode stations and earthing conductors.

xi. Building Electrification, Canopy lighting, External lighting, Low level garden lighting, power
connections to all facility sign boards, compressors, dispensing pumps.

xii. Street light poles and accessories.

xiii. Cable laying in trenches and back filling for underground cables.

xiv. Miscellaneous works other than the above as stipulated in Specification and BOQ.

xv. Liasoning with Electricity Board / Telephones Department to avail power supply / Telephone
connection unto the meter board / Telephone tag block. The cabling work for electrical system for
availing incoming power is given as an optional item, which may be required to be executed on
behalf of electricity board.

xvi. All other installation materials, hardware and consumables.

xvii. All tools, tackle, ladders etc. and the Contractor shall but all testing and measuring instruments
as required.

xviii. Storing of material at site and watch & ward of it till handing over.

The design shall include all reasonable precautions and provisions for the safety of operation and
maintenance personnel.

All equipment to be supplied shall be subject to inspection by the owner / consultants. Such inspection
shall however not relieve the Contractor of his obligations under the contract.

The Engineer reserves the right to specify electrical materials and equipment of a particular make for the
purpose of standardisation and the tenderer shall agree to supply the materials of the make specified, if so
required.

The Contractor shall be responsible for timely delivery of cading at site, transport to the place of
installation, strong, installation, testing and commissioning of all the equipment and the materials that are
included in the scope of work.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 164

The electrical contractor executing this work shall have a valid licence issued by the State Government
for carrying out installation work of the voltage class involved under the direct supervision of a person
holding a certificate of competence for the same voltage classes, issued of recognised by the State
Government

The tenderer shall furnish with this tender the particulars of the licence for carrying out the installation
work against this Specification.

All necessary safe holding for working at various heights shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. The
Contractor shall be responsible for compensation in case of any accident to his workmen at site. The
Contractor shall fulfill and bear all statutory charges for their workmen. The tenderer shall indemnity
owner / consultant of any such charges for workmen compensation.

The Contractor shall supply all necessary hardware and consumable required for the entire installation.

ELECTRICITY SUPPLY PARTICULARS

All equipment and installation covered under the scope of work shall be designed for electricity supply of
the following specification :

Voltage : 415V / 240V -6%

No. of phases : 3/ 1

Type of system : 3 phase, 4 wire

Frequency : 50Hz + 3%

Type of neutral earthing : Solidly earthed

Short circuit level : Not exceeding 35 KA at 415V

DRAWING

The drawings enclosed with this Specification are only for the guidance of the tenderer. The exact routing
of conduits, cables and wires and the exact location of the equipment shall be as per construction
drawings or as decided at site by the Engineer. ( Any field corrections shall be shown in five (5) copies of
each drawing and such as- built drawings shall be handed over to the owner by the contractor after
completion of the installation.

The drawings and other documents to be submitted by the tenderer shall be in the English language and
all the dimension, weights and quantities shall be in the metric units.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 165

The Contractor shall submit for the approval of the owner/ consultant, drawings of switch boards/ tailor
made equipment etc., as required in four (4) sets before commencing the manufacture and / or supply. The
equipment shall submit four sets(4) of as built certified drawings after complete fabrication of the
equipment.

LOCAL CONDITIONS

The tenderer shall visit the site, ascertain the local conditions, entry, traffic restrictions, and obstructions
if any and also site conditions. Whether the tenderer visits the site or not, he is deemed to have visited the
site and ascertained all the site conditions. The tenderer shall allow in his tender for an extras likely to be
incurred due to site conditions. No claim will be allowed on this account under any circumstances.

STANDARDS

The equipment and the installation work shall generally conform to the requirements of the Indian
Electricity Rules with its latest amendments and all relevant standards and code of practice of the Bureau
of India Standards.

SAFETY

The tenderer shall include and take adequate precautions as per the Indian Standard codes to ensure safety
for personnel and prevention of accidents at site. The tenderer shall be responsible for compensation to
their workmen due to accident, if any.

STATUTORY REQUIREMENTS

The Contractor shall obtain the approval of the State Electricity Board and Electrical Inspectorate and
carryout charges as called for by the Electrical Inspector at no extra cost to the owner. He shall also obtain
the drawing approvals and final safety certificate from CEIG. Only the statutory fees payable to
Electricity authority shall be reimbursed by the owner on production of valid vouchers.

INSPECTION

All the materials to be supplied shall be subject to inspection by the employer / consultant. Such
inspection shall not however relieve the Contractor of his obligations under the contract. Samples of all
items materials, however, etc., to be used to the work shall be got approved by the Engineer-in-Charge /
Consultant in advance. The brand / makes and grades of items / materials shall be as directed by the
employer / consultant.

TIME SCHEDULE

The tenderer shall be responsible for timely procurement and delivery of the items, off-loading at site,
safekeeping at site, transport to the place of installation, installation and testing of all the material that are
included in his scope of work. Work shall be progressed and completed as per schedule mutually agreed
upon.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 166

CO-OPERATION

The Contractor shall coordinate his work with those of the other agencies at the site and shall avoid any
interference and interruption with the progress of the work. The Contractor shall be required to carryout
the installation side by side with other agencies as may be required by the other Contractor from time to
time.

QUANTITIES

The Quantities indicated in the Bill of quantities is for the guidance of the tenderer. The Contractor shall
supply the items based on the requirements as per Construction drawings only.

1. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE (415V) SWITCH GEAR /

BOARD

GENERAL

This Specification covers the Design, Manufacture, Fabrication, Testing at factory and supply,
installation, testing and commissioning of 415V Switch gear incorporating MCCBS / Fuse Switches /
Contractor / relays etc.

The switch board and the mounted equipment shall comply with the latest edition of the following Indian
Standards

IS:4237 : General requirement for switch gear and control gear for Voltage not
exceeding 1000 V.

IS: 4047 : Heavy duty air break switches and fuses for voltages not exceed 1000V

IS: 3072 : Code of practice for installation and maintenance of Switchgear.

IS: 2208 : HRC CARTRIDGE FUSE LINKS Up to 650 V

IS: 2705 : Current Transformers. Part I.II.III

IS: 3156 : Voltage transformers

IS:1248 : Electrical indicating instruments

IS:375 : Marking and arrangement for switch gear bus bars, main connections and
auxiliary wiring

IS: 5 : Painting

IS: 8623 : Specifications for factory built assemblies of switch gear and control gear for
voltage up to and including 1000 V AC & 1200 V DC

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 167

General requirements:

FABRICATION AND GENERAL DETAILS:

Switch gear shall be indoor, floor mounting, free standing type enclosed in sheet steel cubicles and shall
be dust, weather and vermin proof. Enclosures shall conform to IP-54 and shall be cold rolled sheet steel.
Gaskets shall be used between all adjacent units and underneath all covers to render the joints effectively
dost-proof. Steel sheets shall not be less 2.00 mm (14S.W.G.) in thickness. Switch gear should be of
single for type design.

Switch gear shall be extensible at both ends by the addition of vertical sections. Ends of the bus bars shall
be suitable drilled for this purpose.

The switch board shall be totally enclosed, dust, weather and vermin proof. If necessary, openings for
natural ventilation shall be provided. Gaskets of durable materials shall be provided for doors and other
openings. Switch Boards specified for outdoor installation shall be housed in outdoor type kiosks to make
it weatherproof. The switchboards shall be suitable for the ambient and site conditions specified. Suitable
hooks shall be provided for lifting the boards. These hooks when removed shall not leave any openings in
the boards.

Access from the back shall be limited to bus bars and cables only for 415 V main switch board and DG
panels. For all other panels, all equipment shall be mounted on the front side and shall be accessible from
the from through hinged doors. Switches, ammeters, voltmeters and lamps etc. shall preferably be
mounted on fixed portions.

Individual switch fuse units, MCCMs bus bar and cable entrance alleys shall be housed in separate
enclosed compartments separated from each other by metallic or any other fire resistant insulating
material barriers.

Barriers and automatic safety shutters shall be provided such that bus bars and other live parts are
inaccessible even with breakers completely drawn out. Opening of bus bar chambers shall be possible
with special tools only.

PAINTING

All metal surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned and decreased to remove mill scale, rust, grease and dirt.
Fabricated structures shall be picked and then cleaned to remove any trace of acid. The under surface
shall be prepared by applying a coat of phosphate paint and coat of yellow zinc chromate primer. The
under surface shall be made free from all imperfections before undertaking the finishing cost.

After preparation of the under-surface, the switch board shall be painted by powder coating method of
final paint. Colour shade of final paint shall be approved by the purchaser before final painting is started.
The finished panels shall be dried in stoving ovens in dust free atmosphere. Panel finish shall be free
from imperfections like pinholes, orange peels, runoff paint etc. The vendor shall furnish painting
procedure details alongwith the bids.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 168

All unpainted steel parts shall be cadmium plated or suitably treated to prevent rust corrosion. If these
parts are moving elements then they shall be greased. Suitable lifting lugs shall be provided for
switchboard. These lifting lugs shall not leave any opening when removed.

SWITCH BOARD COMPONENTS:

INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMERS:

Current and voltage transformers shall be cast resin insulated type, primary and secondary terminals shall
be marked indelibly.

Current transformers shall generally conform to BIS : 2705. they shall be mounted on the stationary part.
The CT ratio and ratings shall be as indicated on the single line diagrams. For general guidance, the
vendor shall note that the protective current transformers shall have an accuracy class 5P and an
accuracy limit factor greater than 10 . Low reactance CTs shall be used for protection.

Current transformers for instruments shall have an accuracy class 1.0 and accuracy limit factor less than
5.0. The current transformers shall be capable of withstanding the peak momentary short circuit current
for 1.0 second. The neutral side of the current transformers shall normally be earthed through a link.

Wherever provided, the voltage transformers shall generally conform to BIS 3156. The voltage
transformers shall be provided with primary fuses. Preferably miniature circuit breakers with auxiliary
contacts shall be provided on the secondary side.

The voltage transformers shall have an accuracy class 3.0 from 50% to 110% of normal voltage and class
1.0 from 80% to 120% of normal voltage with burdens varying between 25% to 100% of the rated value
at 0.8 PF lagging.

The primary of the voltage transformers shall be rated for 415 volts and the secondary for 110 volts.
Unless otherwise stated, 2 single phase V- connected VTs shall be used.

MEASURING INSTRUMENTS:

AMMETERS

Ammeters shall be moving iron or moving coil type. The moving part assembly shall be with jewel
bearing. The jewel bearing shall be mounted on a spring to prevent damage to pivot due to vibrations and
shocks. The ammeters shall be manufactured and calibrated as per the latest edition of IS:1248. The
ammeters shall be instrument transformer operated and shall be suitable for 5A secondary of instrument
transformer. The scales shall be calibrated to indicate primary current unless otherwise specified. The
ammeters shall be capable of carrying sustained overloads during fault conditions without damage or loss
of accuracy.

VOLTMETERS

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 169

Voltmeters shall be of moving iron or moving coil type. The range for 415V, 3 phase voltmeters shall be
0 to 500V, Suitable selector switch shall be provided for each voltmeter to read voltage between any two
lines of the system. The voltmeter shall be provided with protection fuse of suitable capacity.

SWITCH AND FUSE UNITS:

The load break switches shall be heavy duty air break type and shall have quick make/ break manual
operating mechanism. The operating handle shall be mounted in the door of the compartment having the
isolator. It shall be possible to padlock the switches in the ON & OFF position. Door interlock shall be
provided so that it should not be possible to open the door with the switch in the closed position.
Normal it shall not be possible to close the switches with the door open but for testing purposes it shall be
possible to defeat this interlock. Switches shall be able to carry full load current continuously without
overheating. Barriers shall be provided to prevent inter-phase arcing. The live terminals shall be shrouded
to avoid accidental contact. Motor feeder switches shall be adequately rated for motor duty.

Fuses shall be HRC cartridge link types. Diazed fuses will not be acceptable.

The fuses shall be non-deteriorating type and shall have an operation indicator, which will be visible
without removal of fuses from service. Fuses shall be pressure fitted type and shall have ribs on the
contact blades to ensure good line contact. It must be possible to handle fuses during off-load conditions
although full voltage may be available on the terminals. Fuse-pullers shall be provided.

MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS (MCCBs)

General

MCCBs shall be four-poles, triple poles or double poles, independent manual closing air break type. They
shall be totally enclosed in a moulded casing formed from an insulating material. The construction of the
casing shall be capable of withstanding the appropriate rated short circuit current and capable of
withstanding the appropriate rated short circuit current and reasonably rough use without fracture or
distortion. The moulded casing shall have protection not less than IP56.

MCCBs shall comply with and be type tested to IEC 157-1, 157-1A, 157-1B.

All MCCBs to be used for serving pump motors, fan motors, and other motor equipment shall be of motor
type and shall be capable of handling the starting currents.

All MCCBs shall be completed with dust-proof metal enclosures with all the live terminals totally
enclosed.

Operation Characteristic

MCCBs shall have a thermal-magnetic tripping mechanism giving an adjustable, stable, inverse time-
current characteristic. The operating characteristic shall be such that:

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 170

The time delay on overload tripping shall be inversely proportional to the over currents unto a threshold
value of approximately 7 times the rated current.

There shall be no intentional time-delay on over current tripping due to short-circuit or heavy over
currents exceeding the threshold value.

The overload trip setting can be adjusted on site from 60% to 100% of breaker rated current in 10% steps.

Performance Characteristic

MCCBs shall be certified, in accordance with IEC Standards and shall have the following performance
characteristics:

Rated short circuit breaking capacity not less than 25 KA for lateral submain installation or the
prospective fault current at the point of installation whichever is greater. Short circuit current
withstanding duration shall not be less than 1 second.

Shunt Trip Release

This shall operate correctly at all values of supply voltage between 70% and 120% of the nominal supply
voltage under all operating conditions of the MCCB. MCCBs incorporating shunt release shall be
provided with block terminals and shunt release lead cables.

All the MCCB should have front drive kits.

CONTROL SWITCHES:

All control switches shall be rotary, back connected type, having a cam operated control mechanism.
Preferably phosphor bronze controls shall be used on the control switches. They shall have pistol grip
handles. Number of ways, locking system etc. shall be as stated on these switches. Ammeter selector
switches shall generally have 4 positions for reading 3 phase currents and the neutral current. The
voltmeter selector switch has to also have 4 positions. Three shall be used to measure phase to phase
voltage and fourth shall be OFF position.

Remote / Trip / Off selector switch for the motor feeders shall be lockable in OFF position.

PUSH BUTTONS:

Push button colours shall be as follows:

Stop / Open / emergency - Red

Start / Close - Green

INDICATING LAMPS:

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 171

Indicating lamps shall be provided with translucent covers to diffuse light, with series resistors.

PROTECTIVE RELAYS:

Wherever used, all protective relays shall be back connected, drawn out type, suitable for flush mounting
and fitted with dust covers. Alternatively, plug-in type of relays shall also be acceptable. The relay cases
shall have provision for insulation of test plug at the front for testing and calibration using an external
power supply without disconnecting the permanent writing. It shall possible to short the CTs through the
test plugs.

AUXILIRY RELAYS / CONTACTORS:

Auxiliary relays / Contractors shall generally be used for interlocking and multiplying contacts. Auxiliary
contacts shall be capable of carrying the maximum estimated current. In any case, their rating must not be
less than 5A for 240V AC. At a power factor between 0.3 to 1.5 and 24V DC (Inductive load ). Vendors
shall note that lower voltage Contractors with a series resistance will not be acceptable for 220V DC
control supply.

TRIPPING RELAYS:

All tripping relays shall be lockout with hand reset contacts and shall be suitable to operate off the
specified DC voltage. These relays shall have coil-cut-off contacts and shall be provided with hand reset
operation indicators. Tripping relays will be acceptable in non-draw out cases. The number of contacts
shall be as shown in the schematic drawings.

INSPECTION & TESTING :

The panels shall be completely assembled, wired and tested as per IS-8623-1977 at the factory in the
presence of purchaser s engineer or his authorised person.

The test shall include wiring continuity tests, insulation resistance tests, high voltage tests (2.5 KV AC for
1 min.) and functional tests to ensure operation of control scheme and individual equipment.

Manufacture s test certificates in respect of all meters, switching, contactors etc. prior to inspection of
panels shall be produced to the Purchaser; s engineer at vendor s works.

DRAWINGS & INSTRUCTION MANUALS :

Along the offer, the contractor shall submit the following documents:

General arrangements drawings of Panels ( cudce switch board) showing the various constructional
features etc.

Single line diagram.

Technical leaflets for MCCB , fuse switches, lamps meters etc.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 172

Foundation plan including weight.

Type test reports as per IS8623-1977 Clause 8.2.1 & 8.2.3.

After award of the contract, the manufacturer shall submit the following documents in for approval.

General arrangement drawing of Panels showing various views and foundation drawings.

Arrangement of compartments.

Single line diagram.

Complete technical particulars of all equipment.

Commissioning and maintenance instruction for all equipment.

Set of re-produceable for all above drawings.

Before manufacturer of the Panels, the supplier shall have to take the approval for the design and
drawings in writing. Any manufacturing done prior to approval of drawings shall be rectified in
accordance with the approved drawings by the supplier at his own cost and the equipment shall be
supplied within the stipulated period. Time schedule for drawing documents shall be enclosed separately.

PACKING AND TRANSPORTS:

The switch board shall be shipped to site packed in wooden crates. They shall be wrapped in polyethylene
sheets before being placed in crates to prevent damage to the finish. Crates shall have skid bottoms for
handling.

GUARANTEE:

The switch board shall be guaranteed for trouble free operation for a period of 12 months from the date of
commissioning or 18 months from the date of arrival at site whichever is earlier. Any defects discovered
during this period shall be rectified free of charge.

3. 0 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR POWER & LIGHTING

DISTRIBUTION BOARDS.

GENERAL

The Specification covers the design, manufacture, assembly, testing at works and supply and installation
of power and lighting distribution Boards, complete with oil accessories for efficient and trouble-free
operation.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 173

The distribution boards shall be fabricated out of 1.6 mm thick sheet steel (RCA) and shall be totally
enclosed, dust and vermin proof, dead front, with hinged door type of bolted / welded construction
suitable for wall mounting.

Each dB shall have individual hinged/ bolted gasket doors with a suitable locking device and shall be
suitable for dusty atmospheric conditions. 3mm thick removable gland plates shall be provided in the top
and bottom of the distribution boards for cable entry.

Protective insulated cover plate shall be provided inside the panel to shroud all the live parts. Only the
operating knobs of the miniature circuit breakers / ELEC. Shall be projecting outside the cover plate. The
incoming / outing ELCB/MCB terminals shall be suitably shrouded to avoid accidental contact. Each
phase or way shall also be suitable shrouded with hylam plates.

The incoming and outgoing terminals shall be suitable for terminating cables as per the specific
requirements.

BUSBARS

The busbars shall be air insulated and made of high conductivity, electrolytic grade copper liberally sized
with high safety factor for the required rating (both short circuit and continuous current). The busbars
shall be sized for the full rating of the incomer. The neutral busbar shall have adequate number of
terminals for all outgoing single phase circuits. A copper earth bus of size 25x3 mm shall be provided in
each DB for earthing of the power/ lighting circuit and earthing of DB. The neutral busbar shall be seized
equal to the phase busbar.

MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS

The Miniature Circuit Breakers (MCBs) shall be heat resistant, molded type designed, manufactured and
tested as per IS8828. the MCBs shall have inverse-time tripping characteristic against over loads and
instantaneous trip against short circuit. The MCBs shall be clip on type to the DIN Channel. The ON and
OFF positions shall be clearly marked. The MCBs shall be suitable for operating in ambient temperature
without derating. The incoming and outgoing of the MCBs shall be accessible only after opening the front
door of the DB. The MCBs shall be suitable for 415 V, 3 phase, 4 wire, 50Hz system with the fault level
of 10KS RMS symmetrical. The terminals of MCBs shall be suitable for use with eye lugs. The 4 pole, 3
pole and 2 pole MCBs shall be suitable for use with eye lugs. The 4 pole, 3 pole and 2 pole MCB knobs
shall be trucked with adequately strengthened tandem pin.

EARTH LEAKAGE CIRCUIT BREAKERS

Incoming of the lighting and power DB shall be provided with current operated Earth leakage circuit
breakers with a sensitivity of 30mA or as specified in the drawings. The ELCB shall have Trip free
mechanism and shall operate even on neutral failure.

The ELCN shall be provided with a test Button to simulate leakage and to test the ELCB. The ELCB shall
operate and switch off the circuit within 30 milli seconds in case of a fault.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 174

The enclosures of the ELCB shall be molded from high quality insulating materials, which shall be fire
retardant, anti-tracking, non-tracking, non-hygroscopic, impact resistant and shall withstand high
temperature.

GROUNDING

The DBs shall be provided with two nos. brass earthing stud terminals with suitable nuts., washers etc. for
connection to earth bus outside the DB.

PAINTING

The steel surface shall be chemically cleaned to remove scale etc. rinsed, dried and shall be finished with
Epoxy paint. The shade shall be as per specific requirement sheets.

TESTING & INSPECTION

All routine and acceptance tests as per the relevant IS shall be carried out in presence of the purchaser or
his representative.

PACKING

All the equipment covered under this Specification shall be packed properly in order to avoid damages
during transit and during storage at site.

DRAWING & INSTRUCTION MANUALS:

Along the offer, the Contractor shall submit the following documents:

General arrangements drawings of DBs showing the various constructional features etc.

Single line diagram

Technical leaflets for MCB, ELCM etc

Type test reports as per IS.

After award of the contract, the manufacturer shall submit the following documents for approval.

General arrangements drawing of DBs showing various views and mounting details.

Arrangement of compartments.

Single line diagram.

Complete technical particulars of all equipment.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 175

Commissioning and maintenance instruction for all equipment.

Set of re-produceable for all the above drawings.

Before manufacturer of the DBs, the supplier shall have to take approval for the design and drawings in
writing. Any manufacturing done prior to approval of drawings shall be rectified in accordance with the
approved drawings by the supplier at his own cost and the equipment shall be supplied within the
stipulated period. Time schedule for drawing documents shall be enclosed separately.

4. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR MEDIUM AND HIGH VOLTAGE CABLES AND

ACCESSORIES

GENERAL:

This specification covers the requirements for design, manufacture and supply of PVC, FRLS cables for
Medium and High voltage systems and cable joining/ terminating accessories for high voltage / low
voltage systems.

The cables shall comply with the latest edition of the following standards:

IS:1554 (PART-I) - PVC insulated (heavy duty ) electric cables working voltage unto
and including 1100V

IS:7098 (PART-II) - Cross-linked polyethylene insulated PVC sheathed cables for

working voltage fro-1.1kV unto and including 33kV

IS:8130 - Conductors for insulated electric cables and flexible cords.

IS:5831 - PVC insulation and sheath of electric cables

IS:3975 - Mild steel wires, stripes and tapes armouring of cables.

IS:2633- - Methods of testing weight, thickness and uniformity of coating on

hot dipped galvanised articles.

IS:209 - Specification of zinc.

IS:3961 (PART-II) - Recommended current ratings for PVC insulated and PVC sheet had
. heavy duty cables

IS:10418 - Wooden drums for electric cables.

IEC:502 - Extruded solid dielectric insulated power cables for rated voltage
from 1KV unto 30KV

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 176

IEC:540 & 540A - Test methods for insulation and sheaths of electric cables and
cords.

IS:10462 (PART-I) - Fictitious calculation method for determination of dimensions of

protective coverings of electrometric and thermoplastic insulated c
cables

IS:10810(PART-58) - Oxygen index test.

GENERAL CONSTRUCTION:

The cables shall be suitable for laying in trays, trenches, ducts and conduits and for underground buried
installation with uncontrolled backfill and possibility of flooding by water and chemicals.

Outer sheath of all PVC and XLPE cables shall be black in colour and the minimum value of oxygen
index shall be 29 at 27 +/- 2 C. In addition, suitable chemicals shall be added into the PVC compound of
the outer sheath to protect the cable against rodent and termite attack.

Sequential marking of the length of the cable in meters shall be provided on the outer sheath at every one
metre. The embossing shall be legible and indelible.

The overall diameter of the cables shall be strictly as per the values declared in the technical information
furnished along with bids subject to a maximum tolerance of +/- 2mm.

PVC / Rubber end caps shall be supplied free of cost for each drum with a minimum height of eight per
thousand metre length. In addition, ends of the cables shall be properly sealed with caps to avoid ingress
of water during transportation and storage.

SPECIFICATION FOR PVC CABLES

At power / control cables for use on medium voltage systems shall be heavy duty type, 1100 insulated ,
insulated, inner-sheathed, armoured and overall PVC sheathed as detailed below.

The contractors shall be stranded for both aluminium and copper cables. Conductors of nominal area
less than 25sq. mm shall be circular only. Conductors of nominal area 25 sq.mm and above may be
circular or shaped. Cables with reduced neutral conductor shall have sizes as per Tables 1 of IS
1554(Part-I).

The core insulation shall be with PVC compound applied over the conductor by extrusion and shall
conform to the requirements of type A compound as per IS:5831. The thickness of insulation and the
tolerance on thickness of insulation shall as per table 2 of IS:1554 part-I. Control cables having 6 crores
and above shall be identified with prominent and indelible Arabic numerals on the outer surface of the
insulation. Colour of the numbers shall contrast with the colour of insulation with a spacing of maximum
50mm between two consecutive numbers. Colour coding for cables unto 5 crores shall be as per Indian
Standard.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 177

The inner sheath shall be applied over the laid-up cores by extrusion and shall be of PVC conforming to
the requirements of TYPE STI PVC compound as per IS:5831. The minimum thickness of inner sheath
shall be as per Table 4 of IS:1554-Part-1.

Armouring for multi-core cables shall be by single round galvanised steel wires where the calculated
diameter below armouring does not exceed 13 mm and by galvanised steel strips where this dimension is
greater than 13 mm. Requirement and methods of tests for armour material and uniformity of
galvanisation shall be as per IS-3975 and IS-2633. The dimensions of armour shall be as per table 5 of IS-
1554 (part-1). Armouring for single core cable shall be with H4 grade hard drawn aluminium round wire
of 2.5 sq.mm diameter.

The outer sheath for the cables shall be applied by extrusion and shall be of PVC compound conforming
to the requirements of type ST-1 compound as per IS:5831. The minimum thickness of outer sheath shall
be as per column-3 for both armoured and unarmoured cables.

SPECIFICATION FOR XLPE CABLES

The conductor shall be stranded and compacted circular for all cables.

All cables rated 1.1 / 3.8 /6.6kv and above shall be provided with both conductor screening and insulation
screening. The conductors shall be provided with non-metallic extruded semi conducting shielding.

The core insulation shall be with cross-linked polyethylene insulating compound applied by extrusion. It
shall be free from voids and shall withstand all mechanical and thermal stresses under steady state and
transient operating conditions. It shall conform to the properties given in Table -1 of IS:7098 (Part II).

The insulating shielding shall consist of non-metallic extruded semi-conducting compound in

combination with a non-magnetic metallic screening of copper screen shall be capable of carrying the
insulation shielding shall consist of non- metallic extruded semi-conducting compound in combination
with a non-single line to ground fault current.

The conductor screen, XLPE insulation and insulation screen shall all be extruded in one operation by
Triple Extrusion process to ensure perfect bonding between the layers. The core identification shall be
by coloured strips or by printed numerals.

The inner sheath shall be applied over the laid up crores by extrusion and shall conform to the
requirements of type ST2 compound of IS:5831. the extruded inner sheath shall be of uniform thickness.
For multicore cables, the armouring shall be by galvanised steel strips, if armouring is specified for single
core cables in the data sheet, the same shall be with H grade hard drawn aluminium round wire of 2.5
sq.mm diameter.

The outer sheath of the cables shall be applied by extrusion after the armouring and shall be of PVC
compound conforming to the requirements of Type of IS:7098 part 2.( column 3 & 5 for both armoured
cables).

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 178

The dimensions of the insulation, inner sheath and armour materials shall be governed by values given in
Tables 2,3 and 4 (Method b ) of IS:7098 PART-II.

SPECIFICATION FOR CABLE ACCESSORIES:

The termination and straight jointing kits for use on the systems shall be suitable for the type of cables
offered as per this specification.

The accessories shall be supplied in kit form. Each component of the kit shall the manufacture s mark of
origin.

The kit shall included all stress grading. Insulation and sealing materials apart from conductor fittings and
consumable items. An insulation instruction sheet shall also be included in each kit.

The contents of the accessories kit including all consumables shall be suitable for storage without
deterioration at a temperature of 45 with self life extending to more than 5 years.

TERMINATING KITS: The terminating kits shall be suitable for termination of the cables to an indoor
switchgear or to a weatherproof transformer / motor. For outdoor terminations, weather shields / sealing
ends and any other accessories required shall also from part of the kit. The terminating kits shall be one of
the marks / types mentioned in the preferred marks.

JOINTING KITS: The straight through jointing kits shall be suitable for installation on overhead trays,
concrete lined trenches, and for underground burial with uncontrolled backfill and possibility of flooding
by water and chemicals. These shall have protection against rodent and termite attack.

The cables shall be tested and examined at the manufacturer works both before and after manufacture.
The manufacture shall furnish all necessary information concerning the supply to consultant / Owner s
Engineer. The Engineer shall have free access to the manufacture s works for the purpose for the purpose
of inspecting the process of manufacture in all its stages and he will have the power to reject any material
which appears to him to be at unsuitable description or of unsatisfactory quality.

PVC & XLPE CABLES;

After completion of manufacture of cables and prior to dispatch the cables shall be subject to special tests
as detailed below. Consultant / owner reserves the right to witness all tests with sufficient advance notice
from vendor. The test reports for all cables shall be got approved from the Engineer before dispatch of the
cables.

All routine tests, acceptance tests and type tests shall be carried out on cables as listed in IS:1554 Part-1.

The inner and outer sheath of XLPE cables shall be subjected to all the tests applicable for PVC cables.
The test requirements for insulation and sheath of PVC cables shall be a per latest revision of IS:5831.

Following are the special tests to be performed on the cables and test results for similar type of cables
shall accompany the offer.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 179

Accelerated water absorption test for insulation as per NEMA-WC-5.( For PVC insulated cables ) and as
per NEMA WC-7 (for XLPE) insulated cables).

Dielectric Retention Test: The dielectric strength of the cable insulation tested in accordance with NEMA
WC 5 at 75 +/- 1 shall not less than 50% of the original dielectric strength. ( For PVC insulated cables).

Oxygen Index Test: The test shall be carried out as per ASTMD 2863 or applicable Indian standard
specification.

Test for rodent and termite repulsion property : The vendors shall furnish the test details to analyse the
property by chemical method.

CABLE ACCESSORIES:

Type tests should have been carried out to prove the general qualities and design of given type of
termination / joining system. The type tests shall include the following tests conforming to VDE 0278/ IS
specification. The type test certificates shall be submitted alongwith the offer.

1. Rated withstand AC voltage test

2. Partial discharge test

3. rated withstand surge voltage test

4. Continuous AC voltage test with cyclic current load (Number of heating cycles-3)

5. Partial discharge test

6. Continuous AC voltage test with cyclic current load ( Number of heating cycles-3)

7. Thermal short circuit test

8. Continuous AC voltage test with cyclic current load

9. Rated withstand surge voltage test

10. D.C.voltage test

11. Test under the influence of moisture

12. Dynamic short circuit test

PACKING AND MARKING

Cables shall be dispatched in non-returnable wooden drums of suitable barrel diameter, security battened,
with the take-off end fully protected against mechanical damage. The wood used for construction of the

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 180

drum shall be properly seasoned, sound and free from defect. Wood preservatives shall be applied to the
entire drum. Ferrous parts used shall be treated with a suitable rust preventive finish or coating to avoid
rusting during transit of storage.

On the flange of the drum, necessary information such as project title, manufacturer s name, type size,
voltage, drum no., cable, BIS certification mark, gross weight etc. shall be printed. An arrow instruction
to show the direction of rotation of the drum.

Cables shall be supplied in drum lengths as follows:

Medium voltage power cables unto and including 6 sq.mm 1000M

Medium voltage power cables from 10sq.mm unto and including 300 sq.mm- 500M

Control cables unto and including 27 crores 1000M

A tolerance of plus or minus 5% shall be permissible for each drum. However, overall tolerance on each
size of cable shall be limited to +/-2%. Offers with short / non-standard lengths are liable for rejection.

5. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR LIGHT FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES

GENERAL

This specification covers the design, manufacture, testing at works, inspection and delivery at site and
installation of lighting fittings and their associated accessories The light fittings and their associated
accessories such as lamps / types, reflector, housings, ballasts etc. shall comply with the latest applicable
standards.

All luminaries, lamps and accessories shall be same make.

Fittings shall be designed for continuous trouble-free operation under hot humid atmospheric conditions,
at an ambient of 50o C, without reduction in lamp life or without deterioration of materials and internal
wiring. Outdoor fittings shall be weather proof and rain proof type.

The fittings shall be designed so as to facilitate easy maintenance, including cleaning, replacement of
lamps/ starters etc.

Connectors between different components shall be made in such a way that they will not work loose by
small vibration.

For each type of light fitting the MANUFACTURER shall supply the utilisation factor to indicate the
proportion of the light emitted by the bare lamp which falls on the working plane.

The fittings shall be supplied complete with lamps.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 181

The fittings and accessories shall be designed to have low temperature rise, the temperature rise above the
ambient temperature shall be as indicated in the relevant standards.

All mercury vapour and metal halide fittings shall be complete with accessories like lamps, ballasts,
power factor improvement capacitors, starters / igniters wherever applicable, etc.

Outdoor type fitting shall be provided with outdoor type control gear box the fittings shall be power factor
corrected to 0.95 lagging (maximum).

Each fitting shall have a terminal block suitable for loop-in, loop-out and T-off connection. The internal
wiring shall be complete by the MANUFACTURER by means of stranded copper wire and terminated on
the terminal block.

All hardware used in the luminaries shall be cadmium plated.

EARTHING

Each light fitting shall be provided with an earthing terminal suitable for connection to the earthing
conductor.

All metal of metal enclosed parts of the housing shall be bonded to the earthing terminal so as to ensure
satisfactory earth continuity throughout the fixture.

PAINTING / FINISH

All surfaces of the fittings shall be thoroughly cleaned and degreased. The fittings shall be free from
scale, rust, sharp edges and burrs.

The housing shall be stove enamelled / epoxy stove-enamelled / vitreous enamelled or anodised as
indicated under various types of fitting.

The finish of the fitting shall be such that no bright spots are produced either by direct light source or by
reflection.

LIGHT FITTINGS

HPSV / HPMV / MH FLOOD LIGHT LUMINAIRE (for canopy area/ Hoardings):

Flood light fixture suitable for HPSV/ HPMV/ MH lamps consists of cast aluminium alloy housing with
heat dissipating fins. Heat resistant and toughened glass in front is held by a weatherproof gasket and
aluminium frame assembly. It shall have anodised aluminium reflector. Re lamping facility shall be made
simple without disturbing the previously set aiming. It shall be provided with galvanised MS mounting
bracket which will have facility to fix the fixture in any position. It shall be provided with the protractor
for angle adjustment.

HPMV MH HIGH / MID / LOW BAY LUMINAIRE (for Canopy area / Hoardings):

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 182

High / NID / LOW bay fixture suitable for HPSV / HPMV / MH consists of reflector made out of high
purity aluminium and anodised. The integral control gear shall be housed in a cast aluminium housing
which will have cooling fins. It shall have a strong MS bracket with an anti vibration eyebolt.

HPSV/ HPMV/ METAL HALIDE STREET LIGHT LUMINAIRE (for Yard Lighting):

Street light fixture suitable for HPSV / HPMV lamp consists of cast aluminium housing, stove enameled
grey outside and white with an anodised aluminium reflectors and highly transparent clear acrylic sheet
cover with hinge and toggle fastening, neoprene gaskets and integrated prewired ballasts etc.

POST TOP LANTERN ( for Landscape Lighting) :

The luminaries shall have die cast aluminium spigot complete with integral copper wound control gear.
PF correction capacitor mounted in canopy, lamp holder and suitable rated lamps. The diffuser / cover
shall be opal acrylic HDP in double conical shape.

LOW LEVEL GARDEN LIGHTNG (BOLLARDS) (for Landscaped Lighting):

The luminaries shall comprise of acrylic diffuser mounted on suitable MS pillar which shall house
suitable control gears, starters, capacitors. The luminaire shall be suitable for GLS/ PL lamps.

FLURESCENT TUBE LIGHT FITTING WITH STOVE ENAMELLED OPEN REFLECTOR (for
Sales Building):-

Industrial type fixture suitable for 2x40W 1x40W fluorescent lamp consist of reflector, made from CFCA
sheet steel finished in stove enamel gray outside & white inside.

ACID PROOF FLUORESCENT TUBE LIGHT (for Battery rooms )

It shall be suitable for 2x40W / 1x40W fluorescent lamp comprises of rubber gasketted cast aluminium
control gear housing with detachable cover incorporating ballasts, starters, capacitors and connector
block. It shall be specially designed with rubber gasket to prevent entry of corrosive vaporous or dust.

MIRROR OPTICS FLURESCENT TUBE LIGHT (for Sales Building):

It shall be suitable for 2x40W / 1x40W fluorescent lamp comprises of CRCA sheet steel housing finished
in stove enamel while inside and gray outside. Mirrors made of high purity anodised aluminium sheet,
giving a very high light output, with wide spread light distribution.

DECORATIVE FLUORESCENT TUBE LIGHT (for Sales Building )

It shall be suitable for 2x40W / 1x40W fluorescent lamp comprises of sheet steel housing fabricated from
CRCA sheet steel, finished in stove enamel white inside and outside. It shall consist of Acrylic diffuser
which is supported by brown high impact polystyrene end plates.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 183

CHANNEL MOUNTED TUBE LIGHT WITHOUT REFLECTOR (for DG / Compress / Electrical

rooms):

It shall be suitable for 1x40W /2x40W fluorescent lamps made out of CRCA sheet steel finished in gray
stove enamel. The cover plate shall be finished in white stove enamel.

100W INCANDESCENT BULK HEAD FITTING (for Peripheral of Building):

It shall be suitable for GLS lamp unto 100W and comprises of die cast aluminium alloy body, prismatic
heat resistant glass cover held with a weatherproof gasket in a MS galvanised wire guard. It shall be
painted in white stove enamel inside and grey outside.

COMPACT FLUORESCENT FITTING (Sales Building):

It shall be suitable for 9 /11 / 18W CFL, suitable for surface mounting and recessed mounting and made
of CRCA sheet steel housing, finished in stove enamel white inside and gray outside, fitted with high
purity anodised aluminium reflector and complete with control gear.

REFLECTORS

The reflectors shall be made of CRCA sheet steel / aluminium / silvered glass as indicated for above-
mentioned fitting.

The thickness of steel / aluminium shall comply with relevant standards. Reflectors made of steel shall
have stove enamelled / epoxy coating finish. Aluminium used for reflectors shall be anodised / epoxy
stove enamelled / mirror polished.

Reflectors shall be free from scratches or blisters and shall have a smooth and glossy surface having an
optimum light reflecting contractor-efficient such as to ensure the overall light output specified by the
manufacturer.

Reflectors shall be readily removable from the housing for cleaning and maintenance without disturbing
the lamps and without the use of tools, they shall be securely fixed to the housing by means of positive
fastening device of captive type.

LAMP / STARTER HOLDERS

Lamp holders shall comply with relevant standards. They shall have low contact resistance, shall be
resistance to wear and shall be suitable for operation at the specified temperature without deterioration in
insulation value. They shall hold the lamps in position under normal condition of shock and vibration met
within normal installation and use.

Lamp holders for the fluorescent lamps shall be of the spring loaded bi-pin rotor type. Live parts of the
lamp holder shall not be exposed during insertion or removal of the lamp. The lamp holder contacts shall
provide adequate pressure on the lamp cap pins when in working position.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 184

Lamp holders for incandescent, mercury vapour & metal halide lamps shall be of Edison screw (E.S)
type. Starter holders for fluorescent lamps shall conform to the relevant standards. All material used in the
construction of the holder shall be suitable for tropical use.

The starter holders shall be so designed that they are mechanically robust and free from any operational
difficulties. They shall be capable of withstanding the shocks met within normal transit, installation and
us e .

BALLASTS

The ballasts shall be designed, manufactured and supplied in accordance with the relevant standards. The
ballasts shall be designed to have a long service life and low power loss.

Ballasts shall be mounted using sell locking, anti vibration fixing and shall be easy to remove without
demounting the fittings. They shall be in dust-tight, non-combustible enclosures.

The ballasts shall be of the inductive, heavy-duty type, filled with thermosetting, insulating, moisture
repellent, polyester compound filled under vacuum. Ballasts shall be provided with tapings to set the
voltage within the range specified. End connections and taps shall be brought out in a suitable terminal
block, rigidly fixed to the ballast enclosure. The ballast enclosure. The ballast wiring shall be of copper
wire shall be free from hum. Ballasts which produce humming sound shall be replaced free of cost by the
contractor.

Separate ballast for each lamp shall be provided in case of multi lamp fittings. The ballasts for metal
halide lamps shall not be constant wattage type.

STARTERS

Starters shall have bimetal electrodes and high mechanical strength. Starters shall be replaceable without
disturbing the reflector or lamps and without the use of any tool. Starters shall have brass contacts and
radio interference capacitor.

The starters shall generally conform to the relevant standards.

CAPACITORS

The capacitors shall have a constant value of capacitance and shall be connected across the supply of
individual lamp circuits.

The capacitors shall be suitable for operation at supply voltage as specified and shall have a value of
capacitance so as to correct the power factor of its corresponding lamp circuit to the extent of 0.95 lag.

The capacitors shall be hermetically sealed preferably on a metal enclosure to prevent seepage of
impregnant and ingress of moisture.

LAMPS

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 185

Incandescent (GLS) lamps shall be of clear type unless otherwise specified.

The fluorescent lamps shall be Cool Day Light type unless otherwise specified and shall be provided
with features to avoid blackening of lamp ends. The lamp shall have triple coil electrode with an anode
ring and a triband phospher coating.

Mercury halide lamp shall be provided with internal diffuse coating and the average lumen output shall be
19000 lumen for 250W and 32000 lumens for 400W and the lamp voltage shall not exceed 100V for
250W and 128V for 400W. The colour rendering index of the lamp shall be 93. the lamp shall be suitable
for universal burning position and for use in open type luminaire.

The lamps shall be capable of withstanding small vibrations and the connections at lead in wires and
filaments / electrodes shall not break under such circumstances.

Lamps/ tubes shall conform to relevant standards and shall be suitable for supply voltage and frequency
specified.

CEILING FANS:

The ceiling fans shall be designed, manufactured and tested as per IS:374. The fans shall have totally
enclosed capacitor start and run motor suitable for operating on 240V, single phase, 50Hz AC supply
system. The fan shall be of double bearing type, having 3 blades with a sweep of 1200 / 1400 mm
complete with suspension rod, canopies and mounting rollers. The regulators shall be modular type
electronic step less regulator suitable for mounting on modular switch boxes.

EXHAUST FANS :

The exhaust fans shall be of industrial type designed, manufactured and tested as per IS:2312 and
operating on 240v, single phases, 50Hz, AC supply system. The exhaust fan shall be of ring-mounted
type and shall be complete with louvers. It shall be designed for opening and closing automatically with
air flow velocity. A separate bird screen made of brass wire mesh shall be provided with steel framework
on the outer wall.

WIRES

PVC insulated multistranded copper wires of 1100V grade as per IS:694 and ISI Certification shall be
us e d.

The type and size of wires to be used shall be as indicated in the BOQ & drawings.

The following colour code shall be adopted for the wiring:

Three phase wiring : Red, Yellow, Blue

Single Phase wiring : Red / Yellow / Blue

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 186

Switched phase ( wire from switch : White

to light fan, bell, 5A socket etc)

Neutral : Black

Earth : Green

No joint is permitted in the run of wires.

SWITCHES

Switches, manufactured in accordance with IS:3854 shall be used. Switches in areas where concealed
wiring has been adopted shall be flush mounting piano / modular type unless otherwise specified.

RECEPTACLES

Only three-pin type receptacles manufactured in accordance with IS:1293 shall be used with the third
terminal connected to the earth. All receptacles shall be provided with a switch mounted on the same
enclosure but shall be a separate unit to facilitate replacement by part. Flush mounting type receptacles
shall be used in areas where concealed wiring has been adopted and surface type shall be used in other
areas.

OUTLET BOXES

Outlet boxes for sockets, switches, fixtures and fan regulators etc. shall be of minimum 16 gauge or as
specified. M. S. Sheet 2.5 deep. Junction / Outlet boxes shall be used in roof slab where concealed
wiring has been adopted. Front cover plate shall be of sheet steel in areas where surface wiring has been
adopted. For concealed wiring the front cover plate shall be of Formica or modular front plate of
approved equivalent with colour to suit the walls. Outlet boxes shall be electro-galvanised after
fabrication. Cover plate shall be fixed by cadmium plated brass screw and suitable C.P. brass cup
washers. Samples of these shall be approved by Engineer-in-Charge.

CONDUIT AND FITTINGS

Conduit shall be minimum 16 gauge ERW or GI or Polyethylene as specified. Generally, polyethylene

conduits shall be used in concealed wiring and for surface wiring GI conduits in industrial building and
ERW conduit in non-industrial building shall be used.

Care shall be taken to see that all conduit ends have no burrs and ends are neatly renamed to avoid
damage to wires. All metal conduit accessories shall be only of threaded type. Pin grip or clamp type
accessories are not acceptable. Samples of these shall be furnished for approval by Engineer-in-Charge at
site, before installation.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 187

The maximum number of PVC insulated wires which can be drawn in conduits of various sizes shall be
as given below:

Nominal Cross sectionals area in Sq mm Sizes of Conduits

Mm 20m m 25m m 32m m 40

1. 5 5 10 12 -

2. 5 5 8 12 -

4. 0 3 6 8 -

6. 0 2 5 7 -

10. 0 2 4 5 8

16. 0 - 2 3 6

STREET LIGHT POLES

Lighting poles shall be fabricated as per drawings from seamless pipes of specified section, with joints,
swaged together when hot and beveled on outside edges, poles shall be coated with bituminous
preservative solution, throughout on the inside surface and on the ground portion of the outside surface.
Remainder of the outside surface shall be given one coat of red oxide primer and finished with two coats
of aluminium paint. Each pole shall be provided with a outdoor junction box which contains terminal
connectors ( size and the number of terminals shall be as per requirement) and 6A SPN MCB for local
control. GI conduit shall be embedded in muff for incoming and outgoing cables. Foundation for lighting
poles will be made by the electrical conductor and the cost for the same including supply of cement and
all the reconnected materials shall be deemed to have been included in the erection of pole. Lighting poles
shall be numbered serially as per the direction of Engineer-in-Charge.

6. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR EARTHING FOR ELECTIRCAL WORKS

GENERAL

All the non-current metal parts of electrical installation shall be earthed properly. All metal conduits
trunking, switchgear, distribution boards, switch boxes, outlet boxes, and all other parts made of metal
shall be bonded together and connected by means of specified earthing conductors to an efficient earthing
system. Earthing work shall conform to Indian Electricity Rules 1956 amended up to date and in the
regulations of the local Electricity Supply Authority

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 188

The contractor shall provide the complete bonding & earthing of the neutral point of power system & non
current carrying metal parts of all electrical equipments & apparatus.

Each & every piece of electrical equipments & apparatus shall be connected to the main earth bus by
means of branch main connection of earth continuity conductors.

All electrical equipments, except those operating at extra low voltages shall be provided with an earth
terminal.

All types of electrodes comprising an earth system shall be connected together with a continuous ring of
earth conductor. After installation tests shall be made to ascertain that the earth resistance hereinafter
specified is obtained. If the required resistance value cannot be obtained, a sufficient number of
additional electrodes shall be installed until the resultant resistance not exceeding the specified value can
be obtained.

In all cases, the electrodes shall be driven such that the zones of earthing do not overlap.

Each earth electrode shall be connected to its associated earth conductor through a linked connection. The
link shall be installed as close to the earth electrodes as possible. Each earth electrodes shall be enclosed
together with the link in a reinforced concrete hand hole with slab cover, which shall be set flush with the
ground.

A continuous earth ring of GI flat as specified shall be provided in the electrical room and connected to
the earth electrodes. The resistance between any point on each earthing system and the earth electrodes
shall not exceed 1 ohm. The overall resistance between the earthing installation and the general mass of
earth shall be less than 1 ohm.

All non-current carrying metal parts of electrical installation shall be earthed properly. All metal conduits,
trunking cables, switch gears, distribution boards, lift fitting and all other parts made of metal shall be
bounded together & connected by means of specified earthing conductor to all efficient earthing system.
All earthing shall be in conformity with Indian Electricity Rules.

EARTHING CONDUCTORS:

Earthing conductors shall be of electrolytic copper / GI & shall be protected against mechanical injury or
corrosion. Zinc coating shall be as per latest IS codes.

SIZING OF EARTHING CONDUCTORS:

The cross-sectional area of copper earthing conductor shall not be smaller than the largest current
carrying conductor subject to an upper limit of 80 sqmm. If the area of the largest current carrying
conductor or busbars exceeds 160 sqmm than two or more earthing conductors shall be used in parallel, to
provide at least half the cross sectional area of the current carrying conductor or busbars. All fixture
outlets, boxes & junction boxes shall be earthed with multi-stranded copper wires.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 189

All three phase switches & distribution boards unto 60 amps, rating shall be earthed with 2 nos. distinct &
independent 3 mm dia GI wires. All three phase switches & distribution boards unto 100amps. Rating
shall be earthed with 2 nos. distinct & independent 4 mm dia GI wires. All 200 amp & above switches
shall be earthed with minimum of 2 nos. separate & independent 40 mm X 6 mm GI strip.

EARTH PIT DETAILS:

Copper/ Galvanised / cast iron earth plate of 60x60x0.6 cm / 1200x1200x1.2 cms in size buried in
specifically prepared earth pit of 1.5 meters below ground level with 40kg charcoal & salt with alternate
layers of charcoal & salt with 90mm dia GI pipe with funnel with funnel with wire mesh for watering &
brick masonry block cover, heavy duty CI cover complete as per IS 3043 with necessary length of double
GI earth wire of 6 SWG bolted with lug to plate with cadmium plated GI nut-bolts & covered in 12 mm
dia GI pipe 2.5 meters long complete connected to nearest switch gears as directed & duly tested by earth
tester.

Pipe electrodes shall be of 3 M long 40mm or 100 mm dia class B GI pipe. The GI pipes shall be
provided with holes at regular intervals as per IS 3043.

ARTIFICIAL TREATMENT OF SOIL

If the earth resistance is too high and the multiple electrode earthing does not give adequate low
resistance to earth, then the soil resistivity immediately surrounding the earth electrodes shall be reduced
by addition of sodium chloride calcium chloride, sodium carbonates copper sulphate, salt and soft coke or
charcoal in suitable proportions.

RESISTANCE TO EARTH

The resistance of earthing system shall not exceed 5.0 ohm.

7. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SIZTRIBUTION SYSTEM

GENERAL

The telephone system shall include providing main/ sub distribution frames, interconnecting cabling, tag
blocks inside the buildings, interconnecting telephone wires between tag block and telephone socket
outlets. The telephone socket outlet shall be modular type or as specified in the bill of quantities.

MAIN TAG BLOCK

The main / sub distribution frame shall be enclosed type made out of CRCA sheet steel of suitable
thickness (2 to 3.15 mm). This shall house necessary number of terminations with tags as specified with
provision for terminating incoming and outgoing cables. The terminations and the frame shall be of
standard make.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 190

The frame shall be suitable for outdoor application with IP55 protection.

This shall be mounted on suitable civil foundation with necessary GI pipe sleeves for taking incoming
and outgoing cables.

Outdoor termination block, if require to be used, shall be with weather proof enclosure with locking
facility housed with necessary brick and RCC foundation and excavation in soil etc. as required.

TELEPHONE CABLES

All telephone cables shall be PVC insulated, copper conductor conforming to latest IS and IEC standards.
Telephone cables shall be armoured/un armoured to suit the nature of application and indicated in the Bill
of quantities.

All cable shall be run in vertical or horizontal trunking, conduits or cable trays suitable prepared for
distribution and separated from electrical cabling/ wiring in an appropriate manner so as to eliminate
electromagnetic interference. All telephone locations to be in accordance with Owners requirements.

All cables shall be identified by tags and schedule identifying each termination to be issued to the client
upon completion of the cabling installation.

TELEPHONE TERMINAL BLOCKS

Telephone termination block shall be Krone make as per latest standards. The termination block should
have loop in-loop out arrangements as required.

8. INSTALLATION

The installation shall be carried out in accordance with the Indian Electricity Rules, the Codes of
practice of the Bureau of Indian Standards and other relevant regulations.

MEDIUM VOLTAGE SWITCH BOARDS

Switch Boards shall be floor mounted in the room on the pre-formed trenches constructed with top /
bottom entry for cables or free standing on floor with top entry for cables.

The portion of the trenches which is not covered by the switch board shall be covered with 6 mm thick
checkered steel plates with suitable reinforcement if required.

All unused cable entries shall be closed with suitable blind plugs or plates made from 4 mm thick sheet
steel bolted to the gland plates.

MCB DISTRIBUTION BOARD

MCB Distribution Board shall be fixed with bolts and nuts grouted to the wall concealed in the
cupboards / niches provided or flushed / semi flushed directly into the wall.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 191

WIRING

PVC insulated wires shall be drawn through concealed PVC conduits / open metal conduits.

The wires of a circuit shall not run through the conduits switch/ socket boxes of another circuit. A
common draw box with hylam barrier separating individual circuit wires may be adopted to minimise
the number of draw boxes.

Wires shall be terminated at the switch boxes with suitable crimping type tinned copper lugs.

The wiring shall be carried out by looping the phase conductors at the switch box and the neutral
conductors at the light, fans and sockets. For coping of wires in switch boxes, shrouded type multiway
10A/20A rated connectors shall be used.

CIRCUIT WIRING

The circuit wiring shall be from MCB distribution boards to first switch box and looping to the
consecutive switch box in the circuit including conduits and accessories.

POINT WIRING

The following shall be deemed to be included in light / Ceiling Fan / Exhaust fan / Call bell / 6A socket
points:

a. Conduit & Conduit accessories (bends, tee, deep junction boxes, fan book boxes) from switch
box to point.

b. Wiring of point from switch to point.

c. Earth wring of each point from switch to point.

d. Fixing accessories such as clips, nails, screws, phil plug, rent plug etc. as required.

e. Modular range of plate type cover plate, control switch, box etc.

f. Junction boxes, pull boxes etc.

g. Connectors for termination of point.

h. Ceiling rose / Angles holder / Battern holder for light points.

i. 6A socket outlet for Exhaust fan.

j. 6A socket outlet and switch for socket points.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 192

k. Cutting and chasing the wall for conduit & boxes installation and making good the same in
original finish after installation complete as required.

The point writing shall be classified as the following:

a. Short point - unto 3 mtrs.

b. Medium point - unto 6 mtrs.

c. Long point - unto 10 mtrs.

TELEPHONE WIRE

The telephone wire shall be drawn in the conduits provider for the purpose. It shall be terminated with
standard termination accessories at the end of socket pin and Telephone junction boxes.

SWITCH / SOCKET BOXES

Switch / Socket Boxes shall be concealed in the wall and the mounting height of the boxes shall be as
indicated in the drawings. Generally the lighting switch box will be + 1350 mm from FLL and sockets
will be at 450 mm from FFL.

The switch and socket front plates shall project beyond the switch / socket box. In the case of concealed
conduit wring, the joints between the box and the surrounding plaster is covered by the cover plate. The
cover plate shall be fixed with brass cup washers and full threaded brass screws.

CELING FANS

Concealed type fan hook boxes shall be provided for mounting of the ceiling fans.

The fan shall be fixed to the hook in such a way that the canopy covers the opening of the fan hook box.
Necessary down rods and other accessories shall be included as required for complete operation.

EXHAUST FANS

Exhaust fans shall be mounted on an MS ring which shall be 100 mm to 300 mm below the ceiling level.

The boxes shall be covered with 3 mm thick hylam sheet of approved colour. In case of concealed flush
mounting, the hylam sheet shall project 6 mm beyond the box so that the joint between the box and the
surrounding plaster is covered by the sheet. The hylam sheet shall be fixed to the box with brass cup
washers and full threaded brass screws.

LUMINARES

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 193

The installation of luminaires shall be at fixed locations indicated in the drawings with necessary fixing
accessories.

CABLES

The underground cable shall be laid in excavated trenches outside the building. The trenches shall be
excavated to a depth of not less than 800 mm and the cables shall be laid at a depth of 750 mm.

The cables shall be laid over a 50 mm thick sand cushion at bottom and 250 mm on top of cable and shall
be with bricks at either ends of trench and protected at top by slab / bricks. The gap between the cables
and the bricks shall be filled with sand. Above the brick, for 150 mm the cable trench shall be filled with
sand, after that for 400 mm ( i.e.) unto formed ground level the cable trench shall be back filled suitably
with soil.

The cable trench shall have the widths as indicated by suitably excavating in all types of soil to attain the
required width.

Cable markers shall be installed at every 30 m internal along all straight lines and at bends. The cable
markers shall be of cast iron and shall have a clear and legible inscription LT CABLE .

Wherever cables are required to enter the building the cable shall be drawn through hume pipe or GI pipe.
Suitable packing shall be made at both ends of the pipes. Cables inside building shall be run in cable
trays.

Where cables are required to cross the roads, cables and pipes of other services the cable shall be drawn
through hume pipe or GI pipe. Suitable sealing shall be made at both ends of the pipes.

Vertical runs of cables along the wall shall be laid through GI pipe of suitable diameter unto a height of
900 mm above finished floor level. The GI pipe shall be clipped to the wall with GI clamps and GI
screws. The distance between the clamps shall not exceed 400 mm.

The cable laying shall be done in such a way that there is no damage / injury to the cable. Adequate care
shall be taken while pulling cable from drum and white laying.

Sharp bends shall be avoided in the runs. The bending radius shall not be less than 12 times the diameter
of the cables.

No joints shall be permitted in the runs of the cables unto a run of 500 Metres.

Where more than one cable has to be laid along the same route, the cables shall be laid horizontally
touching each other and not one above the other.

The armour of the cables shall be effectively earthed at termination point through cable glands.

Suitable phase identifiers shall be provided at the terminals.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 194

The cables shall be laid in performed trenchers wherever required. The performed trench shall be RCC
casting on all the sides. 50x50x6 mm MS angle at required intervals shall be fixed to the casting. The
performed trench shall be covered with RCC cover which shall be capable of taking the heavy vehicular
load. The wall thickness of performed trench shall be suitable to take all type of loads.

STREET LIGHT POLES

Poles for external lighting shall be installed along the road / pathway edges as indicated in the drawing
and shall be provided with cement concrete foundation below the ground level and above the ground
level.

The concrete used for the foundation shall be fixed in 1:2:4 proportions with stone aggregate of 20 mm
nominal size. Concreting shall be done solidly to avoid honey combing using shuttering.

The depth and height of the concrete work shall be as per requirement of the pole heights.

STREET LIGHT LUMINAIRE

The luminaire shall be installed at the locations indicated over the poles. The lamps shall be fixed after
the luminaries are installed.

LIST OF MAKE OF COMPONENTS FOR PANEL

1. Switch Fuse Units - L&T

2. MCCB - L&T

3. Change Over Switches - L&T

4. UG cables - Unistar / CCI

5. 6A Switch / Socket - MK

6. Wiring Cables - Finolex

7. MCB DB, MCB - MDS

8. Capacitor - Universal / Asian

9. Volt meter / Ammeter - AE

10. Voltmeter / Ammeter Switch - AE

SPECIFICATION FOR PANEL( refer attached Drgs)

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 195

System :

The switch Board shall be suitable for operation on 3 phase, 4 wire, 415/433v, 50 cycles.

Standards :

The design, manufacturing of the various equipment covered by this specification shall comply with the
latest edition of the relevant Indian Standard and Indian Electricity Rules and Regulation.

Constructions :

The switch board shall be cubicle type and fabricated out of 16SWG CRCA sheet steel. The base frame
shall be made out of ISMC 100/75.

The Board shall be totally enclosed design, completely dust tight and vermin proof. Soft compressible
gasket shall be provided between all metal joints, doors and covers to ensure the switch board as dust and
vermin proof.

Self Threading screws shall not be used in the construction of switch boards. All hardware used shall be
hot dip galvanized.

All similar materials and removal parts of switch board shall be interchangeable.

The switch board shall be provided with lifting lugs for easy lifting.

Separate cable compartment shall be provided for incoming /outgoing cable.

Busbars :

The busbars shall be made of high conductivity, electro litic copper and shall be housed in a separate
compartment.

The busbars shall have suitable and uniform cross sectional area through out the length and to carry the
specified rate of current and to with stand the fault level.

The busbars shall be fully covered with heat shrinkable colour coded PVC sleeves. The inter connections
shall be sleeved with colour coded PVC sleeves / insulation tapes.

The busbars shall be supported on suitable, durable anti-cracking insulation support at short intervals to
with stand the forces due to short circuit in the system.

The minimum clearance between phases and body shall be maintained.

The busbar chamber shall be adequately ventilated with wire mesh protection.

Earthing :

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 196

All metallic parts of the switch board other than the current carrying parts shall be connected to the earth
bus of size 25X3 mm copper flat or suitable size.
Painting :

All steel work shall undergo the relevant process to obtain a perfect smooth surface and whole shall be
powder coated with necessary treatment. The colour shall be simens grey.

ELECTICAL INSTALLATION

Electrical installation shall be as per IS 732-1989 and IE rules.

Internal and external wiring in buildings shall be carried out in concealed PVC conduit of
minimum 2mm thickness. These PVC conducts shall be laid canting concrete or by making
chases in the brick wall and making good the wall after fixing of conducts at no extra cost.

Wiring for power and light/ fan crcuits shall be separate. Entire wring shall be done by flexible
PVC insured copper conductors of specified (in the job schedule ) size.

Point wiring:

The following components are deemed to be included in paint wiring.

Metal switch Board

Control switches 5A/ 15A as specified.

PVC Channels with cover.

Copper conductors for neutral / live earthing.

Ceiling Roses

All accessories required for termination.

The above components shall meet the following specific requirements.

Switch Boxes

Body : 16 SWG CRCA sheet. Flush type

Size : sufficient to accommodate required no. of switches.

Control Switches

Fans : 5 Amps SP Switch

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 197

Lights : 5 Amps SP Switch

Power Plug : 15 Amps 3 pin Plug combined SS type.

ERECTION AND EARTHING:

The conduit of each circuit or section shall be completed before conductors are drawn in. the
entire system of conduct after erection shall be tested for mechanical and electrical continuity
throughout and permanently connected to the earthing conforming to the requirements by means
of special approved type of earthing clamps efficiently fastened to conduit pipe in the
workmanlike manner for a perfect continuity between earth wire and conduit. Gas or water pipe
shall not be used as earth medium. If conduit pipes are liable to mechanical damage they shall be
adequately protected. In a conduit system the pipe must be continuous when passing through
walls or floors.

An insulated copper earthing wire of green colour having cross sectional area of 2.5 sq.mm. shall
be drawn in the conduit pipes alongwith the circuit wires for earthing of light fittings and pins of
socket outlets.

JOIN AND LOOPING PACK:

Phase or live conductors shall be looped at the switch box and natural conductor can be looped
either from the switch box or from the light fan or socket outlet.

In both systems of wiring, no bare or twist joints shall be made at intermediate points in the
through run of cables, unless the length of final sub-circuit of sub-main is more than the length of
the standard coil, as given by the manufacture of the cable.

Wiring Termination:

All terminations must be mechanically and electrically sound. There should be maximum surface
contact between the terminal and conductor and such contacts shall be light since loose contact
results in high resistance and over heating at the point. In case of securing a resistance conductor
at a ordinary screw termination, it is preferable to loop the conductor in a clockwise direction as
tightening the screw tends to close the loop rather than open it. At a pillar type terminal, the
single conductor shall be bent back into itself and if two or more conductors are to be terminated,
they shall be twisted together before inserting into terminals.

Identification of Wires :

The phase conductors shall be of any of the RYB colours and the neutral conductor shall be of
black colour. Further the phase conductors in one line shall be of only one colour i.e. either red
blue or yellow. Earthing conductor shall be green.

Testing and commissioning:

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

 198

After completion of installation, tests be carried out and test results shall be tabulated. Following
are the tests to be carried out and test certificates shall be handed over to the Engineer-in-Charge
for records.

Lighting Distribution Boards:

a) Insulation test between phase, and earth with 500 V meggar.

b) Operational Test

Safety Earthing:

a) All earthing circuits shall be checked for continuity. The earth resistance of all
identifiable electrical equipment shall be measured and recorded.

SAFETY EQUIPMENTS

DANGER NOTICES
Danger notices shall be affixed permanently in a conspicuous position in Hindi or English and the
local language of the district with sign of skull and bones at everyoverhead lines, transformer,
electrical equipments motors, etc.
FIRE BUCKETS
The fire bucket unit shall consist of our galvanised iron baskets, which shall be with round ottom,
and of 13 liters capacity. They shall be filled with dry sand. Arrangement shall be made to hang
them on GI pipe stand comprising of at least 2 vertical and one horizontal members of 50 mm GI
pipe. The stands shall have hooks and locking chain arrangement. The buckets and stand shall be
painted with epoxy red paint.
FIRE EXTINGUISHER
Co2 type Fire extinguishers of 5 Kg. capacity and Dry Chemical type Fire Extinguishers of 10
Kg capacity shall be of approved make. Extinguishers shall be fixed on walls/columns with
necessary clamps made out of 50 mm x 6mm MS flat and coated bolts and nuts grouted in
wall/column.
RUBBER MAT
Corrugated rubber insulating matting shall be provided in front of all power & motor control
centers, push button station and distribution board in the electrical rooms. The width of matting
shall be one meter. It shall be as ISI mark.
INSTRUCTION CHART
Printed instruction chart both in English and Hindi and duly framed with front glass, prescribing
treatment to be given to persons having Electric shock, shall be supplied.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

Header Page 1 of 106.
Index
• Buffer strip wall
•Canopy water rain pipe
•Foundation bolt and cattle trap
•Chain link fencing
• Compound wall
•Compound wall (Urban)
•Silica gel trap
•Box type culvert
•Curtain wall
•Electrical layout single line diagram
•Pump island
•Panel board type – I
•Panel board type – II
•Panel board type – III
•Paver laying typical
•Pipe line trench
•Plate type earthing
•Rain water harvesting pit
•Septic tank 25 persons
•Septic tank (bigger)
•Soak pit details
•Underground tank reinforcement details - I
•Underground tank reinforcement details – II
•9 KL tank in earth pit
•16 KL tank in earth pit
•22 KL tank in earth pit
•45 KL tank in earth pit
•70 KL tank in earth pit
•9 KL tank in RCC pit
•16 KL tank in RCC pit
•22 KL tank in RCC pit
•45 KL tank in RCC pit
•70 KL tank in RCC pit
•Hume pipe culvert 1
•NOTE: All the drawings are indicative and the same can be vary as per actual site conditions.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

Header Page 2 of 106.

230 mm thk Brick wall

50
20mm thk plastering
in C.M. 1:5 20 Drip mould in plaster
ID SIGN foundation
with cm 1:4 over to detail
2000 or as per site condition

brickwork top surface

300
15 mm thk plastering
in C.M. 1:5

Landscaped Area

20 mm thk plastering
with C.M. 1:4 over
brickwork top surface
FOUNDATION PLAN

230
100

minimum 3000/ AS PER SITE CONDITION

FOUNDATION PLAN
Filling with composed earth
suitable for landscaping

75
400

15 mm thk plastering
300

15mm thk plastering

with CM 1:5
FDL FDL
with CM 1:5

200
GL ROAD LVL
500

Brick masonary work

375
Earth filling
75 230 75 Brick masonary work in cm 1:5
75 75
P.c.c. 1:4:8
KERB WALL SECTION

100
230 230
SECTION A-A
TITAL NAME SIGN DATE DRAWING NO. :- HPCL - STD - 09
HINDUSTAN PETROLEUM DSGN
HP RELEASED FOR :- PRILIMINARY TENDER
CORPORATION LIMITED BUFFER WALL DRWN
INFORMATION APPROVAL CONSTRUCTION
CHKD
* EXPANSION JOINT TO BE PROVIDED AT EVERY 10M DETAIL APPD DATE REV, DESCRIPTION CHKD APPD
* FOUNDATION TO SOIL CONDITION
SCALE NORTH
* RETAINING WALL SHALL BE PROVIDED INCASE OF LEVEL DIFFRANCE IN (TYPICAL)
THE AD JOINING SITE
JOB NO : RA - HP - WZ - 2002
2

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

Header Page 3 of 106.

TITAL NAME SIGN DATE DRAWING NO. :- HPCL - STD - 28

HINDUSTAN PETROLEUM DSGN
HP RELEASED FOR :- PRILIMINARY TENDER
CORPORATION LIMITED RAIN WATER DRWN
INFORMATION APPROVAL CONSTRUCTION
CHKD
* FOR LOCATION OF SEPTIC TANK REFER LAYOUT DRAWING & NECESSARY
SLOPES TOWARDS DRAIN
DAWN TAKE PIPE APPD DATE REV, DESCRIPTION CHKD APPD
* ALL INLET & OUTLET CONNECTIONS WITH SEPTIC TANK SHALL BE CHECKED SCALE NORTH
FOR WATER TIGHTNESS BEFORE BURNING THE PIPES
* C.I. MANHOLE CONVERSE SUPORTING FRAME SHALL BE FIXED IN CONC.
DETAIL
SLAB AT THE TIME OF CASTING JOB NO : RA - HP - WZ - 2002
3

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

Header Page 4 of 106.

125
275 40

GROUTED IN CONCRETE
100
500-700(As per Site)
900

450(min)
150

TITAL NAME SIGN DATE DRAWING NO. :- HPCL - STD - 27

HINDUSTAN PETROLEUM DSGN
HP RELEASED FOR :- PRILIMINARY TENDER
CORPORATION LIMITED CATTLE TRAP AND DRWN 04.05.2009
INFORMATION APPROVAL CONSTRUCTION
CHKD
* FOR LOCATION OF SEPTIC TANK REFER LAYOUT DRAWING & NECESSARY
SLOPES TOWARDS DRAIN FOUNDATION BOLT APPD DATE REV, DESCRIPTION CHKD APPD
* ALL INLET & OUTLET CONNECTIONS WITH SEPTIC TANK SHALL BE CHECKED SCALE NORTH
FOR WATER TIGHTNESS BEFORE BURNING THE PIPES
* C.I. MANHOLE CONVERSE SUPORTING FRAME SHALL BE FIXED IN CONC. DETAIL 4
SLAB AT THE TIME OF CASTING JOB NO : RA - HP - WZ - 2002

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

Header Page 5 of 106.

50 mm MS pipe (Medium quality) MS clamp ISA 65x65x6 mm painted to ISA 65X65X6 mm

painted to approved colour approved colour
DETAIL 'C' 2400 c/c (max)
50x50mm chainlink
fencing tied with 10 SWG
GI wire at top and bottom pipe
50 mm chainlink
fencing tied with 10 SWG

1500
GI wire at top and bottom pipe
1500

50x50mm
MS pipe (M)

1200
P.C.C. 1:2:4
300x300x375

75
670

300

375
300

275
375
40 mm hole at the 200 c/c for tyeing 50 mm MS pipe (M) 450
NGL
FDL
the chain links with 14 SWG GI wire
300 RR Masonary

375
600
300x300x375 mm deep pocket left in the
compound wall and grouted with pcc 1:2:4
after placing the MS angle P.C.C. 1:4:8

100
ELEVATION SECTION OF COMPOUND WALL

FOOTING DETAIL
8mm MS bolt
50
50mm MS bolt (M)

100 100x6mm thk Ms plate weld

with 50mm GI.pipe with provision
of for bolting to Ms angle

DETAIL - 'C'

TITAL NAME SIGN DATE DRAWING NO. :- HPCL - STD - 15

HINDUSTAN PETROLEUM DSGN
HP RELEASED FOR :- PRILIMINARY TENDER
CORPORATION LIMITED CHAIN LINK DRWN 04.05.09
INFORMATION APPROVAL CONSTRUCTION
CHKD
* EXPANSION JOINT TO BE PROVIDED AT EVERY 10M FENCING APPD DATE REV, DESCRIPTION CHKD APPD
* FOUNDATION TO SOIL CONDITION SCALE NORTH
* RETAINING WALL SHALL BE PROVIDED (TYPICAL)
INCASE OF LEVEL DIFFERANCE IN THE ADJOINING SITE JOB NO : RA - HP - WZ - 2002 5

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

Header Page 6 of 106.

25x25mm (75mm long) square rod 2nos of 6mm thk(75 long) flat welded to
with hole welded to channel section
50x50mm box section with
6mm thk square plate holes for bolting
2nos. of 100x50x6mm
welded to the channel top 50x50 mm hollow ISMC welded together
with 3mm projection alround

100
square pipe

675 100
750

675
200
200
1800

1050

1200 230 mm thk

740 brick wall 150mm thk R.C.C. driveway
kerb wall laid to 1:200
300

slope
FDL

(varies) 50
230
15mm thk plastering

300
with CM 1:5
275

450
NGL FDL

150
(varies)

230mm thk

275
600
375

Brick wall

75 230 75
100

750

KERB WALL DETAIL

SECTION -1 COMPOUND WALL
TITAL NAME SIGN DATE DRAWING NO. :- HPCL - STD - 14
HINDUSTAN PETROLEUM DSGN
HP RELEASED FOR :- PRILIMINARY TENDER
CORPORATION LIMITED COMPOUND WALL DRWN 04.05.09
INFORMATION APPROVAL CONSTRUCTION
CHKD
* EXPANSION JOINT TO BE PROVIDED AT EVERY 10M
* FOUNDATION TO SOIL CONDITION
WITH GRILL DETAIL APPD DATE REV, DESCRIPTION CHKD APPD
SCALE NORTH
* RETAINING WALL SHALL BE PROVIDED INCASE OF LEVEL DIFFRANCE IN (TYPICAL)
THE AD JOINING SITE
JOB NO : RA - HP - WZ - 2002
6

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

Header Page 7 of 106.

345 100

150
C.C. 1:2:4 copping

75
18 mm Thk Ext. plaster
in C M 1:5

230 mm thk
brick wall

1800
1650

50
Pre Cast R.C.C. Kerb
300x600 white

600
50 rectified tiles
kerb wall
300

230

150
FDL
575

425
150

275

230 150

AS PER SITE 275

(varies)
75 230 75

Kerb At 'D' Portion

COMPOUND WALL 645

TITAL NAME SIGN DATE DRAWING NO. :- HPCL - STD - 13

HINDUSTAN PETROLEUM DSGN
HP RELEASED FOR :- PRILIMINARY TENDER
CORPORATION LIMITED COMPOUND WALL DRWN 04.05.09
INFORMATION APPROVAL CONSTRUCTION
CHKD
* ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN 'MM' U.N.O DETAIL APPD DATE REV, DESCRIPTION CHKD APPD
* READ THIS DRAWING WITH STANDING WORKS CONTRACT SCALE NORTH
7
FOR MODERNISATION TENDER SPECS. AND LATEST IS : CODES. (TYPICAL)
JOB NO : RA - HP - WZ - 2002

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

Header Page 8 of 106.

To 'T' hood vent

Glass case 90 mm dia

GI nut bolts to fix glass

case enclosure
Crystel gel

50 mm dia ms pipe union

50 mm- 40 mm dia ms
reducer

40 mm dia ms vent pipe

line from tank

FDL

SECTIONAL
ELEVATION
Glass case 90 mm dia

GI nut bolts to fix glass

case enclosure

PLAN
TITLE NAME SIGN DATE DRAWING NO. :-
HP DSGN RELEASED FOR :- PRILIMINARY TENDER
DRWN 04.05.09
INFORMATION APPROVAL CONSTRUCTION
CHKD
APPD DATE REV, DESCRIPTION CHKD APPD
SCALE NORTH

JOB NO : RA - HP - WZ - 2002
8

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

Header Page 9 of 106.

Y-20@125mm c/c Y-10@200mm c/c

12000(varies at site)

450
1900

1000

450
300 355 300 40 mm PVC PIPE
450

340mm R.R wall PLAN R.C.C. Culvert

Y-10 20@ 200 mm c/c

340
1900 APPROCH ROAD/DRIVEWAY LEVEL 345 mm thk B.W./R.R.
465 465 -150 MM FROM CENTER OF ROAD LEV. Masonary in C.M.1:5
200

200 mm thk R.C.C. slab

670
C.C. 1:2:4 bed black

760
3nos. Y-12@top+
20mm thk plastering with C.M. 1:5 3nos.Y-12 @ bottom

EXISTING GROUND LEVEL Y-8 @ 175 mm c/c

300
1000

200
R.C.C.culvert slab
Brick masonary/RR.masonary work (refer SEC A-A for
in C.M. 1:5 using sized stones and reinforcement deatail)
dimention shall be not less than 340x300(depth) mm size R.C.C.beam
200 mm as per specification
75
C.C.1:3:6 screed using 12mm size
100

75 450 1000 450 75

blue stone metal SECTION B-B
SECTION A-A P.C.C. 1:4:8

TITAL NAME SIGN DATE DRAWING NO. :- HPCL - STD - 16

HINDUSTAN PETROLEUM DSGN
HP RELEASED FOR :- PRILIMINARY TENDER
CORPORATION LIMITED DRWN 04.05.09
BOX CULVERT CHKD
INFORMATION APPROVAL CONSTRUCTION
* FOR LOCATION OF SEPTIC TANK REFER LAYOUT DRAWING & NECESSARY
SLOPES TOWARDS DRAIN APPD DATE REV, DESCRIPTION CHKD APPD
* ALL INLET & OUTLET CONNECTIONS WITH SEPTIC TANK SHALL BE CHECKED
FOR WATER TIGHTNESS BEFORE BURNING THE PIPES (TYPICAL) SCALE NORTH
* C.I. MANHOLE CONVERSE SUPORTING FRAME SHALL BE FIXED IN CONC.
SLAB AT THE TIME OF CASTING JOB NO : RA - HP - WZ - 2002 9

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

Header Page 10 of 106.

0.550 0.050 1.200

0.550
18MM
THK.POLISHED
BLACK GRANITE

1.600

2.725
0.550 1.300 0.550
0.575

2.400
TITAL NAME SIGN DATE DRAWING NO. :- HPCL - STD - 09
HINDUSTAN PETROLEUM DSGN
HP RELEASED FOR :- PRILIMINARY TENDER
CORPORATION LIMITED CURTAIN WALL DRWN 04.05.09
INFORMATION APPROVAL CONSTRUCTION
CHKD
* EXPANSION JOINT TO BE PROVIDED AT EVERY 10M
* FOUNDATION TO SOIL CONDITION
(TYPICAL) APPD DATE REV, DESCRIPTION CHKD APPD
SCALE NORTH
* RETAINING WALL SHALL BE PROVIDED INCASE OF LEVEL DIFFRANCE IN
THE AD JOINING SITE
JOB NO : RA - HP - WZ - 2002 10

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

Header Page 11 of 106.

* ALL INLET & OUTLET CONNECTIONS WITH SEPTIC TANK SHALL BE CHECKED
* C.I. MANHOLE CONVERSE SUPORTING FRAME SHALL BE FIXED IN CONC.

* FOR LOCATION OF SEPTIC TANK REFER LAYOUT DRAWING & NECESSARY

SLOPES TOWARDS DRAIN
FOR WATER TIGHTNESS BEFORE BURNING THE PIPES
SLAB AT THE TIME OF CASTING

HP

LDB -1
CL 9.50 KV
P1,P2,P3 LIGHT POLE 1200 V C9 6A SP MCB
(P1,P3 DOUBLE ARM P1 SINGLE ARM )

CORPORATION LIMITED
HINDUSTAN PETROLEUM
C10
HORDING DISPLAY LEFT 1250 V MCB
C13 16A SP MCB

40 A DP
(FUTURS)

4 WAY TPN

PDB - 1
CL 2.71 KW

ISO
6 A 3P MCB
WATER COOLER 1000 V
DISPENCER NO.1 373 W C25

DISPLAY NO.1 80 W C25

40 A DP
DISPENCER NO.2 373 W C26

ISO
DISPLAY NO.2 80 W C26 6A SP MCB

100 mA
63 A ELCB
P4,P5,P6 LIGHT POLE 1200 V
(P4,P6 DOUBLE ARM P5 SINGLE ARM )

PARK

40 A DP
ISO
PARK
20A SP MCB
6 A 3P MCB PVC WIRE
1.6 TR A/C 1500 V
DISPENCER NO.3 373 W C27 (FUTURE)

4P ELCB
100 mA

32 A
DISPLAY NO.3 80 W C27

6A SP MCB
DISPENCER NO.4 373 W C28

40 A DP
PARK

ISO
DISPLAY NO.4 80 W C28

3.5 C X 25 SQMM AYFY (C3)

HORDING DISPLAY RIGHT 1250 V 16A SP MCB

40 A DP
(FUTURS)

ISO
PVC WIRE
16A SWITCHED SOCKET 1250 V
(FUTURS)
6 A 3P MCB
DISPENCER NO.5 373 W C29

4C X 16 SQMM AYFY (C8)

DISPLAY NO.5 80 W C29
40 A DP
DISPENCER NO.6 373 W C30
ISO

DISPLAY NO.6 80 W C30

METER BOARD
MAIN PANEL

FROM MSEB
SERVIED CABLE
AIR COMPRESSOR

TPN
63 A
3 X 4 SQMM AYFY (C4)

5 HP
M

32 A
TPN
SINGLE LINE

6 KVAR

32 A
TPN
(TYPICAL)
DIAGRAM

CT

125 A
TP MCCB
5KVAR

32 A
TPN

A
TITAL

32 A
TPN

V
125 AFPCOS
SPARE

63 A
TPN
WATER PUMP

3 X 4 SQMM AYFY (C6)

4 WAY TPN

PDB - 2
CL 7.7 KW

1 HP

10 A 3P MCB
M

32 A
TPN

CANOPY LIGHT (JB1)250 W C13

CT
C14

15 KCA DG SET
FUSE

CL: 27.01 KW + 6 HP + 10KVAR

4X 16 SQMM AYFY

4X 16 SQMM AYFY (C2)

125 A
TPMCCB

CONTROL PANEL
CLOW FECIA JB - 1 1800 W C14
TPN
32 A
40 A DP

R
ISO

TPN 25 X 6 MM CU BUS BARS

CANOPY LIGHT 1250 W C13

5 X 250 W (JB1)
YSS

ASS

Y
63 A
TPN
APPD
CHKD
DRWN
DSGN
JOB NO : RA - HP - WZ - 2002

B
Y

10 A 3P MCB
SCALE

CANOPY LIGHT (JB2) 250 W C17

4P ELCB
100 mA

32 A

C18
NAME

CLOW FECIA JB - 2 1800 W C18

40 A DP
ISO

CANOPY LIGHT 1250 W C17

5 X 250 W (JB2)
SIGN

10 A 3P MCB
NORTH

CANOPY LIGHT (JB3) 250 W C19

CANOPY LIGHT 1250 W C19

5 X 250 W (JB3) CANOPY LIGHT JB -1 1250 W 8/10A SP MCB
LDB -3
DATE

CL 10.758 KW
6 WAY TPN
40 A DP

5 X 250W C31
3.5 X 25 SQMM AYFY (C7)

SPARE
ISO

CANOPY LIGHT JB -1 250 W C31

SPARE
C33

GRAND ID WELCOME & 1800 W C33 16A SP MCB

40 A DP

THANK YOU SIGNAGE

ISO
DATE REV, DESCRIPTION

RELEASED FOR :-
DRAWING NO. :- HPCL - STD - 40

SALES OFFICE LIGHTING 500 W

INFORMATION APPROVAL CONSTRUCTION

SPARE

CANOPY LIGHT JB -2 1250 W 8/10A SP MCB

5 X 250W C35
100 mA
63 A ELCB

CANOPY LIGHT JB -2 1250 W C35

C34

GLOW FECIA 1800 W C34

40 A DP

THANK YOU SIGNAGE

ISO

20A SP MCB
SALES OFFICE LIGHTING 500 W
BAND STRIP 830 W
PRILIMINARY

CANOPY LIGHT JB -3 1250 W

8/10A SP MCB
5 X 250W C36
CANOPY LIGHT JB -3 1250 W C36

NO SMOKE + AIR POINT + 200 W C40

EXIT SIGNAGE
16A SP MCB
NO SMOKE + ENTRY SIGNAGE 80 W C41
40 A DP
ISO
CHKD

SALES OFFICE LIGHTING 500 W

BAND STRIP 830 W

TENDER
APPD
11

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

Header Page 12 of 106.

80
90

500
150
DETAIL

ELEVATION

3200 175 925

900

550

900
175
PLAN
1000 4000 1000

6000

TITAL NAME SIGN DATE DRAWING NO. :- HPCL - STD - 10

HINDUSTAN PETROLEUM DSGN
HP RELEASED FOR :- PRILIMINARY TENDER
CORPORATION LIMITED DRWN
PUMP ISLAND CHKD
INFORMATION APPROVAL CONSTRUCTION
* ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN 'MM' U.N.O APPD DATE REV, DESCRIPTION CHKD APPD
* READ THIS DRAWING WITH STANDING WORKS CONTRACT
FOR MODERNISATION TENDER SPECS. AND LATEST IS : CODES. DETAIL (TYPICAL) SCALE NORTH

JOB NO : RA - HP - WZ - 2002 12

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

Header Page 13 of 106.

250
63 A 32 A
TPN TPN

CHAMBER
BUS BAR
32 A
250

63 A
TPN TPN

125 A 32 A
300

TPN TPN

CHAMBER
125 A
CHAMBER
300

2000
4P

CABLE
CABLE

B/C

63 A
250

63 A 4P
TPN GEN

32 A
CHAMBER
250

MCB
BUS BAR

DB TPN
250

32 A 32 A
TPN TPN
150 75

250 300 350 300 250

PANEL BOARD
(350 MM TO 400 DEPTH) TYPE - I
TITAL NAME SIGN DATE DRAWING NO. :- HPCL - STD - 43
HINDUSTAN PETROLEUM
13

HP DSGN RELEASED FOR :- PRILIMINARY TENDER

CORPORATION LIMITED DRWN
PANEL BOARD I CHKD
INFORMATION APPROVAL CONSTRUCTION
* FOR LOCATION OF SEPTIC TANK REFER LAYOUT DRAWING & NECESSARY
SLOPES TOWARDS DRAIN APPD DATE REV, DESCRIPTION CHKD APPD
* ALL INLET & OUTLET CONNECTIONS WITH SEPTIC TANK SHALL BE CHECKED
FOR WATER TIGHTNESS BEFORE BURNING THE PIPES
DETAIL SCALE NORTH
* C.I. MANHOLE CONVERSE SUPORTING FRAME SHALL BE FIXED IN CONC.
SLAB AT THE TIME OF CASTING JOB NO : RA - HP - WZ - 2002

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

Header Page 14 of 106.

300

125 A
125 A 125 A
300

4P
TPN TPN
EB C/O
GEN

63 A ON LINE
250

1500
CHANGE 32 A
4P
OVER TPN
TPN
CHAMBER

CHAMBER
32 A
CHAMBER
250

CABLE

CABLE
BUS BAR

MCB TPN
DB
250

32 A 32 A
TPN TPN
150 75

250 300 375 300 250

PANEL BOARD
(350 MM TO 400 DEPTH) TYPE - II
TITAL NAME SIGN DATE DRAWING NO. :- HPCL - STD - 42
HINDUSTAN PETROLEUM DSGN
HP RELEASED FOR :- PRILIMINARY TENDER
CORPORATION LIMITED PANEL BOARD II DRWN
INFORMATION APPROVAL CONSTRUCTION
CHKD
* FOR LOCATION OF SEPTIC TANK REFER LAYOUT DRAWING & NECESSARY
SLOPES TOWARDS DRAIN APPD DATE REV, DESCRIPTION CHKD APPD
DETAIL
14

* ALL INLET & OUTLET CONNECTIONS WITH SEPTIC TANK SHALL BE CHECKED SCALE NORTH
FOR WATER TIGHTNESS BEFORE BURNING THE PIPES
* C.I. MANHOLE CONVERSE SUPORTING FRAME SHALL BE FIXED IN CONC.
SLAB AT THE TIME OF CASTING JOB NO : RA - HP - WZ - 2002

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

Header Page 15 of 106.
300

63 A 63 A 63 A
250

TPN 4P 4P
EB C/O GEN

1200
CHAMBER

CHAMBER
63 A 32 A
250

CABLE

CABLE
TPN TPN
CHAMBER
BUS BAR
250

MCB 32 A
DB TPN
150 75

250 300 325 300 250

PANEL BOARD
(350 MM TO 400 DEPTH) TYPE - III

TITAL NAME SIGN DATE DRAWING NO. :- HPCL - STD - 41

HINDUSTAN PETROLEUM DSGN
HP RELEASED FOR :- PRILIMINARY TENDER
CORPORATION LIMITED DRWN
PANEL BOARD III CHKD
INFORMATION APPROVAL CONSTRUCTION
* FOR LOCATION OF SEPTIC TANK REFER LAYOUT DRAWING & NECESSARY
SLOPES TOWARDS DRAIN APPD DATE REV, DESCRIPTION CHKD APPD
* ALL INLET & OUTLET CONNECTIONS WITH SEPTIC TANK SHALL BE CHECKED
FOR WATER TIGHTNESS BEFORE BURNING THE PIPES
DETAIL SCALE NORTH
* C.I. MANHOLE CONVERSE SUPORTING FRAME SHALL BE FIXED IN CONC.
SLAB AT THE TIME OF CASTING JOB NO : RA - HP - WZ - 2002
15

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

Header Page 16 of 106.

CONCRETE SEGMENT
SAND BEDDING COURSE
PAVING UNITS

JOINT FILLING SAND

200
50 80

EDGE RESTRAINT

280
BASE COURSE R.C.C. 1:2:4 2 nos. 10mm
ON TOP AND 2 nos. 10mm
SUB BASE WORKING PLATFORM
BOTTOM AND STIRRUPS
SUB BASE 8mm 200mm c/c

SAND BEDDING COURSE

TITAL NAME SIGN DATE DRAWING NO. :- HPCL - STD - 08

HINDUSTAN PETROLEUM DSGN
HP RELEASED FOR :- PRILIMINARY TENDER
CORPORATION LIMITED DRWN
PAVER BLOCK CHKD
INFORMATION APPROVAL CONSTRUCTION
* ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN 'MM' U.N.O APPD DATE REV, DESCRIPTION CHKD APPD
* READ THIS DRAWING WITH STANDING WORKS CONTRACT (TYPICAL) SCALE NORTH
FOR MODERNISATION TENDER SPECS. AND LATEST IS : CODES.
JOB NO : RA - HP - WZ - 2002
16

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

Header Page 17 of 106.

FDL 230 450 230 R.C.C. PRECAST

COVER SLAB
100mm thk p.c.c. BEDDING
230 mm BRICK WORK
75 thk BRICK ON
EDGE PARTITION WALL

R.C.C. PRECAST
COVER SLAB 1060 40mm ERW MS PIPE
230 300 230
PIPE LINE TRENCH LAID TO REVERSE SLOPE
150

100 mm thk P.C.C. BEDDING

SAND FILLING
230 mm thk BRICK WORK DEATAIL TYPE 2
P.C.C. 1:4:8
(NEAR UG TANK)
100 400

15THK CEMENT PLASTERING

IN C.M 1:5
75 75 SAND FILLING

150thk FINISHED
POWER SUPPLY 10mm @ 125 c/c
AT TOP & BOT. 8mm @ 150 c/c
CABLES
910 40mm ERW MS PIPE

150
LAID TO REVERSE SLOPE
100 mm thk
PIPE LINE TRENCH DEATAIL TYPE 1 P.C.C. BEDDING
230 300 230
(AT DISPENSER)
REINFORCEMENT DETAIL

FOR TRENCH SLAB(PIPE LINE)

TITAL NAME SIGN DATE DRAWING NO. :- HPCL - STD - 17

HINDUSTAN PETROLEUM DSGN
HP RELEASED FOR :- PRILIMINARY TENDER
CORPORATION LIMITED DRWN
INFORMATION APPROVAL CONSTRUCTION
PIPE LINE CHKD
* ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN 'MM' U.N.O APPD DATE REV, DESCRIPTION CHKD APPD
* READ THIS DRAWING WITH STANDING WORKS CONTRACT
FOR MODERNISATION TENDER SPECS. AND LATEST IS : CODES.
TRENCH (TYPICAL) SCALE NORTH

JOB NO : RA - HP - WZ - 2002
17

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

Header Page 19 of 106.

100 mm THK R.C.C. COVER SLAB

100 1500 100
G.L. WITH M-15 CONCRETE WITH
8 # REINF. AT 150 C/C BOTH WAYS
200 mm PVC PIPE AS OUTLET

600
CUT OUT FOR
SAND FILLING
DRAIN IN-LET

600
R.C.C. HUME PIPES (NP2 CLASS)
A A
0
75
R

R 850

900
40-60 M M HBG METAL

PLAN - RAIN WATER HARVESTING PIT

900 230 mm THK ROCK

SECTION A-A

TITAL NAME SIGN DATE DRAWING NO. :- HPCL - STD - 19

HINDUSTAN PETROLEUM DSGN
HP RELEASED FOR :- PRILIMINARY TENDER
CORPORATION LIMITED DRWN
RAIN WATER CHKD
INFORMATION APPROVAL CONSTRUCTION
* ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN 'MM' U.N.O
* READ THIS DRAWING WITH STANDING WORKS CONTRACT
HARVESTING PIT APPD DATE REV, DESCRIPTION CHKD APPD
SCALE NORTH
FOR MODERNISATION TENDER SPECS. AND LATEST IS : CODES.
(TYPICAL)
JOB NO : RA - HP - WZ - 2002 19

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

Header Page 20 of 106.

P.C.C. COWEL WITH B

75Ø P.V.C. MOSQUITO PROOF
VENTILETING PIPE WIRE MESH 2300
12 THK C.M. 1:4 PLASTER
FOR R.C.C. SLAB
75 230 400 230 75

230 75
600 DIA. MEDIUM DUTY
TOP LEVEL OF TANK
TO SUIT SLOPES MANHOLE COVER
100 THK R.C.C. 1:2:4 SLAB
P.C.C. 1:3:5 115 thk BK
MASONARY

300
A PARTITION WALL
A
75

WITH BAFFLES

1100
150 OUTLET PIPE

20 THK C.M. 1:4

150 S.W. INLET PIPE
PLASTER 12 THK PLASTER (1:4)
FROM INSPECTION
TWO LAYERS WITH 3% APPYD WATER
CHAMBER
600 C.I. MEDIUM DUTY PROOFING COMPOUND
MANHOLE COVER WITH FRAME & NEAT CEMENT SUPLY FINISH
R.C.C. LINTEL 230 THK
BK WALL
200

75 230
IN C M 1:5
375

SLOPE

GENERAL ARRANGEMENT PLAN FOR 25 USERS

230 THK
RUBBLE
FACING

8 @150 C/C

150 150
STIRRUPS

200
3-10 TOP & BOT
100 300
115 THK BAFFLE WALL
P.C.C. 1:3:6
BEDDING
DETAIL - 1

1560
100

8 @ 200 C/C

100
200

P.C.C. 1:3:6 R.C.C.

230 THK BEDDING 8 @ 150 C/C M15 GRADE
(1:2:4)
BK WALL
IN C M 1:5 500
375

200

150
VIEW D-D
TYP. R.C.C.
1100 COVER SLAB REINF. DETAIL

TITAL NAME SIGN DATE DRAWING NO. :- HPCL - STD - 20

HINDUSTAN PETROLEUM DSGN
HP RELEASED FOR :- PRILIMINARY TENDER
CORPORATION LIMITED DRWN
SEPTIC TANK CHKD
INFORMATION APPROVAL CONSTRUCTION
* FOR LOCATION OF SEPTIC TANK REFER LAYOUT DRAWING & NECESSARY
SLOPES TOWARDS DRAIN
* ALL INLET & OUTLET CONNECTIONS WITH SEPTIC TANK SHALL BE CHECKED
(25 PERSONS USE) APPD
SCALE NORTH
DATE REV, DESCRIPTION CHKD APPD

FOR WATER TIGHTNESS BEFORE BURNING THE PIPES

* C.I. MANHOLE CONVERSE SUPORTING FRAME SHALL BE FIXED IN CONC.
SLAB AT THE TIME OF CASTING
DETAIL JOB NO : RA - HP - WZ - 2002
20

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

Header Page 21 of 106.
P.V.C. Cowl with
Top of Tank mosquito proof
to suit Slopes wire mesh

150 Ø Ventilaing pipe 600 Ø Medium Duty

Manhole Cover
150 mm thk
R.C.C.Slab
1500

P.C.C.1:3:6

Plaster 20 mm thk
in two layers

1775
1375
230 thk Brick wall
in 1:5 C.M
Bottom of
Excavation C.C. 1:2:4 Flooring
Slope 1:150
300

to suit Slopes in C.M.Finishing

150 thk P.C.C.1:3:6

CROSS SECTION
LONGITUDINAL SECTION 230 thk Rubble Patching
75

75 230 3250 230 75

600Ø Medium Duty

230

Manhole cover with frame

150 Ø outlet Pipe

To Soak Pit
1500

150 Ø S.W. Inlet 115 mm Bk Masonary

Pipefrom Inspection Partition wall with 12 mm thk Plaster (1:4) with
Chamber Baffles 3% water proofing compound
230
75

PLAN
TITAL NAME SIGN DATE DRAWING NO. :- HPCL - STD - 09
HINDUSTAN PETROLEUM DSGN
HP RELEASED FOR :- PRILIMINARY TENDER
CORPORATION LIMITED SEPTIC TANK DRWN
INFORMATION APPROVAL CONSTRUCTION
CHKD
* EXPANSION JOINT TO BE PROVIDED AT EVERY 10M BIGGER SIZE APPD DATE REV, DESCRIPTION CHKD APPD
* FOUNDATION TO SOIL CONDITION
SCALE NORTH
* RETAINING WALL SHALL BE PROVIDED INCASE OF LEVEL DIFFRANCE IN (TYPICAL)
THE AD JOINING SITE
JOB NO : RA - HP - WZ - 2002
21

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

Header Page 22 of 106.

EARTH FILLING
STRAW FILLING
13 MM THK PLASTER
BRICK BAT FILLING IN C.M.1:3
BEND AS PER IS:729 40 MMTO 50 MM SIZE

GROUND LEVEL
BK.MASONARY
IN CM 1:4

300 30 MM THK C.M.1:2

3000
BRICK MASONARY
WITH DRY JOINTS

DRY BRICK MASONARY

CHAMBER

115 300 115

115 300 115
230 2500 230

SECTION X-X

230 2500 230

SOAK PIT PLAN

TITAL NAME SIGN DATE DRAWING NO. :- HPCL - STD - 21

HINDUSTAN PETROLEUM DSGN
HP RELEASED FOR :- PRILIMINARY TENDER
CORPORATION LIMITED DRWN
SOAK PIT DETAILS CHKD
INFORMATION APPROVAL CONSTRUCTION
* FOR LOCATION OF SEPTIC TANK REFER LAYOUT DRAWING & NECESSARY
SLOPES TOWARDS DRAIN APPD DATE REV, DESCRIPTION CHKD APPD
* ALL INLET & OUTLET CONNECTIONS WITH SEPTIC TANK SHALL BE CHECKED SCALE NORTH
FOR WATER TIGHTNESS BEFORE BURNING THE PIPES
* C.I. MANHOLE CONVERSE SUPORTING FRAME SHALL BE FIXED IN CONC.
SLAB AT THE TIME OF CASTING JOB NO : RA - HP - WZ - 2002 22

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

Header Page 23 of 106.

man-hole as per tank detail

man-hole as per tank detail
0.20 M. THK. R.C.C. SLAB

0.05 thk. p.c.c. as leveling bed

sand filling
sand filling
0.35 M THK. B.B.MASONARY
PRODUCT TANK
PRODUCT TANK
2.25M. DIA
25mm dia holding down bolt

P.C.C.
R.C.C.beam(0.8X0.35) 8 T stirrups thro'out
P.C.C. 2-12 T t & b.

CROSS SECTION L. SECTION

0.40

TWO LAYERS OF
0.40

PLAN WITH R.C.C. DETAILS

TITAL NAME SIGN DATE DRAWING NO. :- HPCL - STD - 29

HINDUSTAN PETROLEUM DSGN
HP RELEASED FOR :- PRILIMINARY TENDER
CORPORATION LIMITED UNDER GROUND DRWN
INFORMATION APPROVAL CONSTRUCTION
* FOR LOCATION OF SEPTIC TANK REFER LAYOUT DRAWING & NECESSARY PRODUCT TANK CHKD
SLOPES TOWARDS DRAIN APPD DATE REV, DESCRIPTION CHKD APPD
* ALL INLET & OUTLET CONNECTIONS WITH SEPTIC TANK SHALL BE CHECKED
FOR WATER TIGHTNESS BEFORE BURNING THE PIPES
REINFORCEMENT SCALE NORTH
* C.I. MANHOLE CONVERSE SUPORTING FRAME SHALL BE FIXED IN CONC.
SLAB AT THE TIME OF CASTING
DETAIL JOB NO : RA - HP - WZ - 2002 23

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

Header Page 24 of 106.

man-hole as per tank detail

0.20 M. THK. R.C.C. SLAB
PLAN WITH R.C.C. DETAILS

0.05 thk. p.c.c. as leveling bed

sand filling
0.35 M THK. B.B.MASONARY
0.40

PRODUCT TANK
2.00M. DIA
25mm dia holding down bolt

0.40
P.C.C.
R.C.C.beam(0.7X0.35)
P.C.C.
CROSS SECTION

0.05 thk. p.c.c. as leveling bed

sand filling sand filling
man-hole as per tank detail
0.35 M THK. B.B.MASONARY
PRODUCT TANK PRODUCT TANK

25mm dia holding down bolt

R.C.C.beam(0.35X0.35)
8 T stirrups thro'out
P.C.C.
2-12 T t & b.

L. SECTION
TITAL NAME SIGN DATE DRAWING NO. :- HPCL - STD - 30
HINDUSTAN PETROLEUM DSGN
HP RELEASED FOR :- PRILIMINARY TENDER
CORPORATION LIMITED UNDER GROUND DRWN
INFORMATION APPROVAL CONSTRUCTION
* FOR LOCATION OF SEPTIC TANK REFER LAYOUT DRAWING & NECESSARY 9KL PRODUCT TANK CHKD
SLOPES TOWARDS DRAIN APPD DATE REV, DESCRIPTION CHKD APPD
* ALL INLET & OUTLET CONNECTIONS WITH SEPTIC TANK SHALL BE CHECKED REINFORCEMENT SCALE NORTH
FOR WATER TIGHTNESS BEFORE BURNING THE PIPES
* C.I. MANHOLE CONVERSE SUPORTING FRAME SHALL BE FIXED IN CONC. DETAIL 24
SLAB AT THE TIME OF CASTING JOB NO : RA - HP - WZ - 2002

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

Header Page 25 of 106.

0.23m thk bk kerb

in 1:5 CM
4.16 3.16
P.C.C.1:4:8
0.35

0.10m thk
2.70
0.35 3.00 0.35
2.00
3.16

Product tank Sand Filling

for 9 KL

Ø
2.
00
0.35

R.C.C.bottom raft
0.10m thk P.C.C.
1:4:8
compacting sub
PLAN SECTION
grade earth pit

TITAL NAME SIGN DATE DRAWING NO. :- HPCL - STD - 34

HINDUSTAN PETROLEUM DSGN
HP RELEASED FOR :- PRILIMINARY TENDER
CORPORATION LIMITED 9 KL TANK DRWN
INFORMATION APPROVAL CONSTRUCTION
CHKD
* FOR LOCATION OF SEPTIC TANK REFER LAYOUT DRAWING & NECESSARY
SLOPES TOWARDS DRAIN
EARTH. PIT DETAIL APPD DATE REV, DESCRIPTION CHKD APPD
* ALL INLET & OUTLET CONNECTIONS WITH SEPTIC TANK SHALL BE CHECKED SCALE NORTH
FOR WATER TIGHTNESS BEFORE BURNING THE PIPES
* C.I. MANHOLE CONVERSE SUPORTING FRAME SHALL BE FIXED IN CONC.
(TYPICAL)
SLAB AT THE TIME OF CASTING JOB NO : RA - HP - WZ - 2002

25

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

Header Page 26 of 106.

0.23m thk bk kerb

in 1:5 CM
3.16
2.70
P.C.C. 1:4:8
0.10 m thk

Sand Filling

0.85
6.61

Ø
2.
00
R.C.C.1:2:4 bot raft
5.45
Product tank 0.10m thk P.C.C.

2.00
3.16

for 16 KL 1:4:8
compacting sub
SECTION grade earth pit

PLAN
TITAL NAME SIGN DATE DRAWING NO. :- HPCL - STD - 35
HINDUSTAN PETROLEUM DSGN
HP RELEASED FOR :- PRILIMINARY TENDER
CORPORATION LIMITED 16 KL TANK DRWN
INFORMATION APPROVAL CONSTRUCTION
CHKD
* FOR LOCATION OF SEPTIC TANK REFER LAYOUT DRAWING & NECESSARY
SLOPES TOWARDS DRAIN
EARTH PIT DETAIL APPD DATE REV, DESCRIPTION CHKD APPD
* ALL INLET & OUTLET CONNECTIONS WITH SEPTIC TANK SHALL BE CHECKED SCALE NORTH
FOR WATER TIGHTNESS BEFORE BURNING THE PIPES
* C.I. MANHOLE CONVERSE SUPORTING FRAME SHALL BE FIXED IN CONC.
(TYPICAL)
SLAB AT THE TIME OF CASTING JOB NO : RA - HP - WZ - 2002

26

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

Header Page 27 of 106.

3.41 0.23 m thk bk kerb

in CM 1:5

P.C.C.1:4:8

0.85
2.95
0.10m thk

Sand Filling

3.69
7.05
Ø2.25
R.C.C.1:2:4 bot raft
5.89 0.10m thk P.C.C.
1:4:8
3.41

2.25
Product tank
compacted sub
for 22 KL
grade earth pit

SECTION

PLAN
TITAL NAME SIGN DATE DRAWING NO. :- HPCL - STD - 36
HINDUSTAN PETROLEUM DSGN
HP RELEASED FOR :- PRILIMINARY TENDER
CORPORATION LIMITED 22 KL TANK DRWN
INFORMATION APPROVAL CONSTRUCTION
CHKD
* FOR LOCATION OF SEPTIC TANK REFER LAYOUT DRAWING & NECESSARY
SLOPES TOWARDS DRAIN
EARTH. PIT DETAIL APPD DATE REV, DESCRIPTION CHKD APPD
* ALL INLET & OUTLET CONNECTIONS WITH SEPTIC TANK SHALL BE CHECKED SCALE NORTH
FOR WATER TIGHTNESS BEFORE BURNING THE PIPES
* C.I. MANHOLE CONVERSE SUPORTING FRAME SHALL BE FIXED IN CONC.
(TYPICAL)
SLAB AT THE TIME OF CASTING JOB NO : RA - HP - WZ - 2002

27

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

Header Page 28 of 106.

0.23m thk bk kerb 4.01

in CM1:5
Driveway top

0.85
P.C.C.1:4:8 0.10m thk 3.55

Sand Filling

7.81
Ø3
.00

6.65
4.16

3.00
Product tank 0.10m P.C.C.1:4:8
for 45 KL R.C.C.
compacted sub
bottom raft
grade earth pit

SECTION
PLAN
TITAL NAME SIGN DATE DRAWING NO. :- HPCL - STD - 37
HINDUSTAN PETROLEUM DSGN
HP RELEASED FOR :- PRILIMINARY TENDER
CORPORATION LIMITED 45 KL TANK DRWN
INFORMATION APPROVAL CONSTRUCTION
CHKD
* FOR LOCATION OF SEPTIC TANK REFER LAYOUT DRAWING & NECESSARY
SLOPES TOWARDS DRAIN
EARTH PIT DETAIL APPD DATE REV, DESCRIPTION CHKD APPD
* ALL INLET & OUTLET CONNECTIONS WITH SEPTIC TANK SHALL BE CHECKED SCALE NORTH
FOR WATER TIGHTNESS BEFORE BURNING THE PIPES (TYPICAL)
* C.I. MANHOLE CONVERSE SUPORTING FRAME SHALL BE FIXED IN CONC.
SLAB AT THE TIME OF CASTING JOB NO : RA - HP - WZ - 2002

28

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

Header Page 29 of 106.

0.23m thk bk kerb 4.01

in CM1:5
Driveway top

0.85
P.C.C.1:4:8 0.10m thk 3.55

Sand Filling

11.66
Ø3
.00

10.50
4.16

3.00
Product tank 0.10m P.C.C.1:4:8
for 70 KL R.C.C.
compacted sub
bottom raft
grade earth pit

SECTION
PLAN
TITAL NAME SIGN DATE DRAWING NO. :- HPCL - STD - 37
HINDUSTAN PETROLEUM DSGN
HP RELEASED FOR :- PRILIMINARY TENDER
CORPORATION LIMITED 70 KL TANK DRWN
INFORMATION APPROVAL CONSTRUCTION
CHKD
* FOR LOCATION OF SEPTIC TANK REFER LAYOUT DRAWING & NECESSARY
SLOPES TOWARDS DRAIN
EARTH PIT DETAIL APPD DATE REV, DESCRIPTION CHKD APPD
* ALL INLET & OUTLET CONNECTIONS WITH SEPTIC TANK SHALL BE CHECKED SCALE NORTH
FOR WATER TIGHTNESS BEFORE BURNING THE PIPES (TYPICAL)
* C.I. MANHOLE CONVERSE SUPORTING FRAME SHALL BE FIXED IN CONC.
SLAB AT THE TIME OF CASTING JOB NO : RA - HP - WZ - 2002

29

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

Header Page 30 of 106.

MANHOLE CHEMBER 0.20 M. THK. R.C.C. SLAB

0.20
0.85

0.85

0.85
MAN HOLE
0.35 0.35 M THK. B.B.MASONARY

0.30

0.30

1.45

0.30
3.00

2.95
SAND FILLING 0.35

2.00
0.45 RCC Coping Band

2.00
0
9 KL. TANK 0.45 .0
Ø2

1.50
25mm dia holding down bolt

8 T stirrups thro'out
@100c/c 8 T stirrups thro'out
2-16 T t & b. @100c/c

0.35
P.C.C. 4-16 T t & b.
R.C.C.beam(0.35X0.35) P.C.C.
SOLLING R.C.C.beam(0.7X0.35)

.15
SOLLING P.C.C.
SOLLING
LONG. SECTION CROSS SECTION
4.40

0.35

0.45 0.35
0.45
0.40
2NO. TRIMMING BARS
12 T @ 180 c/c 16 T @ 60 (for Manhole)
(Typical)

2.00

2.00
3.60

16 T @ 100 c/c
MAN HOLE

3.00
9 KL. TANK

0.35 0.45
0.45

0.35

0.35 0.35 3.00 0.35 0.35

PLAN
Ajit Thakur And drawn scale
INSTALLATION OF
HP HINDUSTAN PETROLEUM CORPORATION LTD. Associates 9KL TANK IN R.C.C. PIT
architects checked date 04.05.09
WEST ZONE OFFICE, R. & C. BUILDING, BYCULLA, MUMBAI. interiors
landscapes 5, R.M.Corner, Paud-road,
approved file Dr.No. REV No.
CONSULTANTS
Kothrud, Pune-29.
Ph. No.- 020-25286426. 2
30

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

Header Page 31 of 106.

0.85

0.85
0.95
MAN HOLE SAND FILLING

0.30

0.30
5.45
MANHOLE CHEMBER

0.20
2.00
0.20 M. THK. R.C.C. SLAB
16 KL. TANK

0.85
SAND FILLING 0.35
0.35 M THK. B.B.MASONARY

0.30
8 T stirrups thro'out
@100c/c
2-16 T t & b. 0.45 0.45 M THK. B.B.MASONARY
P.C.C.

1.00
R.C.C.beam(0.35X0.35)
LONG. SECTION

2.95
SOLLING
0.35
RCC Coping Band

2.00
6.85 . 00
Ø2
25mm dia holding down bolt

0.35

0.35

1.15
0.45
0.60
0.60

8 T stirrups thro'out @100 c/c

0.60
HOLE FAST FOR ANKERING

0.35
4-16 T t & b.
P.C.C.
R.C.C.beam(0.8X0.35)

.15
0.40
SOLLING P.C.C.
5.45 2NO. TRIMMING BARS
16 T @ 60 (for Manhole) SOLLING
12 T @ 180 c/c
(Typical) CROSS SECTION
16 T @ 100 c/c
2.00

2.00
3.90

16 KL. TANK
MAN HOLE

0.60
0.60
0.45
0.35

0.35

0.35 0.35 5.45 0.35 0.35

PLAN

Ajit Thakur And drawn scale

HP
HINDUSTAN PETROLEUM CORPORATION LTD. Associates 16 KL TANK R.R.C.
WEST ZONE OFFICE, R. & C. BUILDING, BYCULLA, MUMBAI. checked date 20.11.05 PIT DETAIL (TYPICAL)
architects
interiors REV No.
landscapes 5, R.M.Corner, Paud-road,
approved file Dr.No.
CONSULTANTS
Kothrud, Pune-29.
Ph. No.- 020-25286426. 2

31

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

Header Page 32 of 106.

MANHOLE CHEMBER

0.20
0.20 M. THK. R.C.C. SLAB

0.85

0.85

0.85
0.95
0.35
MAN HOLE

0.30

0.30

0.30
0.35 M THK. B.B.MASONARY

0.45 0.45 M THK. B.B.MASONARY

1.00

3.20
0.35

2.25

2.25
22 KL. TANK 2.25 RCC Coping Band

25mm dia holding down bolt

1.15
0.60

8 T stirrups thro'out @ 100 c/c. 8 T stirrups thro'out @100 c/c

0.35X0.35 M. R.C.C. BEAM

0.35
2-16 T t & b. 4-16 T t & b.
P.C.C. P.C.C.
R.C.C.beam(0.35X0.35) R.C.C.beam(0.8X0.35)

.15
SOLLING SOLLING P.C.C.
LONG. SECTION SOLLING
CROSS SECTION

7.29

0.35

0.35
0.45
0.60

0.60
HOLE FAST FOR ANKERING

0.40

2NO. TRIMMING BARS

12 T @ 180 c/c
MAN HOLE 16 T @ 60 (for Manhole)
(Typical)
4.15

2.25

2.25
22 KL. TANK
16 T @ 100 c/c

5.89
0.60
0.60
0.45
0.35

0.35

0.35 0.35 5.89 0.35 0.35

PLAN

Ajit Thakur And drawn scale

HP
HINDUSTAN PETROLEUM CORPORATION LTD. Associates 22 KL TANK R.R.C.
WEST ZONE OFFICE, R. & C. BUILDING, BYCULLA, MUMBAI. checked date 04.05.09 PIT DETAIL (TYPICAL)
architects
interiors REV No.
landscapes 5, R.M.Corner, Paud-road,
approved file Dr.No.
Kothrud, Pune-29.
2
CONSULTANTS Ph. No.- 020-25286426.
32

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

Header Page 33 of 106.

2-20 T t & b.
MANHOLE CHEMBER
0.30 M. THK. R.C.C. SLAB

0.30
0.95

0.95

0.95
0.95
MAN HOLE SAND FILLING
SAND FILLING

0.30

0.30
0.35 M THK. B.B.MASONARY

0.30
0.35
6.65

0.45 0.45 M THK. B.B.MASONARY

1.20
45 KL. TANK

3.95
3.00
0.35 ANCHORING BOLT

3.00
.00
Ø3

1.50
25mm dia holding down bolt
0.60
8 T stirrups thro'out
@100c/c 8 T stirrups thro'out
2-16 T t & b. @100c/c
P.C.C.

.15 0.35
R.C.C.beam(0.35X0.35) 4-16 T t & b.
SOLLING LONG. SECTION P.C.C.
R.C.C. beam(0.8X0.35)
SOLLING P.C.C.
8.05 SOLLING
CROSS SECTION

0.35
0.60
HOLE FAST FOR ANKERING

0.65

2NO. TRIMMING BARS

16 T @ 150 c/c
12 T @ 60 .
(Typical)
MAN HOLE 45 KL. TANK
Hidden Beam
2-20 T t & b.

16 T @ 90 c/c
4.90

3.00

3.00
6.65
0.85

0.35
0.60
0.45
0.35

0.35

0.35 0.35 6.65 0.35 0.35

PLAN

Ajit Thakur And drawn scale

HP
HINDUSTAN PETROLEUM CORPORATION LTD. Associates 45 KL TANK R.R.C.
WEST ZONE OFFICE, R. & C. BUILDING, BYCULLA, MUMBAI. checked date 04.05.09 PIT DETAIL (TYPICAL)
architects
interiors REV No.
landscapes 5, R.M.Corner, Paud-road,
approved file Dr.No.
CONSULTANTS
Kothrud, Pune-29.
Ph. No.- 020-25286426. 2

33

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

Header Page 34 of 106.

2-20 T t & b. 2-20 T t & b.

0.30 M. THK. R.C.C. SLAB

0.95

0.95
0.95
MAN HOLE SAND FILLING
0.35 M THK. B.B.MASONARY

0.30

0.30
MANHOLE CHEMBER
0.30 M. THK. R.C.C. SLAB

0.30
10.50

0.95
SAND FILLING
0.35 M THK. B.B.MASONARY
70 KL. TANK

0.30
3.00
0.45 M THK. B.B.MASONARY

1.20

3.95
0.35 ANCHORING BOLT

3.00
.00
Ø3
P.C.C. 2-16 T t & b.
R.C.C.beam(0.35X0.35)
SOLLING
LONG. SECTION 8 T stirrups thro'out

1.50
P.C.C. 25mm dia holding down bolt
@100c/c
SOLLING
8 T stirrups thro'out
@100c/c

.15 0.35
4-16 T t & b.
P.C.C.
R.C.C. beam(0.8X0.35)
11.90 SOLLING P.C.C.
SOLLING

0.35
CROSS SECTION

0.60
HOLE FAST FOR ANKERING

0.65

16 T @ 180 c/c

MAN HOLE 70 KL. TANK

Hidden Beam

Hidden Beam
2-20 T t & b.

2-20 T t & b.
16 T @ 90 c/c
4.90

3.00

3.00
2NO. TRIMMING BARS
16 T @ 60 (for Manhole)
(Typical)
10.50

0.60
0.60
0.45
0.35

0.36
0.35 0.35 10.50 0.35 0.35

PLAN

HINDUSTAN PETROLEUM CORPORATION LTD. Ajit Thakur And drawn scale

70 KL TANK R.R.C.
HP
WEST ZONE OFFICE, R. & C. BUILDING, BYCULLA, MUMBAI.
Associates PIT DETAIL (TYPICAL)
architects checked date 04.05.09
interiors REV No.
landscapes 5, R.M.Corner, Paud-road,
approved file Dr.No.
CONSULTANTS
Kothrud, Pune-29.
Ph. No.- 020-25286426. 2
34

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

Header Page 35 of 106.

SITE
ROAD
WBM.

300MM EARTH CUTION

900/1000 MM DIA HUME PIPE

0.
9/ NP3 CLASS
1.
00
m BRICK WORK
.

P.C.C. 0.15 M THK.

SECTION

15.0 M.
900/1000 MM DIA HUME PIPE
NP3 CLASS

BRICK WORK

UCR. 0.35 M THK.

PLAN
TITAL NAME SIGN DATE DRAWING NO. :- HPCL - STD - 28
HINDUSTAN PETROLEUM DSGN
HP RELEASED FOR :- PRILIMINARY TENDER
CORPORATION LIMITED HUME PIPE DRWN 04.05.09
INFORMATION APPROVAL CONSTRUCTION
CHKD
* FOR LOCATION OF SEPTIC TANK REFER LAYOUT DRAWING & NECESSARY
SLOPES TOWARDS DRAIN
CULVERT APPD DATE REV, DESCRIPTION CHKD APPD
* ALL INLET & OUTLET CONNECTIONS WITH SEPTIC TANK SHALL BE CHECKED SCALE NORTH
FOR WATER TIGHTNESS BEFORE BURNING THE PIPES
* C.I. MANHOLE CONVERSE SUPORTING FRAME SHALL BE FIXED IN CONC.
DETAIL
SLAB AT THE TIME OF CASTING JOB NO : RA - HP - WZ - 2002
35

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

Header Page 36 of 106.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

Header Page 37 of 106.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

Header Page 38 of 106.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

Header Page 39 of 106.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

Header Page 40 of 106.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

Header Page 41 of 106.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

Header Page 42 of 106.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

Header Page 43 of 106.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

Header Page 44 of 106.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

Header Page 45 of 106.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

Header Page 46 of 106.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

Header Page 47 of 106.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

Header Page 48 of 106.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

Header Page 49 of 106.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

Header Page 50 of 106.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

Header Page 51 of 106.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

Header Page 53 of 106.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

Header Page 54 of 106.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

Header Page 55 of 106.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

Header Page 56 of 106.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

Header Page 57 of 106.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

Header Page 58 of 106.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

Header Page 59 of 106.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

Header Page 60 of 106.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

Header Page 61 of 106.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

Header Page 63 of 106.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

Header Page 64 of 106.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

Header Page 65 of 106.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

Header Page 66 of 106.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

Header Page 67 of 106.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

Header Page 68 of 106.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

Header Page 69 of 106.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

Header Page 70 of 106.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

Header Page 71 of 106.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

Header Page 72 of 106.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

Header Page 73 of 106.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

Header Page 74 of 106.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

Header Page 75 of 106.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

Header Page 76 of 106.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

Header Page 77 of 106.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

Header Page 78 of 106.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

Header Page 79 of 106.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

Header Page 80 of 106.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

Header Page 81 of 106.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

Header Page 82 of 106.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

Header Page 83 of 106.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

Header Page 84 of 106.

REV. DISCRIPTION DATE DRN. CHD. APPD

NAME DATE
DETAIL OF EARTHING DRN
PIT CHD.
APPD

SHEET : 1 OF 1
HPCL/GL-1D REV.: 0
Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region
Header Page 85 of 106.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

Header Page 86 of 106.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

Header Page 87 of 106.

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

Header Page 88 of 106.

List of approved Makes for Civil works

Sr.
Description of Item Approved Makes/ manufacturers
No.
Ultratech, Gujarat Ambuja, Lafarge,Birla, RAMCO,
1 Cement( OPC/PPC/PSC) ACC, Chettinad, Coramandal, Zuari,Jaypee, JK
Lakshmi,Prism ,Birla Chetak
TISCO, SAIL, VIZAG STEEL (RINL), JISCO, JVSL, LLYOD
2 Reinforcement steel/structural steel
STEEL, ESSAR , Kamdhenu, Rathi, Moira, Goel
3 Water proofing Compounds/Admixtures Pidilite / Sika/ Fosroc
4 Ceramic floor tile / wall tile Somany/ Johnson / Kajaria/Murudeswar/NITCO
Marbogranite / Granamite /
5 Polished vitrified ceramic tile
Diamontile/somany/NITCO
6 Plywood National / Kit ply/ Green ply / Assam Prestige
7 Lamination Decolam / Formica / Sun Mica/Green Lam
8 Aluminium door/window Jindal / Indal / Hindalco
9 Floor spring/door closer Everite / Hardwin/Dorma
Acrylic emulsion Paints / distempers /synthetic
10 ICI / Asian Paint/ Berger / Nerolac
enamel paint
11 Cement Paint Snowcem / Berger/Nitco / Asian Paint/Nerolac
12 Glazing / glass Modi float / Saint Gobain/ASI/Gujarat Gaurdian
Designer pavings / Vibrant Besser / Aeons / Hicon /
13 Paver block
Malu/ Shan Fly ash/ Sheild/approved eqvavalent
Inter arch / Inter Tech / Tiger steel / Intersil Metallic
14 Roofing sheet for canopy
products (Conwed) / Kirbi/Jindal steel(JSW)
Inter arch / Inter Tech / Tiger steel / Luxalon/ Intersil
15 False ceiling material for canopy
Metallic products (Conwed) / Kirbi
Water closet / wash basin / urinal / flushing
16 Hindustan Sanitary ware, Parryware, Neycer
cistern / WC cover

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

Header Page 89 of 106.

CP brass fittings like bib cock, stop cock, pillar

17 Jaquar / Parko/ ESSESS / Plumber/L&K
cock, bottle trap, waste coupling
Supreme / Prince/ Finolex / Oriplast/Flow Guard/Jain
18 PVC pipe
Irrigation
19 GI pipe / MS pipe Tata/ Zenith/ Gujarat steel (GST)/ Jindal/Surya
20 Gun metal gate valve / check valve Leader / GG/ South Paint (ISI marked)/zoloto
21 PVC water tank Sintex / Reno/ Aquatech/POLYCON/UNIPLAST
22 Glass, mirror Modi Guard, Saint Gobain, Float Glass,ASI
23 G.I Malleable fittings Unik, Zoloto
GM or copper alloy Gate/peet/ globe / check
24 Kingston, Leader, Zoloto, GG
valve
25 HDPE Pipe Prince, supreme, Jain Irrigation, Finolex, Kissan.
26 SWR - PVC pipe & fittings Prince, Premium, Supreme, Finolex, Kissan
27 Water supply - PVC pipes & fittings Prince, supreme, Jain Irrigation, Finolex, Kissan.
28 Flush valves Jaguar, Parko, Orient,Plumber,ESSESS
29 Electronic flsuh valve for Urinal Cera, Parryware, Jaguar
30 Water Pumps & Pump sets Kirloskar,KSB, Texmaco,Suguna,CRI,GRUNDFOS
31 Ductile iron Man hole Covers and Frames Jeyswal NECO, Kejariwal, Kiswock
32 UPVC pipes & fittings Prince, supreme, Jain Irrigation, Finolex, Kissan.
Prince, supreme, Jain Irrigation, Finolex, Kissan,
33 CPVC pipe
Flowguard, Astral
34 Polysulphide sealant Pidilite, Fosroc ,sika
35 Gypsum Board System India Gypsum, Laffarge
36 Pre-Laminated Particle Board Novopan, Greenlam, Kitlam, Marino
37 Flush door shutters Century, Kitply, Novapan, Green Ply, Marino
38 White Cement/Wall Putty Birla White, JK,NCL
39 PVC doors Rajshri, Sintex,Plasopan

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

Header Page 90 of 106.

List of approved Makes for Electrical

works

1 MCCB/ELCB/MCB L&T / Seimens/ Havells/schneider/standard/Legrand

2 SFU/ FSU/ HRC/ fuses / MCB L&T / Havells / Alsthom/ Standard/schneider
3 MCB Distribution Boards MDS / Havells/ Hager/ MK SENTRY/schneider/Hensel
4 PVC conduits and accessories Prince/supreme/Finolex
5 PVC Insulated copper wire (FRLS) Finnolex / Havells / Polycab/RK Kable
6 Switch / sockets Anchor Roma / MK India/havells
7 Angle hoolder / batten holder/ ceiling rose Anchor
8 TV/ telephone socket Anchor Roma / MK India
9 Telephone wire/ cable BSNL Approved make
10 LT cables CCI/ Universal / Nicco/ Finnolex / Glowstar/ RPG
11 Light fittings / ballast / lamps( CFL/TL) Philips/ Wipro/ Bajaj/ Crompton/GE
12 Ceiling fans (double ball bearing) Crompton / Polar/ Khaitan / Havells
13 Exhaust fans Crompton / Polar/ Khaitan / Havells
14 KWH meter BHEL/ SIMCO/ India Meter/schneider
15 Ammeter / Voltmeter L&T / AE/ IMP/MECO/RUSHAB
16 Selector switch L&T/Standard/GE
17 Indicating lamps (LED type) Siemens/ Technic/GE
18 GI pipes / MS pipes Jindal / GST/ Tata/ Zenith/Surya

Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region

Header Page 91 of 106.

SPECIFICATIONS

FOR

MANUFACTURING, SUPPLYING AND

LAYING

OF

PRECAST CEMENT CONCRETE

INTERLOCKING PAVER BLOCKS AS

PER IS-15658:2006

1
Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region
Header Page 92 of 106.

INDEX

I. Scope of Work

II. Technical Specification

1. Paver Block Manufacturing Facilities.

2. Raw Materials.

3. Paver Block Characteristics.

4. Paver Block Dimensions.

5. Testing of Paver Blocks.

6. Laying of Paver Blocks.

7. Laying Patterns.

2
Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region
Header Page 93 of 106.

I. SCOPE OF WORK

The scope of work includes supplying and laying of precast paver blocks of
strength and quality as specified at various Retail outlets. The work includes:

1.1 Verification of the existing site condition and advising our project incharge
to lay suitable base course, if required. Contractors are required to satisfy
themselves with quality of sub-grade, sub-base course before the paver
blocks are laid and suggest strengthening if required.

1.2 Clearing the site by removing all obstacles such as stones, debris etc. for
laying of paver blocks.

1.3 The manufacturing of paver blocks in the manufacturing plant should be as

per IS-15658; 2006 and requirements as given in technical specification
enclosed.

1.4 Supplying of paver blocks at site, including handling at both ends.

1.5 Laying of paver blocks at site on 50mm thick sand bedding as per
requirement in technical specification, within shortest possible time. In case,
site is existing operating Retail Outlets, care should be taken to ensure that
the Retail Outlet operation is not closed / hampered. The job of paver blocks
laying may be carried out during night hours, if required and as instructed by
EIC.

1.6 Testing of paver blocks as per IS-15658; 2006, through reputed Govt. / Non
Govt. Test house (Duly recognized) and submission of test results as per
requirements in technical specifications. HPCL reserves the right to carryout
tests at random. Cost of such tests shall be borne by HPCL if the samples
pass and by contractor if it fails.

1.7 The contractor shall guarantee that all material and components designed,
fabricated, supplied and laid shall be free from any type of defect due to
faulty material, and / or workmanship for a period of One year from the date
of completion of work at individual sites. In case of any defect e.g.
settlement, depression, abrasion, chipping, cracks etc, the party shall re-
lay the pavers in that particular area within 15 days of intimation as
directed without claiming any cost what so ever. Otherwise, HPCL

3
Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region
Header Page 94 of 106.

reserves the right to get the rectification done by engaging another

agency at contractor’s risk and cost.

1.8 The job may be carried out at an operating Retail outlet, hence all necessary
precautions in line with petroleum / explosive rules shall be taken by
contractor. In addition to this, safety precautions as per direction of EIC shall
also be taken like barricading etc.

II. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

1 Paver Block Manufacturing facilities

HPCL, at its discretion shall nominate its representative for inspection of

the factory from where the party is getting the paver block. Party shall co-
ordinate and co-operate with representative of HPCL and that of factory for
the inspection. The party shall inform the address, telephone numbers and
other details of the workshop and the contact person to enable HPCL
depute its representative. The party shall ensure the entry to HPCL
representative during all working days and time at factory.

The Paver Block shall be made in factory with following minimum facilities:

1.1 Design Mix Concrete:

a) All pavers designated by strength shall be treated as design mix concrete.
The aggregate and cement shall be measured by weight in an approved
weigh batching equipment. Mixing water shall be measured in graduated
litre cans. One or more complete bags of cement shall be used for each
batch of concrete.
b) The contractor shall be responsible for designing mixes (even though the
manufacturing plant be not of the contractor) of the specified
performance to suit the degree of workability and characteristic strength.
The mix design shall be finalized before manufacturing of the paver
considering a set of suppliers for cement, sand and aggregates. In case of
any change of suppliers of cement, sand or aggregates, party should have
design mix ready for alternate suppliers.
c) The minimum cement content for compacted concrete of pavers shall not
be less than 380 Kg / cum.

4
Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region
Header Page 95 of 106.

d) The maximum water cement ratio for pavers concrete shall not be more
than 0.40
e) The design mix proportions for each set of raw material suppliers shall be
finalized and approved by the authorized lab for the required compressive
strength and the lab report with proportions should be available with the
vendor at all times for scrutiny and verification purpose.

1.2 Paver Block Making Machine:

The machine should be capable of producing high quality Paver Blocks by
obtaining high level of compaction by application of hydraulic compaction
and also by high intensity vibration to the moulds. The machine should have
automatic control panel and shall apply a minimum pressure of 3000 psi and
then there shall be automatic cut off of hydraulic circuit without any manual
interference. In no case, pavers mould by manual force or by machine
without auto cut off shall be accepted. All pavers shall have uniformity in
strength.

1.3 Weigh Batching & Mixing Equipment:

a) The proportioning of ingredients of concrete per batch of concrete shall be

performed by an approved weigh batching machine. Water shall be fed into
the mixer from a tank provided with means for adjusting the flow of water
so as to supply the quantity determined for concrete as per mix design .Due
allowance shall be made for the weight of water carried by aggregates so that
actual amount added at the mixer can be reduced as necessary. For this
purpose the moisture content of coarse and fine aggregates shall be
ascertained as and when required and at other times when alteration of the
moisture content may be expected due to new deliverance of aggregates,
inclement weather or other reasons.

b) Volumetric batching of concrete may be allowed after the design mix is

approved by lab after testing, by converting the proportion of concrete from
weight to volumetric measurement subject to facilities being made available
by the contractor for verifying and monitoring this.

c) All necessary equipment such as measuring boxes, devices for determination

of moisture and bulking in sand, slump cone, etc. shall be provided / arranged
by the contractor. Concrete shall be machine mixed until there is a uniform
distribution of materials and uniform colour and consistency is achieved and
under no circumstances for less than two minutes.

The concrete Mix Design should be followed for each batch of materials. .

5
Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region
Header Page 96 of 106.

1.4 Curing :
The contractor to ensure the factory should have well designed curing area
to ensure adequate (minimum 14 days) curing of paver blocks OR as per IS-
15658; 2006

1.5 Laboratory
The contractor to ensure the factory should have the following:
(i) Compression testing machine of capacity minimum 200 MT
(ii) Other tools and equipment for testing raw materials and paver blocks.
(iii) (1) Systematic record of test results of various paver blocks
manufactured in the factory.
(2) Concrete Mix Design for desired grade of concrete used for
making of paver blocks.

2. Raw Materials.

2.1 CEMENT
The cement used in the manufacture of high quality precast concrete paving
blocks shall be conforming to IS 12269 (53 grade ordinary Portland cement)
or IS 8112 (43 grade ordinary Portland cement). The minimum cement
content in concrete used for making paver blocks should be 380 kg/Cum.

2.2 AGGREGATES
The fine and coarse aggregates shall consist of naturally occurring crushed
or uncrushed materials, which apart from the grading requirements comply
with IS 383-1970. The fine aggregates used shall contain a minimum of 25%
natural silicon sand. Lime stone aggregates shall not be used. Aggregates
shall contain no more than 3% by weight of clay & shall be free from
deleterious salts and contaminants. Zone iv sand shall not be acceptable.
Course aggregate shall be 10 mm and below.

2.3 WATER
The water shall be clean and free from any deleterious matter. It shall meet
the requirements stipulated in IS: 456-2000.

2.4 OTHER MATERIALS

Any other materials / ingredients used in the concrete shall conform to I.S.
Specifications and as mentioned in IS-15658; 2006

6
Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region
Header Page 97 of 106.

PIGMENT : The pigment shall be used only on wearing and top surface and
through out the paver block. The pigment used shall not be more than 10%
of weight of cement used in the wearing course layer. However, use of
pigment shall in no way alter the required strength of the paver block.

Pigment used for coloring paver blocks shall have durable color. It shall not
contain matters detrimental to concrete. The pigment shall not contain Zinc
compound. Lead pigment shall not be used OR as specified in IS-15658;2006

3. Pavers Block Characteristics

3.0 The inter locking concrete paver tiles should strictly conform to IS-15658;
2006. They shall be tested as per the code and have to qualify limits specified
in the code.

3.1 The paver tiles should be made of design mix concrete, of approved size,
shape and manufactures as mentioned in IS-15658;2006

3.2 The concrete pavers should have perpendicularities after release from the
mould and the same should be retained until the laying.

3.3 The surface should be of anti skid and anti glare type.

3.4 The paver should have uniform chamfers to facilitate easy drainage of
surface run off.

3.5 The concrete mix design should be followed of each batch of materials
separately and weigh batching plant is to be used to achieve uniformity in
strength and quality.

3.6 The pavers shall be manufactured in single layer or more to ensure smooth
surface on top and to remove all voids.

3.7 The pavers shall be of cement Grey colour without any pigment or coloured
with pigment or with chemically treated top surface as specified.

3.8 The pavers are to be skirted all round with kerbing or otherwise as per
direction of EIC, using solid concrete blocks made of grade 1:1.5:3 concrete,
of size 100mm X 200mm X 400mm. The kerbing should be embedded for
100mm depth. The concrete used for kerbing shall be cured properly for 7
days minimum. The payment for laying kerb blocks will be made separately.

7
Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region
Header Page 98 of 106.

3.9 All paver blocks shall be sound and free of cracks or other visual defects,
which will interfere with the proper paving of the unit or impair the strength
or performance of the pavement constructed with the paver blocks.

4. Paver Block Physical Dimensions

Thickness 80mm

Shape Regular (Uniform shape with no

Hollow or Cracks)

Chamfer 4 mm to 7 mm along top edges

Colour Natural cement Grey colour without use

of any pigment, OR colour as specified

Dimensional Tolerance Tolerances as per IS-15658 ; 2006

KINDLY NOTE : ALL OTHER VISUAL/PHISICAL &

DIMENSIONAL ACCEPTANCE ON PARAMETERS LIKE, ASPECT
RATIO, PLAN AREA, WEARING SURFACE AREA, SQUARENESS
etc AS PER IS-15658; 2006

5. Testing of Paver Blocks.

Sampling and Testing Procedure strictly As Per IS – 15658; 2006.

6. Laying of Paver Blocks.

6.1 PRIMING

8
Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region
Header Page 99 of 106.

The contractor is required to verify the existing WBM driveway surface and
ascertain the CBR value. Accordingly the total subgrade thickness required
for achieving the desired CBR value shall be advised to HPCL within seven
days of receipt of call-up. HPCL shall, through regular vendors arrange to
carryout such WBM, wherever required. Before taking over the site, the
Paver block laying party is required to verify the stabilization of the surface
with CBR values. In case, contractor does not advise the CBR value within
seven days, HPCL shall carry out WBM as per own design, and contractor
shall have no claim later particularly to the quality of WBM or sub-grade.
It will be the responsibility of the Paver block party to ensure that the
Manholes / Pipeline / Cable trenches / circular drainage system etc. is raised
to driveway level using the requisite materials as per instruction of EIC. The
areas of potholes / deep depressions at the isolated locations shall be filled
up and properly compacted before laying the paver blocks. No extra payment
will be made for this purpose. The area of raised manholes shall be included
in the measurement of overall area of paver blocks for the purpose of
payment.

6.2 BEDDING SAND COURSE

The bedding sand shall consist of naturally occurring, clean, well graded sand
passing through 4.75mm sieve and suitable to concrete manufacture. The
bedding should be from either a single source or blended to achieve the
following grading.

IS SIEVE SIZE % PASSING

9.52mm 100
4.75mm 95-100
2.36mm 80-100
1.18mm 50-100
600 microns 25-60
300 microns 10-60
150 microns 5-15
75 microns 0-10

Contractor shall be responsible to ensure that single-sized, gap-graded sands

or sands containing an excessive amount of fines or plastic fines are not used.
The sand particles should preferably be sharp, not rounded. The sand used
for bedding shall be free of any deleterious soluble salts or other
contaminants likely to cause efflorescence.

9
Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region
Header Page 100 of 106.

The sand shall be of uniform moisture content, which shall be within 4% -

8%, at the time of spreading and shall be protected against rain when
stockpiled prior to spreading. Saturated sand shall not be used.
The bedding sand shall be spread loose in a uniform layer as per drawing.
The compacted uniform thickness shall be 50mm and within  5mm.
Thickness variation shall not be used to correct irregularities in the base
course surface.
The spread sand shall be carefully maintained in a loose dry condition and
protected against pre-compaction both prior to and following spreading. Any
pre-compacted sand left overnight shall be loosened before further laying of
paver blocks takes place.
Sand shall be slightly spread in a loose condition to the predetermined depth
only slightly ahead of the laying of the paver block.
Any depressions in the spread sand exceeding 5mm shall be loosened, raked
and re spread before laying of paver block.

6.3 LAYING OF INTERLOCKING PAVER BLOCK:

Paver block shall be laid in herringbone laying pattern throughout the
pavement. Once the laying pattern has been established, it shall continue
without interruption over the entire pavement surface. Cutting of blocks, the
use of infill concrete or discontinuities in laying pattern is not to be permitted
in other than approved locations.
Paving units shall be placed on the un-compacted sand bed to the nominated
laying pattern, care shall be taken to maintain the specified bond throughout
the job. The first row shall be located next to an edge restraint. Specially
manufactured edge paving units are permitted or edge units may be cut using
a power saw, a mechanical or hydraulic guillotine, bolster or other approved
cutting machine. No haphazardly broken pavers shall be used.
Paver block shall be placed with the help of spacers to achieve gaps
nominally 2 to 3mm wide between adjacent paving joints. No joint shall be
less than 2mm nor more than 4mm. However it is mandatory to use 3.0mm
wide spacer while laying paver tiles so as to ensure uniform 3.0mm gap
between adjacent pavers. Frequent use of string lines shall be used to check
alignment. In this regard, the “laying face” shall be checked at least every
two metres as the face proceeds. Should the face become out of alignment, it
must be corrected prior to initial compaction and before further laying job is
proceeded with.
In each row, all full units shall be laid first. Closure units shall be cut and
fitted subsequently. Such closure units shall consist of not less than 25% of
a full unit.

10
Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region
Header Page 101 of 106.

To fill spaces between 25mm and 50mm wide, concrete having minimum
1:1:2 cement : sand : coarse aggregate mix and a strength of 40 N/Sqmm
shall be used. Within such mix the nominal aggregate size shall not exceed
one third the smallest dimension of the infill space. For smaller spaces dry
packed mortar shall be used.
Except where it is necessary to correct any minor variation occurring in the
laying bond, the paver block shall not be hammered into position. Where
adjustment of position is necessary care shall be taken to avoid premature
compaction of the sand bedding.

6.4 INITIAL COMPACTION

After laying the paver block, they shall be compacted to achieve
consolidation of the sand bedding and brought to design levels and profiles
by not less than two (2) passes of a suitable plate compactor.
The compactor shall be a high-frequency, low amplitude mechanical flat
plate vibrator having plate area sufficient to cover a minimum of twelve
paving units.
Prior to compaction all debris shall be removed from the surface.
Compaction shall proceed as closely as possible following laying and prior
to any traffic. Compaction shall not, however, be attempted within one meter
of the laying face. Compaction shall continue until lipping has been
eliminated between adjoining units. Joints shall then be filled and
recompacted as described in Clause 6.5
All work further than one meter from the laying face shall be left fully
compacted at the completion of each day’s laying.
Any blocks that are structurally damaged prior to or during compaction shall
be immediately removed and replaced.
Sufficient plate compactors shall be available at the paving site for both
bedding compaction and joint filling.

6.5 JOINT FILLING AND FINAL COMPACTION

As soon as practical after compaction and in any case prior to the termination
of work on that day and prior to the acceptance of any traffic, sand for joint
filling shall be spread over the pavement.

11
Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region
Header Page 102 of 106.

Joint sand shall pass a 2.36mm (No. 8) sieve and shall be free of soluble salts
or contaminants likely to cause efflorescence. The same shall comply with
the following grading limits:
IS SIEVE SIZE % PASSING
2.36mm 100
1.8mm 90-100
600mm 60-90
300 microns 30-60
150 microns 15-30
75 microns 10-20

The Contractor shall supply a sample of the jointing sand to be used in the
contract prior to delivering any such material to site for incorporation into
the works. Certificates of test results issued by a recognised testing
laboratory confirming that the sand sample conforms to the requirements of
this specification shall be submitted prior to supply of total volume required.
The jointing sand shall be broomed to fill the joints. Excess sand shall then
be removed from the pavement surface and the jointing sand shall be
compacted with not less than one (1) pass of the plate vibrator and joints
refilled with sand to full depth. This procedure shall be repeated until all
joints are completely filled with sand. No traffic shall be permitted to use the
pavement until all joints have been completely filled with sand and
compacted.
Both the sand and paver block shall be dry when sand is spread and broomed
into the joints to prevent premature setting of the sand.
The difference in level (lipping) between adjacent units shall not exceed
3mm with not more than 1% in any 3m X 3m area exceeding 2mm. Pavments
which is deformed beyond above limits after final compaction, shall be taken
out and relaid to the satisfaction of the Engineer in charge.

6.6 EDGE RESTRAINT USING KERB BLOCK

Edge restraints shall be done using the kerb blocks as specified in 3.9.They
should be fixed properly to withstand overriding by the anticipated traffic,
thermal expansion and to prevent loss of the laying course material from

12
Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region
Header Page 103 of 106.

beneath the surface course. The edge restraint should present a vertical face
down to the level of the underside of the laying course.
The surface course should not be vibrated until the edge restraint, together
with any bedding or concrete haunching, has gained sufficient strength. It is
essential that edge restraints are adequately secured.

6.7 UNIFORM INTERLOCKING SPACES

The pavers should have uniform interlocking space of 2mm to 3mm to ensure
compacted sand filling after vibration on the paver surface.

6.8 SKILLED LABOUR

Skilled labour should be employed for laying blocks to ensure line and level
of pavers, desired shape of the surface and adequate compaction of the sand
in the joints.

7. Laying Patterns

Details of laying pattern should be specified before commencement of laying.

appendix -A

Sampling of Paver blocks.

1. Method of sampling
Before laying paver blocks, each designated section comprising not more than
50000 blocks, shall be divided into ten approximately equal groups. Three
blocks shall be drawn from each group.
2. Marking and Identification
All samples shall be clearly marked at the time of sampling in such a way that
the designated section of part thereof, and the consignment represented by the
sample, are clearly defined.
The sample shall be dispatched to the approved test laboratory taking precaution
to avoid damage to the paving in transit. Protect the paving from damage and
contamination until they have been tested. The testing shall be carried as soon as
possible, after the sample has been taken. As soon as practicable after sampling.
The samples shall be stored in water at 20 degree C 5 degree C for 24 hours
prior to testing.
APPENDIX – B
Procedure for Testing of Compressive Strength of Paver Blocks.
Reference : BS 6717 Part-I (1993) Specification for Paving Blocks

13
Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region
Header Page 104 of 106.

B.1 TESTING MACHINE : The testing machines shall be of suitable capacity for
the test and capable of applying the load at the rate specified. It shall comply, as
regards repeatability and accuracy with the requirements of relevant ISI specs.

B.2 PROCEDURE : The sample specimens shall be tested in wet condition after
being stored for at least 24 hours, in water maintained at a temperature of 20 degrees
C 5 degrees C. before the specimens are submerged in water, the necessary area
shall be determined by the method described in Appendix A .
The plates of the testing machine shall be wiped clean and any loose grit or other
material removed from the contact faces of the specimen. Plywood nominally 4mm
thick, shall be used as packing between the upper and lower faces of the specimen
and the machine plates, and these boards shall be larger than the specimen by a
margin of at least 5mm at all points. Fresh packing shall be used for each specimen
tested. The specimen shall be placed in the machine with the wearing surface in a
horizontal plane and in such away that the axes of the specimen are aligned with
those of the machine plates. The load shall be applied without shock and increased
continuously at the rate of Approximately 15 N/sqmm per minute until no greater
load can be sustained. The maximum load applied to the specimen shall be recorded.

B.3 CALCULATION OF CORRECTED STRENGTH : The compressive strength

of each block specimen shall be calculated by dividing the maximum load by full
cross section area and multiplying by an appropriate factors.

Thickness And Chamfer Correction Factors

For Compressive Strength
Work Size Thickness in mm Correction Factors
Plain block Chamfered block
60 1.00 1.06
80 1.12 1.18
100 1.18 1.24

B.4 COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH CALCULATION : The average corrected

compressive strength for the designated block section shall be calculated.

APPENDIX - C
Method for Determining of Wet Transverse Strength
( Flexural Strength )
1. The pavers shall be tested wet after soaking in water for 24 hours.
2. The specimen shall be placed horizontally on two parallel steel supports, with
wearing surface upwards and its sides parallel to the supports. At least one
of the supports shall be self-adjusting.

14
Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region
Header Page 105 of 106.

3. The load shall be applied by means of a steel rod parallel to the supports and
mid way between them.
4. Plywood padding about 3mm thick and 20mm wide shall be placed between
the paver and each of the supports and between the paver and the steel rod.
5. The load shall be applied gradually and at a uniform rate.
6. The load ‘P’ which caused the breaking of the paver shall be recorded.
7. The wet transverse strength ‘F’ shall be calculated as follows:
F=3PL / 2BT
Where,
P- breaking load in N,
L- span between supports in mm,
B- with of the paver in mm,
T- thickness of the paver in mm.
8. The average wet transverse strength shall be reported.

APPENDIX – D

Method for Determining of Resistance to wear

(Abrasion Resistance)
The grinding path of the disc of the abrasion-testing machine shall be event
strewn with 20 g. of the abrasive powder. The specimen shall than be fixed
in the holding device with the surface to be ground facing the disc, and loaded
at the center with 300N (30’kgf). The grinding disc shall than be up in motion
at a speed of 30 rev/min and the abrasive powder is continuously fed back on
to the grinding pat so that it remains uniformly distributed in a track
corresponding to the width of the test piece. After every 22 revolutions, the
disc shall be stopped the abraded tile powder and the remainder of the
abrasive powder shall be removed from the disc, and fresh abrasive powder
in quantities of 20g applied each time. After every 22 revolutions the
specimen shall be turned about the vertical axis through an angle of 90 in the
clockwise direction and it should be repeated 9 times thereby giving total
number of revolutions of 220. the disc, the abrasive powder and the specimen
shall be kept dry throughout the duration of the test. After the abrasion is
over, the specimen shall be reweighed to the nearest 0.1 g. it shall then be
placed in the thickness measuring apparatus once again in an identical
manner and the reading taken with the same position and setting of the dial
gauge as for the measurement before abrasion.
The wear shall be determined from the difference in readings obtained by the
measuring instrument before and the abrasion of the specimen. The value
shall be checked up with the average loss in thickness of the specimen
obtained by the following formula.

15
Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region
Header Page 106 of 106.

T = ( W1-W2) V1
W1 X A
Where,
T = average loss in thickness in mm,
W = initial mass of specimen in g,
W = final mass of abraded specimen g,
V = initial volume of specimen in mm
A = surface area of the specimen in mm

APPENDIX – E

Method for the determination of water Absorption

1. The test specimens shall be completely immersed in water at room
temperature for 24 hours.
2. The specimens shall then be weighed, while suspended by a metal
wire and completely submerged in water.

3. They shall be removed from the water and allowed to drain for one
minute.

4. Visible surfaces water being removed with a damp cloth , and

immediately weighed.

5. Subsequent to saturation, all specimens shall be dried in a ventilated oven

at 100 to 115 C for not less than 24 hours and until two successive
weighting at intervals of 2 hours show an increment of loss not greater
than 0.2 percent of the last previously determined mass of the specimen.

6. Calculate the absorption as follows:

Absorption, kg/m = A – B X 1000
A-C
Absorption, percent = A –B X 100
B
Where,
A = wet mass of unit in kg,
B = dry mass of unit in kg, and
C = suspended immersed mass of unit in kg.

16
Technical Specification HPCL, Jabalpur Retail Region